Small Unmanned Aircraft System (Suas) RQ-11B NSN 1550-01-538-9256 (EIC: 60C)

TM 1-1550-695-13&P
TECHNICAL MANUAL
OPERATOR AND FIELD MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INCLUDING REPAIR PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOLS LIST
FOR
SMALL UNMANNED AIRCRAFT SYSTEM (SUAS)

RQ-11B NSN 1550-01-538-9256 (EIC: 60C)
Distribution D – Distribution is authorized to Department of Defense and U.S. DoD contractors onlyto protect critical technology. This determination
was made on 9 January 2007. Other requests for this document shall be referred to UAS Project Office, SFAE-AV-UAS-LO, Redstone Arsenal, AL
35898.
WARNING – This document contains technical data whose export is restricted by the Arms Export Control Act (Title 22, U.S.C., Sec 2751, et. seq.)
or the Export Administration Act of 1979, as amended, Title 50, U.S.C., App. 2401 et. seq. Violations of these export laws are subject to severe
criminal penalties. Disseminate in accordance with provisions of DoD Directive 5230.25.
DESTRUCTION NOTICE – Destroy by any method that will prevent disclosure of contents or reconstruction of the document.
HEADQUARTERS, DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY

28 MARCH 2008
TM 1-1550-695-13&P
CHANGE HEADQUARTERS
NO. 1 DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
WASHINGTON, D.C., 11 JUNE 2008
TECHNICAL MANUAL

FOR

RQ-11B NSN 1550-01-538-9256 (EIC: 60C)
CURRENT AS OF 28 March 2008

35898.
TM 1-1550-695-13&P, 28 March 2008, is updated as follows:

1. File this sheet in front of the manual for reference.
2. This change is a result of MWO 1-1550-695-50-1.
3. New or updated text is indicated by a vertical bar in the outer margin of the page.
4. Added illustrations are indicated by a vertical bar in the outer margin of the page. Illustrations are indicated by a
vertical bar adjacent to the figure number. Changed vertical bar adjacent to the figure number.Replace the following
pages with this revised version.
Remove Pages Insert Pages
A/B blank A/B blank
i through iii/iv blank i through iii/iv blank
5. Replace the following work packages with their revised version.
Work Package Number
WP 0003 00
WP 0007 00
WP 0012 00
WP 0026 00
WP 0039 00
WP 0040 00
WP 0044 00
WP 0061 00
WP 0063 00
WP 0065 00
WP 0066 00
TM 1-1550-695-13&P
6. Add the following new work packages.

Work Package Number
WP 0057 01
TM 1-1550-695-13&P
WARNING SUMMARY
WARNING SUMMARY (LRIP AND FRP)

For information concerning First Aid, refer to FM 4-25.11 (First Aid). This warning summary contains general safety
warnings that must be understood and applied during operation and maintenance of the RQ-11B Small Unmanned
Aircraft System (SUAS). Failure to observe these warnings could result in serious injury or death to personnel.
WARNING
The RQ-11B system should be operated by a team of two certified and current operators.
RQ-11A certification does not authorize operation of RQ-11B systems.
WARNING
Preflight verification of IR payload laser illuminator function shall be done while aiming the beam
straight down onto a non-reflective, diffusive surface such as dirt or dry grass. Never direct the
illuminator upwards or at anyone during this check. The illuminator must be in the “off” state at
the end of Preflight Check, to ensure no risk to the AV launcher. Failure to comply may result in
injury to personnel.
WARNING
Four person lift requirement. When box 2 FRP> WP 0003 00, Table 9 < is packed for shipping, it
. .
weighs 121.5 pounds. Four persons are required for lifting and/or carrying this packed shipping
case. Weight must be distributed as evenly as possible between the four personnel. Failure to
comply can result in injury to personnel.
WARNING
Four person lift requirement. When box 2 LRIP> WP 0002 00, Table 9 < is packed for shipping, it
. .
weighs 121.5 pounds. Four persons are required for lifting and/or carrying this packed shipping
case. Weight must be distributed as evenly as possible between the four personnel. Failure to
comply can result in injury to personnel.
WARNING
Two person lift requirement. When box 1 FRP> WP 0003 00, Table 9 < is packed for shipping,
. .
the shipping case weighs 64 pounds. Two persons are required for lifting and/or carrying this
packed shipping case. Failure to comply can result in injury to personnel.
a
TM 1-1550-695-13&P
WARNING SUMMARY – Continued
WARNING
Two person lift requirement. When box 1 LRIP> WP 0002 00, Table 9 < is packed for shipping,
. .
the shipping case weighs 64 pounds. Two persons are required for lifting and/or carrying this
packed shipping case. Failure to comply can result in injury to personnel.
WARNING
Severe injury or death can result when any part of the human body comes in contact with live
electrical circuits. Soldiers must be especially alert to the dangers of exposed circuits, terminals,
power entry panels, and the like.
WARNING
A rotating propeller can cause personal injury or equipment damage. Use the GCS to command
Autoland before installing the air vehicle battery to prevent inadvertent motor start. Keep all
body parts clear of the propeller and keep the propeller arc clear of obstruction when inserting
the battery and at all times when the battery is installed. Propeller is “live” once the battery is
connected. Remove the battery from the air vehicle before beginning disassembly.
WARNING
Lithium Ion batteries can cause a fire or explode if mishandled. Do not puncture, overheat, short
circuit, improperly charge, or improperly dispose of Lithium Ion batteries. If a battery overheats
or exhibits bulging, place the battery in an open location and wait for its condition to stabilize.
Dispose of the battery IAW Service procedures.
WARNING
Air vehicles in flight can impact objects/personnel if flight path and flight path control are not
managed properly, especially during takeoff and landing. Personnel in the landing site area
should be prepared to move quickly if necessary.
b
TM 1-1550-695-13&P
WARNING
Channel selection must be coordinated in advance to avoid interference between systems.

Failure to do so could result in personal injury or damage to the system, disruption of mission,
or loss of air vehicle.
SAFETY, CARE AND HANDLING
Weight Of Equipment
The weight of some system equipment exceeds a single person’s lift capability. Lifting these items requires two or more
persons.
Dents and Tears to Air Vehicle Skin
The RQ-11B SUAS, is designed to sustain considerable dent and tear damage to the air vehicle skin and remain oper-
able. Dents and tears can be repaired with tape to prevent further tearing. Components should not be used for flight if
dents or tears become so severe that structural strength or proper component alignment become noticeably compro-
mised.
Wings, Rudder and Stabilator Construction
The wings, rudder and stabilator are constructed of a relatively soft foam core covered with a thin Kevlar skin. Exces-
sive force applied to these components during handling can result in dents. Avoid excessive squeezing or pinching of
these parts.
Tailboom Connector
Do not twist the connection between the tailboom and fuselage when connecting and disconnecting these parts. Twist-
ing will stress the connector and can cause irreparable damage.
Stabilator (Stab) Clip Inspection and Damage
Conduct frequent inspections to assure the stab clip is not damaged and snap arms are not stretched apart. The stabi-
lator will not clip on securely if the stab clip is damaged or stretched apart and may cause the stabilator to fall off during
launch or flight. Replace immediately if snap arm spreading is observed.
The high wing configuration of the air vehicle allows it to tilt or rock from side to side in the wind or on sloping ground
while resting on the ground. When at rest on the ground, the low positioning of the stabilator places it directly on the
ground. If the stabilator remains attached for balance, the force of these tilting loads is concentrated on the stab clip
and snap arms. This can easily stretch the stab clip snap arms excessively.
Wing Connections
Inspect wing snap screws frequently for damage. Ensure they are not starting to crack from previous use. Remove
wing snap screws to inspect if necessary. Replace wing snap screws if any doubt exists.
The wingtips are connected to the center wing by friction. If there is any doubt that the friction is sufficient to keep the
wingtips in place during flight, a small strip of tape should be placed across the seam to ensure wingtips will remain se-
cure. In turbulent wind conditions, an unsecured wingtip may work apart in flight, causing the air vehicle to crash.
Field Repair
Minimize the amount of tape used for repair to avoid adding excessive weight and/or changing the balance of the air
vehicle. Avoid applying tape to tail of aircraft. Air vehicle balance is critical. Excessive weight on the tail will adversely
affect performance.
c
TM 1-1550-695-13&P

Cleaning
Many common cleaning chemicals will cause severe deterioration to the foam within the air vehicle structure. Kevlar
and foam used for component fabrication are sensitive to most chemicals, including alcohol. Acetone, Methyl Ethyl Ke-
tone (MEK), or similar will damage/destroy components immediately. It is recommended that only paper towels or soft
rags moistened with water or mild soap be used to clean surfaces. Do not soak or immerse components in water. Com-
ponents do not have completely sealed surfaces. Excessive exposure to water may allow some to penetrate compo-
nent surfaces leading to delamination over time. Avoid water and soap entering fuselage or tailboom electronics and
connectors. This may lead to corrosion over time. Allow time for components to dry out completely before returning to
storage cases. Do not use abrasive detergents or abrasive cleaning pads. Never use sandpaper or steel wool.
Battery Shipping and Disposal
Batteries are shipped IAW the following regulations and service procedures:
U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
Ground: Code Federal Regulations (CFR) 49
Air: International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO), International Air Transportation Association (IATA)
Sea: International Maritime Organization (IMO)
d
TM 1-1550-695-13&P
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES/WORK PACKAGES
INSERT LATEST UPDATED PAGES/WORK PACKAGES. DESTROY SUPERSEDED DATA.

Dates of issue for original and changed pages/work packages are:
Original .. 0 ... 28 Mar 2008 Change .. 1 ... 11 Jun 2008
THE TOTAL NUMBER OF PAGES FOR FRONT AND REAR MATTER IS 17 AND THE TOTAL NUM-
BER OF WORK PACKAGES IN THIS MANUAL IS 72 CONSISTING OF THE FOLLOWING:
Page / WP *Change Page / WP *Change Page / WP *Change Page / WP *Change

No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No.
A ................................... 1 WP 0015 00 .................. 0 WP 0035 00 .................. 0 WP 0055 00 .................. 0
B blank..........................1 WP 0016 00 .................. 0 WP 0036 00 .................. 0 WP 0056 00 .................. 0
i.....................................1 WP 0017 00 .................. 0 WP 0037 00 .................. 0 WP 0057 00 .................. 0
ii....................................1 WP 0018 00 .................. 0 WP 0038 00 .................. 0 WP 0057 01 .................. 1
iii................................... 1 WP 0019 00 .................. 0 WP 0039 00 .................. 1 WP 0058 00 .................. 0
iv blank..........................1 WP 0020 00 .................. 0 WP 0040 00 .................. 1 WP 0059 00 .................. 0
WP 0001 00 .................. 0 WP 0021 00 .................. 0 WP 0041 00 .................. 0 WP 0060 00 .................. 0
WP 0002 00 .................. 0 WP 0022 00 .................. 0 WP 0042 00 .................. 0 WP 0061 00 .................. 1
WP 0003 00 .................. 1 WP 0023 00 .................. 0 WP 0043 00 .................. 0 WP 0062 00 .................. 0
WP 0004 00 .................. 0 WP 0024 00 .................. 0 WP 0044 00 .................. 1 WP 0063 00 .................. 1
WP 0005 00 .................. 0 WP 0025 00 .................. 0 WP 0045 00 .................. 0 WP 0064 00 .................. 0
WP 0006 00 .................. 0 WP 0026 00 .................. 1 WP 0046 00 .................. 0 WP 0065 00 .................. 1
WP 0007 00 .................. 1 WP 0027 00 .................. 0 WP 0047 00 .................. 0 WP 0066 00 .................. 1
WP 0008 00 .................. 0 WP 0028 00 .................. 0 WP 0048 00 .................. 0 WP 0067 00 .................. 0
WP 0009 00 .................. 0 WP 0029 00 .................. 0 WP 0049 00 .................. 0 WP 0068 00 .................. 0
WP 0010 00 .................. 0 WP 0030 00 .................. 0 WP 0050 00 .................. 0 WP 0069 00 .................. 0
WP 0011 00...................0 WP 0031 00 .................. 0 WP 0051 00 .................. 0 WP 0070 00 .................. 0
WP 0012 00 .................. 1 WP 0032 00 .................. 0 WP 0052 00 .................. 0 WP 0071 00 .................. 0
WP 0013 00 .................. 0 WP 0033 00 .................. 0 WP 0053 00 .................. 0
WP 0014 00 .................. 0 WP 0034 00 .................. 0 WP 0054 00 .................. 0
* Zero in this column indicates an original page or work package
A/B blank Change - 1

TM 1-1550-695-13&P
HEADQUARTERS
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
Washington, D.C., 28 March 2008
TECHNICAL MANUAL

FOR

RQ-11B NSN 1550-01-538-9256 (EIC: 60C)
REPORTING ERRORS AND RECOMMENDING IMPROVEMENTS

You can improve this manual. If you find any mistakes or if you know of a way to improve these procedures, please let
us know. Mail your letter or DA Form 2028 (Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms), located in the
back of this manual, directly to: Commander, U.S. Army Aviation and Missile Command, ATTN: AMSAM-MMC-MA-NP,
Redstone Arsenal, AL 35898-5000. A reply will be furnished to you. You may also send in your comments electronically
to our E-mail address: 2028@redstone.army.mil or by fax 256-842-6546/DSN 788-6546. For the World Wide Web use:
https://amcom2028.redstone.army.mil. Instructions for sending an electronic 2028 may be found at the back of this man-
ual immediately preceding the hard copy 2028.
CURRENT AS OF 28 March 2008

35898.
i Change 1
TM 1-1550-695-13&P
TABLE OF CONTENTS
WP Sequence No.
WARNING SUMMARY
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
CHAPTER 1 – GENERAL INFORMATION, EQUIPMENT

DESCRIPTION AND THEORY OF OPERATION
General Information (LRIP and FRP) ........................................................................ ..........................0001 00
Equipment Description And Data LRIP> .................................................................. ..........................0002 00
.
Equipment Description And Data FRP> ................................................................... ..........................0003 00

.
Theory Of Operation (LRIP and FRP)..................................................................................................0004 00
CHAPTER 2 – OPERATOR INSTRUCTIONS

Controls and Indicators (LRIP and FRP)..............................................................................................0005 00
Displays LRIP> ..................................................................................................................................0006 00
.
Displays FRP> ...................................................................................................................................0007 00

.
Warning Displays LRIP> ....................................................................................................................0008 00

.
Warning Displays FRP> .....................................................................................................................0009 00

.
System Assembly (LRIP and FRP)......................................................................................................0010 00

Preflight Procedures LRIP> ................................................................................................................0011 00
.
Preflight Procedures FRP> ...................................................................................... ..........................0012 00

.
Launch (LRIP and FRP)............................................................................................ ..........................0013 00

Landing, Recovery and Inspection LRIP> ................................................................ ..........................0014 00
.
Landing, Recovery and Inspection FRP> ...........................................................................................0015 00

.
System Disassembly (LRIP and FRP).................................................................................................0016 00

Post-Flight Procedures (LRIP and FRP)..............................................................................................0017 00
Battery Charging Procedure LRIP> ....................................................................................................0018 00
.
Battery Charging Procedure FRP> .....................................................................................................0019 00

.
FalconView and the RPUAV Tool LRIP> .............................................................................................0020 00

.
FalconView and the RPUAV Tool FRP> ..............................................................................................0021 00

.
Mission Image Processing (LRIP and FRP).........................................................................................0022 00

AVScreener LRIP> .............................................................................................................................0023 00
.
AVScreener FRP> ..............................................................................................................................0024 00

.
Range and Bearing Tool......................................................................................................................0025 00

Basic Mission Planning (LRIP and FRP)..............................................................................................0026 00
Remote Launch (LRIP and FRP).........................................................................................................0027 00
Heads Down Landing Procedure (LRIP and FRP)...............................................................................0028 00
Untrained Assistant Operations (LRIP and FRP).................................................................................0029 00
Handoff Procedure (LRIP and FRP).......................................................................... ..........................0030 00
Airborne Operations (LRIP and FRP)..................................................................................................0031 00
Loading the GPS Crypto-Key (LRIP and FRP) .......................................................... ..........................0032 00
GPS Degradation or Failure (LRIP and FRP) ............................................................ ..........................0033 00
Simulator (LRIP and FRP)...................................................................................................................0034 00
Emergency Procedures (LRIP and FRP).............................................................................................0035 00
CHAPTER 3 – FIELD LEVEL TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES

Introduction To Troubleshooting (LRIP and FRP) ...................................................... ..........................0036 00
Troubleshooting Index (LRIP and FRP)...............................................................................................0037 00
Change 1 ii
TM 1-1550-695-13&P
TABLE OF CONTENTS – Continued

WP Sequence No.
Intermittent Or No GPS Signal.............................................................................................................0038 00

No Video Or Degraded Video On GCS/RVT........................................................................................0039 00
No Data Overlay on GCS/RVT .................................................................................. ..........................0040 00
Throttle Control Malfunction...................................................................................... ..........................0041 00
Roll Gyro, Yaw Gyro, Stabilator, Rudder or Autoland Engage Malfunction...........................................0042 00
Pitot System Malfunction.....................................................................................................................0043 00
CHAPTER 4 – FIELD LEVEL MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS

Service Upon Receipt (LRIP and FRP)................................................................................................0044 00
Introduction Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) (LRIP and
FRP)...........................................................................................................................................0045 00
Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) (LRIP and FRP).................. ..........................0046 00
RQ-11B Maintenance..........................................................................................................................0047 00
AV Skin And Wing Leading Edge Repair (LRIP and FRP)....................................................................0048 00
Snap Screws Replacement.................................................................................................................0049 00
Stabilator (Stab) Clip Replacement........................................................................... ..........................0050 00
Propeller Replacement ............................................................................................. ..........................0051 00
Replace The GPS Battery......................................................................................... ..........................0052 00
Pitot Tube Repair or Replacement.......................................................................................................0053 00
AV Battery Fuse Replacement .................................................................................. ..........................0054 00
Magnetic Compass Calibration ................................................................................. ..........................0055 00
Left And Right Wing O-Ring Replacement...........................................................................................0056 00
Rudder Linkage, Stabilator Linkage, And Stabilator Horn Replacement..............................................0057 00
Bypass/Connection Of the 8 Channel RF Unit Downlink Filter.............................................................0057 01
Preparation For Storage Or Shipment.................................................................................................0058 00
CHAPTER 5 – SUPPORTING INFORMATION

References (LRIP and FRP)................................................................................................................0059 00
Introduction To Maintenance Allocation Chart (MAC) (LRIP and FRP) ...................... ..........................0060 00
Maintenance Allocation Chart (MAC) (LRIP and FRP) .............................................. ..........................0061 00
Introduction To Repair Parts And Special Tools List (RPSTL) (LRIP and FRP) .......... ..........................0062 00
Repair Parts List (LRIP and FRP)........................................................................................................0063 00
Group 0101 System, RQ-11B, Army, SUAS ...................................................... ..........................0063 00
Group 0102 Air Vehicle...................................................................................... ..........................0063 00
Group 0103 GCS-RVT.................................................................................................................0063 00
Group 0104 Initial Spares Package..............................................................................................0063 00
Group 0105 Flying Surfaces Kit ......................................................................... ..........................0063 00
Group 0106 Small Spare Parts Kit................................................................................................0063 00
Group 0107 Field Repair Kit.........................................................................................................0063 00
National Stock Number Index (LRIP and FRP)....................................................................................0064 00
Part Number Index (LRIP and FRP) .......................................................................... ..........................0065 00
Components Of End Item (COEI) And Basic Issue Items (BII) Lists (LRIP and FRP). ..........................0066 00
Expendable And Durable Items List Introduction (LRIP and FRP)............................. ..........................0067 00
(REPRODUCIBLE) SUAS Incident Report (LRIP and FRP)................................................................0068 00
(REPRODUCIBLE) SUAS Mission Request Form (LRIP and FRP).....................................................0069 00
(REPRODUCIBLE) Flight Log (LRIP and FRP)...................................................................................0070 00
Reconnaissance, Surveillance, and Target Acquisition (RSTA) Kit (LRIP and FRP).. ..........................0071 00
iii/iv blank Change 1

TM 1-1550-695-13&P
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
This manual describes the operating principles and technical details of the RQ-11B SUAS.
This manual attempts to cover all functional aspects of the RQ-11B system, including system description, safety, as-
sembly, operation interface, field operations, data recording, field maintenance and support.
The manual is intended for use in an approved classroom environment under the guidance of experienced instructors.
Thereafter, it is intended as a source of reference for operators that have completed the approved operator training
course. It is not intended for use as a self-guided tutorial substituted for the approved training course.
The operator and maintenance tasks covered are listed in the Table of Contents. The manual is organized into five
chapters. Each chapter is then divided into multiple work packages.
All task descriptions will lead the user step-by-step through the procedure. Before beginning a task, the user should
read through the procedure completely to determine the procedure’s goal, then go back and follow the steps as writ-
ten.
Pay particular attention to all Warnings, Cautions, and Notes, as they contain information that will prevent injury to per-
sonnel, damage to the equipment or items of emphasis.
Status of Work Package revisions is found in the List of Effective Pages preceding the Table of Contents.
LRIP AND FRP INDICATORS
This manual contains instructions for both RQ-11B (LRIP) and (FRP) systems. FRP systems can be identified by la-
bels affixed to the fuselage, controller and hub unit. The labels annotate software version upgrades and are located in
the immediate vicinity of the respective data plates. FRP systems will have labels on controller and hub unit indicating
software version 1.4.0 or higher and a label on the fuselage indicating software version 19.02 or higher.
WORK PACKAGE TITLES
The work package titles have labels to identify applicable configuration content as outlined below:
1. LRIP> : LRIP only

.
2. FRP> : FRP only

.
3. (LRIP and FRP): Both. Within these work packages, LRIP> or FRP> indicator will designate information that applies
. .
to that particular system. The ending tag, “ <” may appear to clarify when that system’s information is completed.
.
4. No label: Both
USE OF SHALL, SHOULD, AND MAY
Within this technical manual, the word shall is used to indicate a mandatory requirement. The word should is used to
indicate non-mandatory but preferred method of accomplishment. The word may is used to indicate an acceptable
method of accomplishment.
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS AND NOTES
The signal words WARNING, CAUTION, and NOTE are used to identify levels of hazard seriousness. These signal
words are used throughout this document to emphasize critical information. Read and follow these statements to en-
sure personnel safety and prevent product damage. The signal words are defined below.
v
TM 1-1550-695-13&P
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL – Continued
WARNING
A procedure, practice, or condition, etc. that may result in injury or death if not carefully observed
or followed.
CAUTION
A procedure, practice, or condition, etc. that may damage equipment if not carefully observed
or followed.
NOTE
A procedure, practice, or condition, etc. that is essential to emphasize.
vi
TM 1-1550-695-13&P
CHAPTER 1
GENERAL INFORMATION,
EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION AND THEORY OF OPERATION
FOR
(RQ-11B)
(NSN: 1550-01-538-9256)
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0001 00
SMALL UNMANNED AIRCRAFT SYSTEM (RQ-11B)

NSN 1550-01-538-9256 EIC: 60C
GENERAL INFORMATION (LRIP AND FRP)
SCOPE
The RQ-11B SUAS is a Reconnaissance, Surveillance Targeting Acquisition (RSTA) tool. The system transmits live
airborne video images, compass headings and location information to a ground control station (GCS) to a optional lap-
top if connected, and to a remote video transceiver (RVT). This capability enables operators to navigate, search for tar-
gets, recognize terrain, and record all information for analysis. RQ-11B provides operational capability in the following
areas:
• Remote reconnaissance and surveillance and target acquisition (RSTA).

• Force protection.
• Convoy security.
• Battle damage assessment.
This operator’s manual provides technical information and guidance for assembly, operation, and maintenance.
MAINTENANCE FORMS, RECORDS, AND REPORTS
Department of the Army forms and procedures used for equipment maintenance will be those prescribed by (as appli-
cable) DA PAM 750-8, Functional Users Manual for the Army Maintenance Management System (TAMMS); or AR 700-
138, Army Logistics Readiness and Sustainability.
REPORTING EQUIPMENT IMPROVEMENT RECOMMENDATIONS (EIR)
If your RQ-11B SUAS needs improvement, let us know. Send us an EIR. You, the user, are the only one who can tell us
what you don’t like about your equipment. Let us know why you don’t like the design or performance. Put it on an SF
368 (Product Quality Deficiency Report). Mail it to the address specified in DA PAM 750-8, Functional Users Manual
for the Army Maintenance Management System (TAMMS), or as specified by the acquiring activity. We will send you a
reply.
CORROSION PREVENTION AND CONTROL (CPC)
Corrosion Prevention and Control (CPC) of Army materiel is a continuing concern. It is important that any corrosion
problems with this item be reported so that the problem can be corrected and improvements can be made to prevent
the problem in future items.
Corrosion specifically occurs with metals. It is an electrochemical process that causes the degradation of metals. It is
commonly caused by exposure to moisture, acids, bases, or salts. An example is the rusting of iron. Corrosion dam-
age in metals can be seen, depending on the metal, as tarnishing, pitting, fogging, surface residue, and/or cracking.
Plastics, composites, and rubbers can also degrade. Degradation is caused by thermal (heat), oxidation (oxygen),
solvation (solvents), or photolytic (light, typically UV) processes. The most common exposures are excessive heat or
light. Damage from these processes will appear as cracking, softening, swelling, and/or breaking.
The form should be submitted to the address specified in DA PAM 750-8, The Army Maintenance Management System
(TAMMS) Users Manual.
DESTRUCTION OF ARMY MATERIEL TO PREVENT ENEMY USE
For information concerning destruction of Army materiel to prevent enemy use, refer to TM 750-244-1-5, Procedures
for Destruction of Air Vehicle (AV) and Associated Equipment to Prevent Enemy Use.
PREPARATION FOR STORAGE OR SHIPMENT
Refer to Preparation for Storage or Shipment Work Package (WP 0058 00) for system disassembly and packaging.
0001 00-1
0001 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS/ACRONYMS
AC Alternating Current
ACO Airspace Control Order
AGL Above Ground Level
Ah Ampere hour
ALICE All-Purpose Lightweight Individual Carrying Equipment
ALT Altitude Hold Mode
AO Area of Operations
AV Air Vehicle
BII Basic Issue Items
CAGEC Commercial and Government Entity Code
CFOV Center Field of View
CFR Code of Federal Regulations
Cno Carrier to Noise Ratio
COEI Components of End Item
CoT Cursor on Target
COTS Commercial Off the Shelf
CPC Corrosion Prevention and Control
CVw Crypto Variable Weekly
DA Department of the Army
DAFIF Digital Aeronautical Flight Information File
DC Direct Current
DOD Department of Defense
DOT Department of Transportation
DTED Digital Terrain Elevation Data
EIC End Item Code
EIR Equipment Improvement Recommendation
EO Electro-optical
EW Electronic Warfare
FDA Food and Drug Administration
FG Flight Gear
FIG Figure
FOV Field of View
FRK Field Repair Kit
FRP Full Rate Production
GCS Ground Control Station
GFE Government Furnished Equipment
GPS Global Positioning System
GUV Group Unique Variable
HMMWV High Mobility Multi-purpose Wheeled Vehicle
IATA International Air Transportation Association
IAW In Accordance With
ICAO International Civil Aviation Organization
IMO International Maritime Organization
IP Internet Protocol
IR Infrared
ISP Initial Spares Package
ITAR International Traffic in Arms Regulation
Km Kilometer
JPG Joint Photographic Experts Group
LED Light Emitting Diode
Li-Ion Lithium Ion
0001 00-2
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0001 00
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS/ACRONYMS – CONTINUED

LOIT Loiter Mode
LOL Loss of Link
LOS Line-of-Sight
LRIP Low Rate Initial Production
LSB Link Status Bar
MAC Maintenance Allocation Chart
MAG CAL Magnetic Calibration
MAN Manual Mode
MEK Methyl Ethyl Ketone
MGRS Military Grid Reference System
MO Mission Operator
MOPP Mission Oriented Protective Posture
MSL Mean Sea Level
mW Milliwatt
nm Nanometer
NAV Navigation Mode
NHA Next Higher Assembly
NIIN National Item Identification Number
NITF National Imagery Transmission Format
NOHD Nominal Ocular Hazard Distance
NSN National Stock Number
OPORD Operations Order
PAM Pamphlet
PC Personal Computer
PDB Parachute Drop Bag
PMCS Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services
P/N Part Number
QTY Quantity
RAM Random Access Memory
RF Radio Frequency
ROA Restricted Operating Area
RPSTL Repair Parts and Special Tools List
RPUAS Rucksack Portable Unmanned Aircraft System
RSTA Reconnaissance, Surveillance, and Target Acquisition
RTB Return to Base
RVT Remote Video Transceiver
SAASM Selective Availability Anti-Spoofing Module
SF Standard Form
SMR Source Maintenance and Recoverability
SOC Status Of Charge
SOP Standard Operating Procedures
STAB Stabilator
SUAS Small Unmanned Aircraft System
SV Secure Voice
TAMMS The Army Maintenance Management System
TMDE Test, Measurement and Diagnostic Equipment
TX Transmit
UAV Unmanned Aerial Vehicle
UBC Universal Battery Charger
UDP User Datagram Protocol
UOC Usable on Code
USB Universal Serial Bus
0001 00-3
0001 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS/ACRONYMS – CONTINUED
UTC Universal Time Coordinated

UTM Universal Transverse Mercator
UUT Unit Under Test
VAC Volts Alternating Current
VCR Video Cassette Recorder
VCSEL Vertical Cavity Surface Emitting Laser
VDC Volts Direct Current
VGA Video Graphic Adapter
VO Vehicle Operator
WP Work Package
QUALITY OF MATERIAL
Material used for replacement, repair, or modification must meet the requirements of this TM 1-1550-695-13&P. If
quality of material requirements are not stated in this Manual, the material must meet the requirements of the draw-
ings, standards, specifications, or approved engineering change proposals applicable to the subject equipment.
SAFETY, CARE, AND HANDLING
Follow all flight, landing handling and launch procedures to prevent damage to equipment and injury to personnel. See
special safety instructions in the Warning Summary.
0001 00-4
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0002 00

NSN 1550-01-538-9256 EIC: 60C
EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION AND DATA LRIP> .
EQUIPMENT CHARACTERISTICS, CAPABILITIES, AND FEATURES

SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS
The RQ-11B AV can be launched and recovered in minutes without special equipment on unprepared terrain. The sys-
tem employs a self-stabilizing AV configuration with stability augmentation avionics, and provides ease of control and
steady video imagery. Air and ground components are lightweight and easily configured for rucksack transport. The
RQ-11B AV is battery-powered and has low visual, acoustic, and thermal signatures. The system includes two types of
payloads, electro-optical (EO) and infrared (IR). The EO payload houses two color cameras, front-look and side-look;
and the IR payload houses a side-look IR camera with laser illuminator. The RQ-11B AV flies for 60-90 minutes on
rechargeable Lithium Ion (Li-Ion) battery packs. The RQ-11B system should be operated by two Operators consisting
of a Vehicle Operator (VO) and a Mission Operator (MO).
The components listed in Table 1 make up the RQ-11B SUAS.
Table 1. System Components.
COMPONENT QUANTITY
AV 3
EO Payload, Forward- and Side-look 3
IR Payload, Side-look 2
Ground Control Station (GCS)/Remote Video Transceiver (RVT) 2
RSTA Kit (separate Government Furnished Equipment) (GFE) 1
Initial Spares Package 1
Field Repair Kit 3
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS

RQ-11B AV
The RQ-11B AV is assembled from eight components. It is broken down for storage and transportation into the AV Soft
Pack. A foam liner supports and protects the AV and accessories from damage, and the waterproof “dry bag” keeps the
system dry when submersed up to two meters for up to two hours. The AV Soft Pack carries one AV, two payloads, and
a Field Repair Kit (FRK).
The RQ-11B AV’s characteristics are listed in Table 4.
The RQ-11B AV is equipped with four channels/frequencies to allow multiple systems to operate in close proximity
(though it is recommended that systems operate no closer than 400m to one another). (See WP 0026 00 for more
information on procedures for operating multiple GCSs in close proximity). The data links operate at the frequencies
listed in Table 2 unless otherwise noted on the AV fuselage and hub assigned to that system.
0002 00-1
0002 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS – CONTINUED
Table 2. RQ-11B Frequencies.
CHANNEL UPLINK (MHZ) DOWNLINK (MHZ)

1 395.000 1787.5
2 395.050 1810.0
3 395.100 1840.0
4 394.950 1760.0
PAYLOADS
NOTE
Center Field of View (CFOV) calculations without Digital Terrain Elevation Data (DTED) are
based on 500 ft. regardless of actual Above Ground Level (AGL) flight altitude.
NOTE
Video clarity is based on fixed focal length. Image quality degrades as altitude increases.
The RQ-11B AV carries an EO or IR camera payload in the nose of the AV. Five payloads are included with the system:
three EO Payloads; two IR Payloads.
EO Payload
The RQ-11B EO payload (P/N 51008) is equipped with a fixed digital front camera and a side-look camera capable of
pan, tilt and zoom functions.
EO Zoom Levels
When the side-look camera is selected, the following three zoom magnifications are available: 1, 1.42 and 2.85. These
correspond to horizontal fields of view of 34 deg., 24 deg. and 12 deg. To change zoom level, depress and hold the pay-
load button (see WP 0005 00, Table 3) while pushing the Menu Button to the left to cycle through successive zoom lev-
els. The image will change accordingly, and the zoom level indication will update. There will be a delay in the indicated
zoom level because the aircraft must first downlink confirmation of the selected zoom level.
EO Pan and Tilt
When in loiter (LOIT) mode or using orbit waypoints and with mid-level or full zoom selected, the joystick moves
zoomed center field of view within the constrains of non-zoomed field of view to digitally Pan and Tilt the image.
EO Image Stabilization Mode
If the AV is operating in Manual (MAN), Altitude Hold (ALT), HOME, or navigation (NAV) mode, the pan and tilt functions
act to digitally stabilize the camera using inputs from the AV’s gyroscopes. The AV can be flown normally at all zoom
levels while the image stabilization occurs automatically.
0002 00-2
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0002 00

Loiter Mode
If the AV is flying in a circle around a loiter point or any orbit waypoint, the camera is directed to look at the center field of
view coordinate. In this mode, flight control of the AV is disabled and the joystick controller allows the operator to redi-
rect the camera. This way, the operator can adjust the center field of view onto a point of interest or reacquire the loiter
point if orbit is not positioned correctly by pressing Enter twice.
IR Payload
The IR payload includes a laser IR illuminator. The illuminator is visible with night vision goggles but not visible through
the thermal imager in the IR payload. The IR Payload allows selection of either white-hot or black-hot polarity. There
are only two IR Payloads packed with the three AVs, one of the AV soft packs will not contain an IR payload.
Camera characteristics are listed in Table 3.
Table 3. Camera Characteristics.
PARAMETER EO FRONT-LOOK EO SIDE-LOOK IR

Video Pixels 768 x 492 2048 x 1536 320 x 240
Figure 1. Camera Payloads.

IR PAYLOAD LASER ILLUMINATOR
WARNING
The IR payload laser illuminator is classified as a type of laser that can cause injury. There is
no hazard to the skin or unaided eye; however, damage to the eye can occur if the beam, or
reflection of it from a mirror-like surface, is viewed at close range (2.2 m or less) with binoculars
or other magnifying optics. Avoid looking directly into the beam, and never look directly at
the beam through any magnifying object. Although the beam may not be visible to the eye, if
magnified, it can still cause damage. Never direct the laser upward or toward any personnel.
Failure to comply can result in personnel injury.
The OPV302 Vertical Cavity Surface Emitting Laser (VCSEL) in the RQ-11B IR Payload is classified from an opti-
cal hazards standpoint as a Class 1M laser product according to IEC 60825-1.2, or a Class 3B device according to
ANSI Z136.1. The illuminator’s wavelength was measured at 851 nm, according to Nonionizing Radiation Protection
Study No. 25-MC-04PD-06 performed in January 2006 by the U.S. Army Center for Health Promotion and Preventive
Medicine (USACHPPM). This wavelength is not visible to the naked eye or through the thermal imager in the IR pay-
load; however it is visible with night vision goggles. The OPV302 has a measured average power of 62.2 milliwatts
(mW) and a measured beam divergence of 28.3 mrad. The hazard to personnel from a laser is a function of the laser’s
irradiance, measured in power per unit area on which the beam impinges, and distance from the laser. The irradiance
0002 00-3
0002 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
is reduced as distance from the laser increases. The distance beyond which the laser’s irradiance will always be less
than permissible levels is known as the Nominal Ocular Hazard Distance (NOHD). In the case of the OPV302, the
NOHD is 0, because the laser is always safe to the unaided eye. There can still be a hazard, however, if the laser is
viewed through magnifying optics. To characterize this hazard, a measure known as the NOHD with Magnifying Op-
tics (NOHD-M) is used. For the OPV302, the NOHD-M is 2.2 meters, meaning that damage to the eye can occur if the
laser is viewed with magnifying optics, such as binoculars, at a distance of 2.2 meters or less. This hazard exists when
either viewing the laser directly (through magnifying optics), or in a specular (that is, mirror-like) reflection. A diffuse
reflection, such as off the ground, is usually not a hazard. Because of this, proper procedures must be followed when
using the illuminator to prevent injury to system operators or personnel nearby. The device is safe to operate when
these procedures are followed.
LABELING
The IR Payload with illuminator shall have the following label on it near the illuminator source:
Figure 2. Laser Warning Label.

ILLUMINATOR USE
The laser illuminator will only operate if all of the following conditions are met:
1. Payload is attached to powered up AV.
2. For three seconds, either:
a. AV is in flight.
b. Pitot tube is pressed.
3. Operator uses two button commands:
a. Depress Payload Control Button on back of Hand Controller.
b. Press Menu Button up to select IR Illuminator: ON.
To determine state of laser illuminator, press the Payload Control Button and observe the words “LASER ON/OFF”.
“ON” Has red background. Illuminator is ON.
“ON” Is blinking. Illuminator is enabled and will turn on when AV is in flight.
“OFF” Has red background. Illuminator has been commanded Off and will not turn on when
AV is in flight.
When using the IR Payload with illuminator, the illuminator shall be considered live once the AV battery is installed.
Preflight. Any required preflight verification of illuminator function should be done while aiming the beam straight down
onto a non-reflective, diffusive surface such as dirt or dry grass. Never direct the illuminator upwards or at anyone dur-
ing this check. The preflight checklist must end up with the illuminator in the “off” state.
0002 00-4
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0002 00
Postflight. The system operator will make sure that the illuminator is in the “off” state when approaching a recovery site
for landing. Personnel recovering the AV should consider the illuminator live until the AV battery has been removed,
and take the appropriate precautions. Never look into the beam line of the illuminator.
GCS
VO control the RQ-11B AV using the GCS. The GCS provides the Vehicle Operator with level 5 control of the RQ-11B
system which includes full control of the AV during launch, flight and landing along with full control of payload. The
GCS allows operations by a standard two-person crew, if operation by a single-person is required, the GCS allows VO
to control all data and inputs via a single Hand Controller.
NOTE
Monitor battery to ensure adequate voltage. Failure to maintain adequate battery voltage will
result in Loss of Link. The GCS LOW BATTERY VOLTAGE warning may not display correctly if
using a battery other than the BB-2557/U.
The basic GCS package, containing a single Hand Controller, is packaged in a waterproof soft pack, weighing approx.
7.9 lb. (and 12.8 lbs with laptop included). The GCS is equipped with two battery connectors to allow continuous opera-
tion, even while hot swapping batteries. The GCS will operate for approx. 1.5 to 2.0 hours on a single BB-2557 battery.
REMOTE VIDEO TRANSCEIVER (RVT)
CAUTION
Do not turn on uplink transmitter when using the RVT. If transmitter is turned on, the RVT may
take control of the AV. Failure to comply can cause damage to the equipment.
A second GCS can be used as an RVT. The RVT is used to view real-time video from any location within range of the
AV. To operate a GCS as an RVT, leave uplink antenna disconnected and transmitter switched off.
BATTERY CHARGERS AND BATTERIES
Battery Chargers
The initial issue of the RQ-11B system will come with two different battery charger configurations. In the Low Rate Initial
Production (LRIP) configuration the systems are provided with three individual battery chargers including: one Alter-
nating Current (AC) AV Battery Charger, one Direct Current (DC) AV Battery Charger and one GCS Battery Charger.
The Full Rate Production (FRP) configuration is delivered with two Universal Battery Chargers which can charge AV
and GCS batteries using AC or DC power. The LRIP configurations will be updated through attrition as the current stock
of the individual battery chargers are exhausted; when an individual battery charger is requisitioned, the replacement
battery charger provided will be the Universal Battery Charger. The battery chargers are described below.
Universal Battery Charger
The Universal Battery Charger is a portable, self contained unit capable of safely charging AV batteries. It weighs 8.5
lbs (including cable assemblies and adapters) and operates on power supply rated 10-32 Volts Direct current (VDC),
or 100-240 Volts Alternating Current (VAC) (50-60 Hz). See WP 0018 00 for the battery charging procedures.
The battery charger can charge two batteries simultaneously. It controls cell balancing, protects itself and batteries
from thermal damage and uses Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) to indicate charging status. It also provides visual alarm
and fault conditions.
0002 00-5
0002 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
The battery charger includes two GCS adapters, allowing users to charge GCS battery model numbers BB-390B/U,
BB-2590/U, BB-557/U and BB-2557/U.
Figure 3. Universal Battery Charger.

AC Battery Charger
The AC-only charger can be powered by any standard 110-220 V AC, 50-60 Hz outlet. The unit weighs 4.1 lb. Refer to
WP 0018 00 for the battery charging procedures.
1. Battery Charger
2. Battery Charger Cables
3. AC Plug
Figure 4. AV Battery Charger (AC).
0002 00-6
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0002 00
DC Battery Charger
The DC charger (4.4 lbs), has a main charging unit that can be powered by a 24 VDC source such as a High Mobility
Multi-purpose Wheeled Vehicle (HMMWV). See WP 0018 00 for the battery charging procedures.
1. Battery Charger
2. Batteries/Charger Cables
3. NATO Adapter Cable
Figure 5. RQ-11B AV Battery Charger (DC).

GCS/RVT Battery Charger
See manufacturers manual BTD-960002.
0002 00-7
0002 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
Rechargeable AV Battery
Li-ion polymer cells make up the RQ-11B rechargeable battery pack (see Figure 6). It has a fully charged voltage of
25.2 VDC and capacity of 4 Ampere hours (Ah).
Figure 6. RQ-11B AV Rechargeable Battery.

Rechargeable GCS/RVT Battery
The system is delivered with 10 BB-2557/U rechargeable GCS/RVT batteries.
The BB-2557 has a self-discharge rate of 10% per month. Ensure battery is fully charged prior to mission. Stow bat-
tery fully charged, recharge annually. The battery contains two 12 volt sections and a state of charge (SOC) display for
each section. Presence of all 10 SOC segments indicates 100% charge.
DIFFERENCES BETWEEN MODELS
COMPATIBILITY AND CONFIGURATION OF DIFFERENT RAVEN VERSIONS

Raven A/Pathfinder Raven
Early version introduced in 2003, still fielded to some units. Components of this system look the same as Raven B, and
there is some interoperability, but it is not 100% compatible with Raven B. This manual is not intended for use with the
Raven A/Pathfinder Raven.
LRIP Raven B
Low Rate Initial Production version fielded beginning in 2006. While most LRIP systems have been upgraded to FRP
configuration, some are still in the field. LRIP systems do not have all of the same capability as the FRP version, and
are not entirely interoperable.
FRP Raven B
Full Rate Production version fielded beginning in 2007. This is the baseline system that this manual is written for. The
most significant changes between LRIP and FRP systems are the addition of a Pan, Tilt, and Zoom capability with the
day payload and major software revision.
FRP and LRIP GCS Incompatibility
Mixing subcomponents of the GCS (hub, controller) between LRIP and FRP systems should be avoided. An LRIP con-
troller with an FRP hub will not operate together. Although an FRP controller will operate with a LRIP hub, the GCS/AV
locking function and FalconView “Show Hub DTED Coverage” button will not work.
Version/Configuration Identification
FRP systems have software version 1.4.0 or higher and fuselage software version 19.02 or higher.
0002 00-8
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0002 00
EQUIPMENT DATA
Table 4. AV Characteristics.
PARAMETER CHARACTERISTIC
Wingspan 55 in.
Length 36 in.
Structure modular, Kevlar composite
Weight (with payload) 4.2 lb.
Payload Weight 6.5 oz.
Normal Operating Altitude 150 to 1,000 ft. above ground level (AGL). Operating above 500 ft. AGL can
be accomplished but with reduced video sensor performance.
Cruise Speed 26 Knots
Range 10 Kilometer (km) line of sight (LOS)
Climb Rate 800 ft./min. at 2,000 ft. mean sea level (MSL)
Turn Rate 90º in 6 seconds
Motor Direct drive electric
AV Batteries Li-Ion (rechargeable)
Flight Duration 60-90 min.
Launch Hand launch
Landing Autoland deep stall
Navigation P(y)-code Global Positioning System/Selective Availability Anti-Spoofing
Module (GPS/SAASM) (WGS84) and electronic compass
Flight Control Manual or autonomous
Table 5. System Limitations.
LAUNCH ALTITUDE • Minimum Launch Altitude: No restrictions
• Maximum Launch Altitude: 10,000 ft. MSL
Launching above 10,000 ft. MSL can be accomplished but with reduced climb
rate and thus increased risk of impact with nearby obstacles.
LANDING ALTITUDE • Minimum Landing Altitude: No restrictions
• Maximum Landing Altitude: 10,000 ft. MSL
Landing above 10,000 ft. MSL can be accomplished but at higher than normal
descent rate and risks causing excessive damage to AV.
FLIGHT ALTITUDE • Minimum Flight Altitude: 50 ft AGL
• Maximum Flight Altitude: 10,500 ft. MSL
Operating above 10,500 ft. MSL can be accomplished, but with an overall im-
pact in flight performance, primarily reduced climb rate and flight endurance.
BLOWING SAND AND DUST The RQ-11B operates in blowing sand and dust with wind speeds up to 20
knots.
0002 00-9
0002 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
EQUIPMENT DATA – CONTINUED
Table 5. System Limitations. – Continued
WIND SPEED • Minimum: No restrictions
• Maximum: 20 knots
The RQ-11B can be operated in winds higher than 20 knots but with reduced
mission capability and higher risk of damage during launch, landing and
recovery.
RAIN Maximum: 0.25 inches per hour except for battery chargers which should not
be operated in rain.
TEMPERATURE • During extreme cold weather operations with older fuselages, insert
the AV battery prior to inserting tailboom into fuselage if servos do not
function on power up.
• During extreme cold weather operations the battery life of the AV will
be reduced.
• AV Soft Pack Rubber Seal should not be used when temperatures
below -20°C are expected.
• GCS/RVT Soft Pack Rubber Seal should not be used when temper-
atures below -20°C are expected.
SHOCK Maximum: High Altitude Low Opening (HALO) operations when stored in
tactical packaging.
Table 6. Operational Temperature Range.
SYSTEM COMPONENT MINIMUM TEMPERATURE (°C) MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE (°C)

AV -29 50
GCS/RVT 0 50
Battery Charger 0 50
Universal Battery Charger -20 50
Payload -29 50
Table 7. Storage Environments.
IMMERSION • Maximum depth: Two meters in tactical packaging.
• Maximum duration at depth: Two hours at two meters.
STORAGE AND TRANSPORT
ALTITUDE
• Minimum Storage and Transport Altitude: No restrictions when stored
in tactical packaging.
• Maximum Storage and Transport Altitude: 30,000 ft. MSL when stored
STORAGE AND TRANSPORT • Minimum: -40 °C in transport packaging.
TEMPERATURE • Maximum: 70 °C in transport packaging.
LOW PRESSURE Minimum: 8.8 inHg - a pressure equivalent to altitude of 30,000 when stored in
tactical packaging.
0002 00-10
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0002 00
Table 8. Anticipated Loadout Configuration.
ITEM WEIGHT/LBS MEASUREMENT (INCHES)

AV (including IR payload, EO payload, 7.5 12x9.5x21
battery, and FRK)
GCS/RVT (including battery) 9.1 10x7x15
Laptop Computer 4.9 9x22x14
Additional AV Battery (1 each) 1.1 2.5x6.25x1
Additional GCS/RVT Batteries (1 each) 1.2 4.5x4.4x2
0002 00-11
0002 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
Table 9. System Weights And Measurements For Shipping.
MEASUREMENT QUANTITY
ITEM WEIGHT/LBS (INCHES) IN BOX
Shipping Box 1 of 3 (includes items 65.0 22.5x31x19
below)
AV (packed - minus battery and payload) 4.8 12x9.5x21 3
(1 each)
GCS/RVT (packed - minus battery) 7.9 10x7x15 2
EO Payload 0.5 4.5x3.5x4.5 3
IR Payload 0.7 4.5x3.5x4.5 2
FRK 0.4 4.5x7x1 3
Items packed in Box 2 (includes items 118.5 22.5x31x19

below)
GCS/RVT Battery Charger 28.0 22x14x9 1
GCS/RVT Battery Charger (HMMWV 5.0 5.5x8.25x8.75 1
adapter)
GCS/RVT Battery (1 each) 1.2 4x4x1.5 10
AV AC Battery Charger 4.1 8.25x6.5x3.5 1
AV DC Battery Charger 4.4 8.25x6.5x3.5 1
Spare Flying Surfaces Kit 7.1 19x13.75x5 2
Spare Small Parts Kit 2.7 7.5x9.25x4.5 1
Spare AV Batteries (5 each) 6.9 7.5x9.25x4.5 2
Universal Battery Charger 8.5 11x10x5 2
Items packed in Box 3 (includes item 13.5 6.5x13.5x16.5

below)
Laptop Computer 4.9 10.75x2x8.5 1
0002 00-12
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0003 00

NSN 1550-01-538-9256 EIC: 60C
EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION AND DATA FRP> .
This WP supersedes WP 0003 00, dated 28 March 2008.
EQUIPMENT CHARACTERISTICS, CAPABILITIES, AND FEATURES

SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS
The RQ-11B AV can be launched and recovered in minutes without special equipment on unprepared terrain. The sys-
tem employs a self-stabilizing AV configuration with stability augmentation avionics, and provides ease of control and
steady video imagery. Air and ground components are lightweight and easily configured for rucksack transport. The
RQ-11B AV is battery-powered and has low visual, acoustic, and thermal signatures. The system includes two types of
payloads, electro-optical (EO) and infrared (IR). The EO payload houses two color cameras, front-look and side-look;
and the IR payload houses a side-look IR camera with laser illuminator. The RQ-11B AV flies for 60-90 minutes on
rechargeable Lithium Ion (Li-Ion) battery packs. The RQ-11B system should be operated by two Operators consisting
of a Vehicle Operator (VO) and a Mission Operator (MO).
The components listed in Table 1 make up the RQ-11B SUAS.
Table 1. System Components.
COMPONENT QUANTITY
AV 3
EO Payload, Forward- and Side-look 3
IR Payload, Side-look 2
Ground Control Station (GCS)/Remote Video Transceiver (RVT) 2
RSTA Kit (separate Government Furnished Equipment) (GFE) 1
Initial Spares Package 1
Field Repair Kit 3
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS

RQ-11B AV
The RQ-11B AV is assembled from eight components. It is broken down for storage and transportation into the AV Soft
Pack. A foam liner supports and protects the AV and accessories from damage, and the waterproof “dry bag” keeps the
system dry when submersed up to two meters for up to two hours. The AV Soft Pack carries one AV, two payloads, and
a Field Repair Kit (FRK).
The RQ-11B AV’s characteristics are listed in Table 4.
The RQ-11B AV is equipped with eight channels/frequencies to allow multiple systems to operate in close proximity
(though it is recommended that systems operate no closer than 400m to one another). (See WP 0026 00 for more
information on procedures for operating multiple GCSs in close proximity). The data links operate at the frequencies
listed in Table 2.
Table 2. RQ-11B Frequencies.
CHANNEL UPLINK (MHZ) DOWNLINK (MHZ) FILTER

CONFIGURATION
1 395.000 1787.5 Bypass
2 395.050 1810.0 Bypass
3 395.100 1840.0 Bypass
0003 00-1 Change 1 – 11 June 2008

0003 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
Table 2. RQ-11B Frequencies. – Continued
CHANNEL UPLINK (MHZ) DOWNLINK (MHZ) FILTER

CONFIGURATION
4 394.950 1760.0 Bypass
5 371.750 1717.5 Inline
6 372.950 1737.5 Inline
7 378.150 1752.5 Inline
8 384.750 1777.5 Inline
PAYLOADS
NOTE
Center Field of View (CFOV) calculations without Digital Terrain Elevation Data (DTED) are
based on 500 ft. regardless of actual Above Ground Level (AGL) flight altitude.
NOTE
Video clarity is based on fixed focal length. Image quality degrades as altitude increases.
The RQ-11B AV carries an EO or IR camera payload in the nose of the AV. Five payloads are included with the system:
three EO Payloads; two IR Payloads.
EO Payload
The RQ-11B EO payload is equipped with digital front and side-look cameras capable of pan, tilt and zoom functions.
EO Zoom Levels
The three zoom magnifications available are: 1, 1.46 and 2.88. These correspond to horizontal fields of view of 34 deg.,
24 deg. and 12 deg. To change zoom level, press and hold the payload button (see WP 0005 00, Table 3) while pushing
the Menu Button repeatedly to the left (for side view camera) or up (for front view camera) to cycle through successive
zoom levels. The image will change accordingly, and the zoom level indication will update. There will be a delay in the
indicated zoom level because the AV must first downlink confirmation of the selected zoom level.
EO Pan and Tilt
When in loiter (LOIT) mode or using orbit waypoints and with mid-level or full zoom selected, the joystick moves
zoomed CFOV within the constrains of non-zoomed field of view to digitally Pan and Tilt the image. Pan and Tilt are
available in forward and side view.
EO Image Stabilization Mode
The pan and tilt functions act to digitally stabilize the camera in all modes. The AV can be flown normally at all zoom lev-
els while the image stabilization occurs automatically.
IR Payload
The IR payload includes a laser IR illuminator. The illuminator is visible with night vision goggles but not visible through
the thermal imager in the IR payload. The IR Payload allows selection of either white-hot or black-hot polarity. There
are only two IR Payloads packed with the three AVs, one of the AV soft packs will not contain an IR payload.
Camera characteristics are listed in Table 3.
Change 1 0003 00-2

TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0003 00

Loiter Mode
If the AV is flying in a circle around a loiter point or any orbit waypoint, the camera is directed to look at the center field of
view coordinate. In this mode, flight control of the AV is disabled and the joystick controller allows the operator to redi-
rect the camera. This way, the operator can adjust the center field of view onto a point of interest or reacquire the loiter
point if orbit is not positioned correctly by pressing Enter twice.
Table 3. Camera Characteristics.
PARAMETER EO FRONT-LOOK EO SIDE-LOOK IR

Video Pixels 2048 x 1536 2048 x 1536 320 x 240
Figure 1. Camera Payloads.

IR PAYLOAD LASER ILLUMINATOR
WARNING
The IR payload laser illuminator is classified as a type of laser that can cause injury. There is
no hazard to the skin or unaided eye; however, damage to the eye can occur if the beam, or
reflection of it from a mirror-like surface, is viewed at close range (2.2 m or less) with binoculars
or other magnifying optics. Avoid looking directly into the beam, and never look directly at
the beam through any magnifying object. Although the beam may not be visible to the eye, if
magnified, it can still cause damage. Never direct the laser upward or toward any personnel.
Failure to comply can result in personnel injury.
The OPV302 Vertical Cavity Surface Emitting Laser (VCSEL) in the RQ-11B IR Payload is classified from an opti-
cal hazards standpoint as a Class 1M laser product according to IEC 60825-1.2, or a Class 3B device according to
ANSI Z136.1. The illuminator’s wavelength was measured at 851 nm, according to Nonionizing Radiation Protection
Study No. 25-MC-04PD-06 performed in January 2006 by the U.S. Army Center for Health Promotion and Preventive
Medicine (USACHPPM). This wavelength is not visible to the naked eye or through the thermal imager in the IR pay-
load; however it is visible with night vision goggles. The OPV302 has a measured average power of 62.2 milliwatts
(mW) and a measured beam divergence of 28.3 mrad. The hazard to personnel from a laser is a function of the laser’s
irradiance, measured in power per unit area on which the beam impinges, and distance from the laser. The irradiance
is reduced as distance from the laser increases. The distance beyond which the laser’s irradiance will always be less
than permissible levels is known as the Nominal Ocular Hazard Distance (NOHD). In the case of the OPV302, the
NOHD is 0, because the laser is always safe to the unaided eye. There can still be a hazard, however, if the laser is
viewed through magnifying optics. To characterize this hazard, a measure known as the NOHD with Magnifying Op-
tics (NOHD-M) is used. For the OPV302, the NOHD-M is 2.2 meters, meaning that damage to the eye can occur if the
laser is viewed with magnifying optics, such as binoculars, at a distance of 2.2 meters or less. This hazard exists when
either viewing the laser directly (through magnifying optics), or in a specular (that is, mirror-like) reflection. A diffuse
reflection, such as off the ground, is usually not a hazard. Because of this, proper procedures must be followed when
using the illuminator to prevent injury to system operators or personnel nearby. The device is safe to operate when
these procedures are followed.
0003 00-3 Change 1

0003 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
LABELING
The IR Payload with illuminator shall have one of the following label on it near the illuminator source:
Figure 2. Laser Warning Labels.
ILLUMINATOR USE
The laser illuminator will only operate if all of the following conditions are met:
1. Payload is attached to powered up AV.

2. For three seconds, either:
a. AV is in flight.
b. Pitot tube is pressed.
3. Operator uses two button commands:
a. Depress Payload Control Button on back of Hand Controller.

b. Press Menu Button up to select IR Illuminator: ON.
To determine state of laser illuminator, press the Payload Control Button and observe the words “LASER ON/OFF”.
“ON” Has red background. Illuminator is ON.

“ON” Is blinking. Illuminator is enabled and will turn on when AV is in flight.
“OFF” Has red background. Illuminator has been commanded Off and will not turn on when
AV is in flight.
When using the IR Payload with illuminator, the illuminator should be considered live once the AV battery is installed.
Preflight. Any required preflight verification of illuminator function shall be done while aiming the beam straight down
onto a non-reflective, diffusive surface such as dirt or dry grass. Never direct the illuminator upwards or at anyone dur-
ing this check. The preflight checklist must end up with the illuminator in the “off” state.
Postflight. The system operator will make sure that the illuminator is in the “off” state when approaching a recovery site
for landing. Personnel recovering the AV should consider the illuminator live until the AV battery has been removed,
and take the appropriate precautions. Never look into the beam line of the illuminator.
GCS
VO controls the RQ-11B AV using the GCS. The GCS provides the Vehicle Operator with level 5 control of the RQ-11B
system which includes full control of the AV during launch, flight and landing along with full control of payload. The
GCS allows operations by a standard two-person crew, if operation by a single-person is required, the GCS allows VO
to control all data and inputs via a single Hand Controller.
Change 1 0003 00-4

TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0003 00
NOTE
Monitor battery to ensure adequate voltage. Failure to maintain adequate GCS battery voltage
will result in Loss of Link. The GCS LOW BATTERY VOLTAGE warning must be set IAW
WP 0009 00.
The basic GCS package, containing a single Hand Controller, is packaged in a waterproof soft pack, weighing approx.
8.1 lb. (and 13.2 lbs with laptop included). The GCS is equipped with two battery connectors to allow continuous opera-
tion, even while hot swapping batteries. The GCS will operate for approx. 1.5 to 2.0 hours on a single BB-2557 battery.
The GCS/RVT can also be used with the BA-5590, the BB-390B/U and the BB-2590/U.
REMOTE VIDEO TRANSCEIVER (RVT)
CAUTION
Do not turn on uplink transmitter when using a GCS as an RVT. If the transmitter is turned on,
the RVT may inadvertently control the AV. Failure to comply can cause loss or damage to the
equipment.
A second GCS can be used as an RVT. The RVT is used to view real-time video from any location within range of the
AV. To operate a GCS as an RVT, leave uplink antenna disconnected and transmitter switched off.
BATTERY CHARGERS AND BATTERIES
Universal Battery Charger
The Universal Battery Charger is a portable, self contained unit capable of safely charging AV batteries. It weighs 8.5
lbs (including cable assemblies and adapters) and operates on power supply rated 10-32 Volts Direct Current (VDC),
or 100-240 Volts Alternating Current (VAC) (50-60 Hz). See WP 0019 00 for the battery charging procedures.
The battery charger can charge two batteries simultaneously. It controls cell balancing, protects itself and batteries
from thermal damage and uses Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) to indicate charging status. It also provides visual alarm
and fault conditions.
The battery charger includes two GCS adapters, allowing users to charge GCS battery model numbers BB-390B/U,
BB-2590/U, BB-557/U and BB-2557/U.
0003 00-5 Change 1

0003 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
Rechargeable AV Battery
Li-ion polymer cells make up the RQ-11B rechargeable battery pack, refer to Figure 4. It has a fully charged voltage of
25.2 VDC and capacity of 4 Ampere hours (Ah).
Figure 4. RQ-11B AV Rechargeable Battery.

Rechargeable GCS/RVT Battery
The system is delivered with 10 BB-2557/U rechargeable GCS/RVT batteries.
The BB-2557 has a self-discharge rate of 10% per month. Ensure battery is fully charged prior to mission. Stow bat-
tery fully charged, recharge annually. The battery contains two 12 volt sections and a state of charge (SOC) display for
each section. Presence of all 10 SOC segments indicates 100% charge.
DIFFERENCES BETWEEN MODELS
COMPATIBILITY AND CONFIGURATION OF DIFFERENT RAVEN VERSIONS

Raven A/Pathfinder Raven
Early version introduced in 2003, still fielded to some units. Components of this system look the same as Raven B, and
there is some interoperability, but it is not 100% compatible with Raven B. This manual is not intended for use with the
Raven A/Pathfinder Raven.
LRIP Raven B
Low Rate Initial Production version fielded beginning in 2006. While most LRIP systems have been upgraded to FRP
configuration, some are still in the field. LRIP systems do not have all of the same capability as the FRP version, and
are not entirely interoperable.
FRP Raven B
Full Rate Production version fielded beginning in 2007. This is the baseline system that this manual is written for. The
most significant changes between LRIP and FRP systems are the addition of a Pan, Tilt, and Zoom capability with the
day payload and major software revision.
FRP and LRIP GCS Incompatibility
Mixing subcomponents of the GCS (hub, controller) between LRIP and FRP systems should be avoided. An LRIP con-
troller with an FRP hub will not operate together. Although an FRP controller will operate with a LRIP hub, the GCS/AV
locking function and FalconView “Show Hub DTED Coverage” button will not work.
Version/Configuration Identification
FRP systems have software version 1.4.0 or higher and fuselage software version 19.02 or higher.
Change 1 0003 00-6

TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0003 00
EQUIPMENT DATA
Table 4. AV Characteristics.
Wingspan 55 in.
Length 36 in.
Structure modular, Kevlar composite
Weight (with payload) 4.2 lb.
Payload Weight 6.5 oz.
Normal Operating Altitude 150 to 1,000 ft. above ground level (AGL). Operating above 500 ft. AGL can
be accomplished but with reduced video sensor performance.
Cruise Speed 26 Knots
Range 10 Kilometer (km) line of sight (LOS)
Climb Rate 800 ft./min. at 2,000 ft. mean sea level (MSL)
Turn Rate 90º in 6 seconds
Motor Direct drive electric
AV Batteries Li-Ion (rechargeable)
Flight Duration 60-90 min.
Launch Hand launch
Landing Autoland deep stall
Navigation P(y)-code Global Positioning System/Selective Availability Anti-Spoofing
Module (GPS/SAASM) (WGS84) and electronic compass
Flight Control Manual or autonomous
Table 5. System Limitations.
LAUNCH ALTITUDE • Minimum Launch Altitude: No restrictions
• Maximum Launch Altitude: 10,000 ft. MSL
Launching above 10,000 ft. MSL can be accomplished but with reduced climb
rate and thus increased risk of impact with nearby obstacles.
LANDING ALTITUDE • Minimum Landing Altitude: No restrictions
• Maximum Landing Altitude: 10,000 ft. MSL
Landing above 10,000 ft. MSL can be accomplished but at higher than normal
descent rate and risks causing excessive damage to AV.
FLIGHT ALTITUDE • Minimum Flight Altitude: 50 ft AGL
• Maximum Flight Altitude: 10,500 ft. MSL
Operating above 10,500 ft. MSL can be accomplished, but with an overall im-
pact in flight performance, primarily reduced climb rate and flight endurance.
BLOWING SAND AND DUST The RQ-11B operates in blowing sand and dust with wind speeds up to 20
knots.
0003 00-7 Change 1

0003 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
Table 5. System Limitations. – Continued
WIND SPEED • Minimum: No restrictions
• Maximum: 20 knots
The RQ-11B can be operated in winds higher than 20 knots but with reduced
mission capability and higher risk of damage during launch, landing and
recovery.
RAIN Maximum: 0.25 inches per hour except for battery chargers which should not
be operated in rain.
TEMPERATURE • During extreme cold weather operations with older fuselages, insert
the AV battery prior to inserting tailboom into fuselage if servos do not
function on power up.
• During extreme cold weather operations the battery life of the AV will
be reduced.
• AV Soft Pack Rubber Seal should not be used when temperatures
below -20°C are expected.
• GCS/RVT Soft Pack Rubber Seal should not be used when temper-
atures below -20°C are expected.
SHOCK Maximum: High Altitude Low Opening (HALO) operations when stored in
tactical packaging.
Table 6. Operational Temperature Range.
SYSTEM COMPONENT MINIMUM TEMPERATURE (°C) MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE (°C)

AV -29 50
GCS/RVT 0 50
Battery Charger 0 50
Universal Battery Charger -20 50
Payload -29 50
Table 7. Storage Environments.
IMMERSION • Maximum depth: Two meters in tactical packaging.
• Maximum duration at depth: Two hours at two meters.
STORAGE AND TRANSPORT
ALTITUDE
• Minimum Storage and Transport Altitude: No restrictions when stored
• Maximum Storage and Transport Altitude: 30,000 ft. MSL when stored
STORAGE AND TRANSPORT • Minimum: -40 °C in transport packaging.
TEMPERATURE • Maximum: 70 °C in transport packaging.
LOW PRESSURE Minimum: 8.8 inHg - a pressure equivalent to altitude of 30,000 when stored in
tactical packaging.
Change 1 0003 00-8

TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0003 00
Table 8. Anticipated Loadout Configuration.
ITEM WEIGHT/LBS MEASUREMENT (INCHES)

AV (including EO payload, battery, and 7 12x9.5x21
FRK)
GCS/RVT (including battery) 9.3 10x7x15
Laptop Computer 4.9 9x22x14
Additional AV Battery (1 each) 1.1 2.5x6.25x1
Additional GCS/RVT Batteries (1 each) 1.2 4.5x4.4x2
Table 9. System Weights And Measurements For Shipping.
MEASUREMENT QUANTITY
ITEM WEIGHT/LBS (INCHES) IN BOX
Shipping Box 1 of 3 (includes items 65.5 22.5x31x19
below)
AV (packed - minus battery) (1 each) 4.8 12x9.5x21 3
GCS/RVT (packed - minus battery) 8.1 10x7x15 2
EO Payload 0.5 4.5x3.5x4.5 3
IR Payload 0.7 4.5x3.5x4.5 2
FRK 0.4 4.5x7x1 3
Items packed in Box 2 (includes items 118.5 22.5x31x19

below)
GCS/RVT Battery (1 each) 1.2 4x4x1.5 10
Spare Flying Surfaces Kit 7.1 19x13.75x5 2
Spare Small Parts Kit 2.7 7.5x9.25x4.5 1
Spare AV Batteries (5 each) 6.9 7.5x9.25x4.5 2
Universal Battery Charger 8.5 11x10x5 2
Items packed in Box 3 (includes item 13.5 6.5x13.5x16.5

below)
Laptop Computer 4.9 10.75x2x8.5 1
0003 00-9/10 blank Change 1

TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0004 00

NSN 1550-01-538-9256 EIC: 60C
THEORY OF OPERATION (LRIP AND FRP)
OVERVIEW
The RQ-11B SUAS is a backpack portable hand-launched system that provides aerial observation at line-of-sight
ranges of up to 10 kilometers. The advanced avionics enable autonomous flight and precise GPS navigation.
The system can be flown manually or autonomously through set waypoints with options of either a EO or IR camera,
allowing both day and night operations. The RQ-11B is equipped with sophisticated communication systems transfer-
ring imagery in real time to ground control and remote viewing stations.
SUAS QUALIFICATION AND CURRENCY REQUIREMENTS
For information on qualification and currency requirements see AR 95-23, Unmanned Aircraft System Flight Regula-
tions and TC 1-611, Small Unmanned Aircraft System Aircrew Training Manual.
OPERATION
Lightweight and portable components include a ruggedized Ground Control Station (GCS), modular AV with inter-
changeable payloads, batteries and support equipment. The GCS allows the user to control and program missions
into the system that can be executed by the AV at various levels of autonomy. The AV flies remotely away from the
GCS and provides real-time video imagery to the GCS display. The user can monitor and modify the AV’s flight path at
any time provided line-of-sight communications between the GCS and AV are maintained during the mission.
AV FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
The AV contains the avionics and all systems necessary for mission flight execution including the modular payload
nose. A block diagram of the major AV components is shown in Figure 1. The four major functional units of the AV are
described below:
1. AV Structure — The AV structure is made up of modular components constructed primarily of foam, Kevlar and
fiberglass. This includes the fuselage structure which houses the avionics and propulsion components, flying surfaces
and payload shell. The AV structure provides the aerodynamic shape for the AV and provides a rugged housing for the
AV subsystems.
2. Avionics and Control System — The avionics and control system is made up of navigation and system health sen-
sors, RF datalink components and electromechanical control devices. A central processing unit runs software that per-
forms autonomous functions, responds to command and control received from the GCS and transmits data back to the
GCS. A high level automatic flight control system is executed in the avionics software.
3. Payload — The payload contains observation sensor elements. Payloads provided with this system contain ei-
ther EO or long wave IR video cameras. The video signal is sent to the RF transmitter within the avionics.
4. Propulsion components — The primary propulsion components consist of an electric motor, speed control and
propeller. These elements generate propulsive force for the AV in response to commands received from the avionics.
0004 00-1
0004 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
OPERATION – CONTINUED
The AV is powered by an AV battery.
Figure 1. AV Block Diagram.
GCS/RVT FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
The GCS provides command and control of the AV, and displays video from the AV’s payload cameras. A GCS with the
transmitter turned off can be used as a Remote Video Transceiver (RVT). RVT functionality allows remote viewing of
video sensor data and metadata coming from the AV, screen capture, replay and range and bearing function. The GCS
is composed of four major functional units. The major functional units are the Hub Unit, Hand Controller, RF Unit, and
Antenna Mast. A block diagram of the GCS components is shown in Figure 2. The four functional units are described
below:
1. Hub Unit — The Hub Unit is the main functional element of the GCS that ties all the other elements together. It
includes interfaces for the Hand Controller, RF Unit, Batteries, video and data out to external interfaces. Main battery
power for the GCS is connected at the Hub Unit. Power is conditioned and directed to other elements of the GCS. The
Hub Unit has a central processing unit which runs software that controls other devices within the GCS. Communica-
tions, video and data signals are passed between other GCS components and external interfaces through the Hub
Unit.
2. Hand Controller — The Hand Controller is the primary human interface to the system. It provides the user a means
of input and output to the system. Buttons and switches are provided for the user to enter commands and manipulate
0004 00-2
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0004 00
data. An LCD display screen is provided for the user to see video imagery and data displayed as text. The Hand Con-
troller is powered by the Hub Unit. A central processing unit in the Hand Controller runs software that controls the dis-
play and communication of video and data on the screen and to the Hub Unit.
3. RF Unit — The RF Unit contains the uplink transmitter and downlink receiver. The RF Unit receives data from the
Hub Unit and transmits it to the AV. The RF Unit receives video and data signals from the AV and sends them to the Hub
Unit.
4. Antenna Mast — The antenna mast is a structural element used to position the RF Unit above the ground for better
RF line-of-sight to the AV.
Figure 2. GCS Block Diagram.

SYSTEM RF SIGNAL ELEMENTS
Figure 3 is a block diagram of the primary system components. The main Radio Frequency (RF) signal elements are
shown. The system has three independent RF signal elements, which are described below:
1. Uplink — The RF uplink transfers command and control information from the GCS to the AV. All aircraft commands
and information generated in the GCS, including mission data, are transmitted to the aircraft over this link.
2. Downlink — The RF downlink transfers payload video signal and data generated in the AV from the AV to the GCS.
Downlink data includes flight systems data and navigation sensor data.
3. GPS Signal — The GPS signal is transmitted from multiple GPS satellites to the GPS receiver onboard the AV. The
signals are used by the GPS receiver to generate AV position for the avionics system.
0004 00-3
0004 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
Each of the RF signals functions and operates independently of each other as long as power is applied to the GCS and
the AV. Failure or interference in one of the RF signals does not cause a failure in one of the other signals. All RF signal
elements are limited by line-of-sight and thus may be obscured by buildings, mountains, vehicles and trees.
1. AV
2. GPS Signal
3. GCS
Figure 3. RF Link Block Diagram.
0004 00-4
TM 1-1550-695-13&P
CHAPTER 2
OPERATOR INSTRUCTIONS
FOR
(RQ-11B)
(NSN: 1550-01-538-9256)
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0005 00
NSN 1550-01-538-9256 EIC: 60C
CONTROLS AND INDICATORS (LRIP AND FRP)
GCS/RVT OPERATOR INTERFACE
WARNING
The RQ-11B system should be operated by a team of two certified and current operators.
RQ-11A certification does not authorize operation of RQ-11B systems.
Controller Functions
The RQ-11B system should be operated by a team of two. AR 95-23 and exemption letter dated 7 September 2006 re-
strict the minimum RQ-11B crew to one trained operator that has completed either a Department of the Army (DA) ap-
proved RQ-11B school, or RQ-11B New Equipment Training (NET) and an assistant. The normal RQ-11B configura-
tion consists of a Vehicle Operator (VO) using a hand controller and the Mission Operator (MO) using a laptop computer
provided with the RSTA. The system allows for an additional dual hand controller configuration where both the VO and
the MO use hand controllers.
The functions available to the VO and the MO vary depending on the configuration selected via connections to the
Hub Unit. When only a single hand controller is connected, this controller performs the functions both the VO and the
MO. When either a laptop or a second controller are connected to the Laptop port to the Hub Unit these functions will
be shared between the VO and MO. The delineation of the functions by configuration are illustrated in Table 1. The
configuration may be changed at any time during flight by connecting or disconnecting a second controller or laptop
computer to the Hub Unit. The current controller configuration is displayed at the bottom of the Hand Controller when
in standard screen as VO, MO, or VO + MO.
Table 1. Controller Configurations and Functions.
Dual Controller Single Controller / Laptop

Single Vehicle
Function Controller Vehicle Operator Mission Operator Operator Laptop
Modes X X X
Reroute X X X X X
Mission X X X
LOL X X X
Radio X X X
Video X X X X X
Screen X X X X
Options X X X X
Beacons X X X
FalconView X
Screen X X X X
Capture
0005 00-1
0005 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
GCS/RVT OPERATOR INTERFACE – CONTINUED
Table 1. Controller Configurations and Functions. – Continued
Dual Controller Single Controller / Laptop

Single Vehicle
Function Controller Vehicle Operator Mission Operator Operator Laptop
FRP> . X X X X
Capture
Replay
LRIP> . X X X X X
Capture
Replay
Payload X X X
Controller and Laptop Configuration

This is the standard configuration where the VO uses a hand controller and the MO uses a laptop computer with Fal-
conView. In this configuration, the hand controller is connected to the Controller Port and is used by the VO to control
the AV. The laptop is connected to the Laptop Port using an Ethernet cable and the MO uses the laptop to control the
mission. The functions available to the VO and MO in this configuration are illustrated in Table 1.
Dual Controller Configuration
This configuration may be used when both a VO and MO are available and a laptop computer is not available. In this
configuration, the VO hand controller is connected to the Controller Port and the MO hand controller is connected to the
Laptop Port. The functions available to the VO and MO in this configuration are illustrated in Table 1.
Single Controller Configuration
This configuration allows the VO to control both the AV and the mission. In this configuration the VO hand controller is
connected to the Controller Port. The function available to the VO are illustrated in Table 1.
Hub Unit
The Hub Unit allows connection and interfaces between the hand controller(s) and or laptop computer and the Radio
Frequency (RF) Unit. The Hub unit also allows connections to the RSTA kit.
0005 00-2
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0005 00
GCS/RVT OPERATOR INTERFACE – CONTINUED
Figure 1. Hub Unit Ports.
Table 2. Hub Unit Ports.
No. Item Function

1 RF Port Connection to the HUB unit to the uplink and downlink antenna.
2 RCA Port Video Out.
3 FRP> AUX Port
. Data Out without overlay.
LRIP> RS232 Port
. Data Out (not shown).
4 Laptop Port Connection to a laptop computer or second hand controller (MO Controller).
5 Controller Port Connection to hand controller (VO Controller).
0005 00-3
0005 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
HAND CONTROLLER BUTTONS

The Hand Controller has five front and two back buttons or controls. These are shown in Figure 2 and described in
Table 3.
Figure 2. Hand Controller Buttons.
NOTE
When the GCS/RVT hand controller is transitioned from a high humidity/temperature environ-
ment to a lower temperature environment, condensation (moisture/fog) may occur inside hand
controller screen. This is normal and hand controller will continue to function normally; the
condition will correct itself in less than 1 hour.
NOTE
The Throttle Switch, Joystick, Payload Control Button, and Hot Key are dedicated to controlling
the AV and will not function on a Mission Operator’s Hand Controller.
Table 3. Hand Controller Button Functions.
No. Item Function

1 Throttle Switch Controls % throttle on AV altitude. See Table 4.
2 Menu Select Button Used to navigate menus or submenus or alter entries (such as waypoints)
within the menus. The field correctly selected with the menu select button is
indicated by either a box or brackets around the field.
3 Enter Button The Enter Button is pressed to accept and enter changes to selections within
the menu structure. Altered settings or data will not be changed until the
Enter Button is used. During flight, pressing the Enter Button twice in rapid
succession places AV in Loiter Mode. When reviewing screen captures,
pressing the Enter Button will activate the Range and Bearing Tool. See
WP 0025 00.
4 Joystick Controls direction of flight path and airspeed. Joystick is dedicated to controlling
AV flight path, and move S/T location. See Table 5.
5 Hot Key Places the AV in MAN mode at zero throttle. This is not recommended below
75 ft. AGL.
0005 00-4
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0005 00
HAND CONTROLLER BUTTONS – CONTINUED
Table 3. Hand Controller Button Functions. – Continued
No. Item Function

6 Screen Capture Button This button is controlled with the right hand on the back side of the Hand
Controller. It is used to capture still images and enter capture replay mode.
7 Payload Control Button Displays camera control mode menu.
3&5 Enter+Hot Key Pressing these simultaneously engages Autoland.
Throttle Switch
The throttle switch function varies depending on the flight mode. See Table 4.
Table 4. Throttle Switch Function.
MAN Mode All Other Modes
• Controls motor power directly. Power level is • Sets the command altitude.
displayed as a percentage ranging from 0% = • Altitude Hold feature automatically modulates
zero to 100% = full. power to maintain the command altitude.
• The first click from zero brings throttle to 25% • Each toggle changes command altitude approx.
Each toggle click changes motor power plus or 20 feet (5 toggles = 100 feet of change). Holding
minus 5%. toggle forward/back ramps the command
• Holding toggle forward/back quickly cycles altitude quickly up/down.
power to full/zero.
Joystick
The joystick controls the direction of the AV or payload depending on the mode that is being used. Joystick functions
are detailed in Table 5.
NOTE
Joystick steering commands are directions relative to the AV’s left and right, NOT the Vehicle
Operator’s left and right.
Table 5. Joystick Control Actions.
JOYSTICK POSITION
FLIGHT MODE
LEFT RIGHT FORWARD BACK
MAN, ALT, HOME Left Right Nose Down / Nose Up /
and NAV Modes Turn Turn Increase Airspeed Decrease Airspeed
LOIT Pan Pan Tilt Tilt
(and NAV @ Orbit Video Video Video Video
Point) Left Right Up Down
0005 00-5/6 blank

TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0006 00
NSN 1550-01-538-9256 EIC: 60C
DISPLAYS LRIP> .
INITIAL SETUP:
NA
SECURITY MEASURES FOR ELECTRONIC DATA

Zeroize the GPS key when risk of losing an AV with a security enabled GPS is high. Refer to Zeroizing the Crypto-Key.
HAND CONTROLLER DISPLAYS LRIP> .
The available displays are the same regardless of the Hand Controller status as a Vehicle Operator (VO) Controller or
Mission Operator (MO) Controller.
Standard Screen
The Standard Screen is the default screen and will appear when the GCS/RVT is powered up. This screen is the main
display for AV operation. The overlay data lists AV flight parameters. See Figure 1 and Table 1.
The Standard Screen is mainly a static display screen. However, it is possible to change the flight mode from this
screen. To do this, toggle the Menu Button up or down to display the flight mode shortcut menu. A small pop-up menu
with a list of flight modes will be displayed. Toggle Menu Button to highlight the desired flight mode and then press the
Enter Button to choose a new flight mode.
The Standard Screen is also accessed by toggling the Menu Select Button to the left.
Figure 1. Standard Screen Display.
0006 00-1
0006 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
HAND CONTROLLER DISPLAYS LRIP> . - CONTINUED
Table 1. Standard Screen Display.
No. Item Description

1 Mode indicator • Indicates current flight mode.
2 GPS Startup or time/date “GPS Startup” is visible until GPS satellites are acquired;
there is a 15 second count down while establishing fix;
adjusts altitude reading and changes to GPS time and
date when finished.
3 GPS fix • 4+ indicates good fix and no crypto load.
• 4+ key symbol indicates good fix and crypto load.
• 4+ key symbol with red indicates good fix and
crypto zeroize failure.
4 Link Status Bar Indicates the overall health of the uplinks and downlinks.
• A fully white bar means that both uplink and
downlink are good.
• Clock symbol indicates Loss-of-Link (LOL).
This can indicate loss of GPS data (if GPS items
are flashing), loss of downlink data (if GPS and
other data items are flashing), or loss of uplink (if
no items are flashing).
5 Altitude MSL AV altitude in feet above Mean Sea Level (MSL).
6 Range Distance in km from the Home waypoint. (Home is either
automatically set where AV initially acquires GPS or
manually set in Mission Controller Waypoint Edit screen).
7 Bearing Direction to AV position from Home waypoint. Reference
true North.
8 Camera View Indicator View of the camera.
• Upward FOV camera icon shown in Figure 1
indicates forward-look EO.
• Left FOV camera indicates side-look.
9 Joystick Engagement Joystick is engaged.
• Forward arrow appears when full forward stick
engaged.
• Clock symbol appears when slight turn is being
made.
• Right- or left-pointing arrow appears in direction
of turn when a hard turn is being made.
• Back arrow appears when full back stick engaged.
10 Transmit (TX) Status The transmitter status message (blinking “TX OFF”
with red background) displays only when the GCS/RVT
radio transmitter is off, the message disappears when
transmitter is on. The GCS will power up with transmitter
off.
11 Flight Altitude Winds Indicates wind direction and speed in flight (not displayed
on ground).
0006 00-2
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0006 00
Table 1. Standard Screen Display. – Continued

12 Target Bearing Direction to center field of view position from AV. Refer-
ence true North.
13 Target Range Distance in meters from AV to center field of view.
14 Autoland Indication • Autoland (flashing) indicates vehicle operator
initiated.
• Autoland (solid) indicates system initiated.
GPS BATT LOW Replace GPS Battery. Refer to WP 0052 00
15 Center Field of View Coordinate for the center field of view indicated on the
Coordinates screen by a crosshair.
16 Commanded Altitude In ALT, HOME, LOIT, NAV modes, displays “command”
Display area altitude. Display appears only when making a change.
Display disappears 2 seconds after last toggle click.
17 % Power display area In MAN mode, displays motor % power setting. Display
appears only when changing power setting. Display
disappears 2 seconds after last toggle click.
18 Center Field of View Crosshair indicating center field of view correlating to
coordinate in lower left of screen.
19 Flight mode menu shortcut Enables rapid selection of flight mode.
20 General Warning Display
Area
• En Route Rally - AV has lost uplink and is en route
to the Rally Waypoint and Autoland.
• Home Not Set - Home Waypoint has not been set.
• LOL Not Set - LOL mode has not been set.
• Hub Not Communicating - Hub not communicat-
ing with controller.
21 GCS Battery Low GCS low battery warning.
22 Flight Time Indicates length of time since the pitot tube detected wind
and time stops when AV lands and is displayed until AV
battery removed.
23 AV battery voltage AV battery voltage is always displayed. When the AV
voltage is low, a warning is displayed next to the AV
voltage display, "(LOW)".
24 Heading Where the nose of the AV is pointing. Displayed in
magnetic reference to North.
25 Ground Speed Speed AV is moving over the ground.
26 AV coordinates Current location of the AV.
Menu Screens
The RQ-11B system utilizes a menu and submenu system for viewing or entering data. The menus and submenus are
the same for one-and two-controller operation. The ability to edit data becomes segregated when a laptop computer or
second hand controller is connected.
0006 00-3
0006 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
Main Menu Screen

The Main Menu Screen is accessed by toggling the Menu Button to the right. This screen allows access to all sub-
menus in a simple tree structure. Each submenu screen contains individual items or data fields that may be viewed or
altered, or a further set of submenus. To exit the main menu or any submenu screen, toggle and hold the Main menu
Button left for two seconds and Standard Screen will appear.
Mode Submenu
There are five AV flight modes, which are chosen in the Mode Submenu (see Figure 2 and Table 2). There are two ways
to change the mode. In the Standard screen, toggle the Menu Button up or down to bring up the Mode Submenu; se-
lect the desired mode and press Enter. Alternatively, toggle the Menu Button right to bring up the Main menu. The Mode
submenu is automatically highlighted. Toggle menu right again to enter mode selection submenu. Select mode by tog-
gling up or down on Menu Button then pressing Enter to select new mode. The Loiter (LOIT) Mode can also be entered
by pressing the Enter Button twice in rapid succession.
Figure 2. Main Menu Screen (with Mode Submenu).

The AV is operated in one of five flight modes: MAN (manual), ALT (altitude hold), HOME (home), LOIT (loiter), and
NAV (navigation). Each of these flight modes navigates using a specific guidance feature. See Table 2.
0006 00-4
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0006 00
Table 2. Flight Modes.
Mode Description Navigation

MANUAL MODE Provides full control of the flight path of the Vehicle Operator
AV. (steering and speed control)
CAUTION
Exercise caution when setting a command altitude; holding the Throttle Switch up/down
causes a rapid increase/decrease in commanded altitude; i.e., holding switch down for 5
seconds equals -1,500 ft. commanded altitude in ALT, HOME, LOIT and NAV modes. Failure
to comply may result in loss of AV.
ALTITUDE MODE • Maintains an operator-commanded Vehicle Operator + Altitude hold
altitude while allowing full lateral
control of the flight path.
• Altitude can be preset above the
terrain and objective allowing
the Vehicle Operator to maneuver
around the objective without concern
for altitude.
• Commanded altitude is increased
and decreased in 20 foot increments
using throttle switch.
HOME MODE • Signals the AV to return to the Home Autonomous Mode + Altitude hold + GPS
guidance
Waypoint and Orbit.
• Altitude is controlled using the
Throttle Switch just as in ALT mode.
LOITER MODE • Signals the AV to circle around a Autonomous Mode + Altitude hold + GPS
guidance
Vehicle Operator-selected location.
The location is selected by entering
Loiter mode when the AV is level and
the object of interest is roughly in
the center field of view display. The
AV circles in a counter-clockwise
direction around the objective. The
joystick can be used to correct the
flight path as required (wind and
other factors can cause the AV to
stray).
NAVIGATE MODE • Directs the AV flight path over to a Autonomous Mode + Altitude hold + GPS
guidance
set of pre-programmed waypoints.
0006 00-5
0006 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
Table 3. Guidance Feature Descriptions.
Feature Description
Autonomous • Continuously governs AV attitude and behavior.
• Stabilizes the flight path.
Altitude Hold • Altitude Hold feature controls motor power to control AV altitude.
• Uses pitch control to maintain airspeed.
• Motor power controls climb and descent rate.
GPS Guidance • Uses operator-set waypoints to control flight path.
• Vehicle Operator can override waypoint in flight by using the Joystick.
Reroute Submenu
In NAV mode, the AV follows GPS guidance and flies toward the active waypoint. The Reroute Submenu is used to
change the active waypoint. In the two-controller configuration, either operator may command a reroute. To reroute
the AV highlight desired waypoints using up and down menu button and press enter to select. The waypoints are set
in the Mission Submenu either manually or using Diamond Default. The AV will automatically navigate the waypoints
in alphabetical order (A-D and back to A again) unless the Mission Operator or AV Operator intervenes. Selecting H
directs the AV to the H (Home) waypoint where it orbits the Home waypoint until instructed to do otherwise. Selecting
GOTO WP E will direct AV to Waypoint E, then lands at Waypoint L. GOTO LAND directs the AV to land at waypoint L.
Figure 3. Reroute Submenu.
0006 00-6
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0006 00
Mission Submenu
This is where all GPS waypoint position data is manipulated. This is a function of only the Mission Operator Hand Con-
troller. Each of the selections in this submenu will pull down a further submenu.
Figure 4. Mission Submenu.

Mission Load Submenu
Figure 5. Mission Load Submenu.
0006 00-7
0006 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
Table 4. Mission Load Submenu.
Feature Description
From Aircraft Download mission data from AV, used in handoff procedures.
500m, 1km, 2km, 4km (Diamond Default) The 500m, 1km, 2km and 4km refer to “Diamond Default” missions.
Selections A fixed pattern of waypoints can be entered automatically using
the Diamond Default feature of the RQ-11B system. The system
will calculate waypoints in a diamond-shaped pattern (see "Figure
6" section) radiating from the Home waypoint in increments of
500 m, 1 km, 2 km, or 4 km. The AV will fly in a counter-clockwise
direction. The side-look camera field of view will be inside the
perimeter of the diamond.
Mission #1, #2, #3 Selections Selects presaved missions.
Clear Selection Clears out all load data previously entered.
The Mission Load Submenu allows a preset mission to be quickly selected for flight. Use the Menu Button right and
then up/down to select the desired mission.
Figure 6. Diamond Default.

Using Diamond Default coordinates can also save time entering user-preferred waypoints when they will be in the
general area of the Diamond Default coordinates. It is likely that fewer of the digits in the coordinate will require edit-
ing using this method. Diamond Default waypoints cannot be loaded until the AV has acquired GPS lock and origin
location. When using Diamond Default, the Rally Landing waypoint will automatically set itself to 20 meters east of the
Home waypoint unless manually changed.
0006 00-8
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0006 00
To set Diamond Default waypoints:

1. Toggle menu switch to place cursor on Mission Load line.
2. Toggle menu switch to change radius of diamond or to clear waypoints.
3. Press Enter to select and enter desired value. Diamond Default coordinates will automatically appear in lines
A through D.
Mission Save Submenu
It is possible to save up to three missions with the RQ-11B system. The Mission Save Submenu is used after a series of
waypoints have been entered. Scroll up and highlight “SAVE”, then scroll right and highlight the mission number those
waypoints will be assigned to. Press the Enter Button to save the mission.
Figure 7. Mission Save Submenu.

Mission Waypoint Edit Submenus
NOTE
Invalid coordinates will not be accepted by this system.
The Mission Waypoint Edit Submenus for Waypoints H, A-E and L allow the Mission Operator to manually enter coor-
dinates as required. The Home and Rally Waypoints are automatically set at the coordinate where the satellites were
acquired, but can be overridden.
Complete the following steps to set a waypoint:
1. Toggle Menu Switch to place cursor on Waypoint line of display.
2. Toggle Menu Switch left or right to highlight data point to be changed.
3. Toggle Menu Switch up or down for each digit to change numerical value.
0006 00-9
0006 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
Figure 8. Mission Edit Submenu.

4. Once all changes have been made to desired waypoint, push Enter Button to save waypoint. The value will
flash until the Enter Button is pressed.
The range and bearing for each waypoint are displayed to the right of the waypoint coordinates. This data is only dis-
played when a valid Home Waypoint is set.
Alt Offset Submenu
This menu provides a setting for automatic adjustment of waypoint altitudes. When a waypoint coordinate is generated
or changed, the altitude is automatically adjusted according to the setting in the altitude offset submenu. Waypoint al-
titudes are adjusted to the “safe” altitude setting value above the origin waypoint. Waypoint altitude settings may be
manually set using the mission waypoint submenu.
Complete the following steps to set the “safe” altitude offset.
1. Toggle Menu Switch to place cursor on altitude value line of menu display.
2. Toggle Menu Switch up or down to change the “safe” altitude setting.
3. Push the Enter button to save the altitude setting.
0006 00-10
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0006 00
Figure 9. Alt Offset Submenu.

Clearing Waypoints (if available)
To clear waypoints (this will not clear Home, or “+” Waypoints):
1. Toggle Menu Switch to place cursor on Mission Load line.
2. Toggle Menu Switch to select “clear.”
3. Press Enter Switch to clear waypoints. Waypoints will revert to dashed lines indicating no entry for that field.
LOL Submenu
CAUTION
The rally altitude should be set higher than any known obstacle in the area. When operating in
flat terrain, 300 AGL feet is a safe rally altitude. Failure to comply may result in loss of AV.
The LOL Submenu (Figure 10) allows the Mission Operator to set the desired AV action upon LOL. The AV enters LOL
mode when the uplink is broken for more than three seconds. There are three options for LOL action: Finish Flight, Go
to Rally, and Land Immediately. Use the Menu Button to toggle through the three options for LOL and press Enter But-
ton to select the desired option.
0006 00-11
0006 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
Figure 10. Loss of Link (LOL) Submenu.

Finish Flight
CAUTION
Setting the Cycle Time beyond the battery life could result in loss or damage to the AV. The GCS
default Cycle Time is 360 minutes.
Cycle Time is synonymous with Loop Time in the FalconView RPUAV tool bar. In NAV mode, the AV will continue fly-
ing the NAV waypoint cycle (A, B, C, D, A...) until cycle time expires. When loop time expires, the AV will complete the
current NAV waypoint cycle, then fly landing approach (D to E to L, land at L).
Go to Rally
The AV will go directly to E and approach to land at L.
Land Immediately
The AV will Autoland immediately upon LOL.
Setting the L Waypoint for LOL
The L Waypoint is a coordinate to which the AV will fly upon LOL.
Radio Submenu
The Radio Submenu allows the Vehicle Operator to turn the radio transmitter on and off and select the appropriate
channel. Toggle the Menu Button over the selection to highlight and then press the Enter Button to select.
Figure 11. Radio Submenu.
0006 00-12
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0006 00
Video Submenu
The Video Submenu allows the operator to adjust the settings for the Hand Controller. Toggle the Menu Button right
and then up/down to highlight the setting to be changed. Press the Enter Button to make the selection.
Figure 12. Video Submenu.

Hub Submenu
The Video Submenu allows the operator to delete all images from Hub. Press the Enter Button to make the selection.
Figure 13. Hub Submenu.
0006 00-13
0006 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
Screen Submenu
The Screen Submenu brings up a series of additional submenus. Toggle the Menu Button and highlight the desired
screen. Press the Enter Button to select.
Figure 14. Screen Submenu.

Standard Screen
Selecting this will bring the operator back to the Standard Screen. The Standard Screen may also be selected, i.e. “re-
stored”, by holding menu button left for 2 seconds.
GPS Screen
Figure 15. GPS Screen.
0006 00-14
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0006 00
Table 5. GPS Information.
Item Meaning
Crypto-Key Status Keyed state of the GPS. One of the following messages will appear:
• Crypto-key state unknown
• Not Keyed
• Keyed - but not for today
• Keyed - correct for today
• Keyed - incorrect for today
• Keyed - waiting for Secure Voice (SV) data
• Zeroize Successful
• Zeroize Failed
• Key Loaded
GPS Data • Time: HH:MM:SS (Zulu Time)
• Date: MM-DD-YYYY
• Latitude and longitude in decimal degrees
• Altitude in meters
• Climb rate in meters per second
• Speed in meters per second
• Heading in degrees
• Area under Carrier to Noise Ratio (Cno): relative signal strength for each of
twelve tracked satellites
Age • Indicates how old GPS data is.
• This can be used to determine the status of the communication between the
GPS receiver and the avionics.
• Good status is indicated by an Age of 0 seconds.
ZEROIZING THE CRYPTO-KEY
NOTE
The GPS can be zeroized by removing both the flight battery and the GPS backup battery (a
small cylindrical lithium battery mounted to the avionics board).
NOTE
Zeroize GPS Key will cause secure GPS units to stop functioning in the secure mode until they
are reprogrammed with a good key.
1. Toggle the Menu Select Switch up or down from GPS Info Screen to make zeroize key function visible and
available.
2. Press ENTER to zeroize.
0006 00-15
0006 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
Basic Air Data Screen
The Air Data Screen allows operator to view basic air data information. This screen is where the GCS battery status
and AV ID number is located.
Figure 16. Basic Air Data Screen.
Diagnostics Screens
The Diagnostics Screens show diagnostic and status information. There are three Diagnostics Screens. To cycle
through them, press Menu-Up.
Diagnostics Screen 1, Figure 17 displays software version numbers for the Hand Controller and AV, as well as Joystick
output.
Figure 17. Diagnostics Screen 1.
Diagnostics Screen 2, Figure 18 shows hub memory used and space available. It also shows the corners of the square
of DTED loaded.
At this screen, it is possible to delete all Capture Images from hub memory. To do so, press Menu-Down, then press
Enter.
0006 00-16
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0006 00
output.

Diagnostics Screen 3, Figure 19 identifies the GCS Hub software version, the Hub processor, and the network IP ad-
dresses being used. It indicates NETWORK is CONNECTED or NOT CONNECTED to Laptop, and the allocation of
controller ports to operators.
Port A is in the primary Hand Controller connector.
Port B and Port C are in the Laptop connector:
Port B is used for second Hand Controller.
Port C is used for Network to Laptop.
0006 00-17
0006 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
Magnetic Calibration Screen

Provides for performing AV magnetometer calibration. See WP 0055 00.
Figure 20. MAG CAL Screen.

Options Submenu
The Options Submenu allows the operator to choose how GPS coordinates are displayed. Toggle Menu Button to high-
light the desired format and press the Enter Button to select.
Figure 21. Options Screen.
0006 00-18
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0006 00
Beacon Submenu
The Beacon Submenu allows the operator to select the type of beacon to be used. Toggle Menu Button to highlight the
desired beacon and press the Enter Button to select.
Figure 22. Beacon Submenu.

Payload Control Menu
Access the Payload Control menu by pressing the Payload Control Button on the back of the Hand Controller. While the
Payload Control button is depressed, the overlay displays the options for payload operation, such as forward-look or
side-look camera function. The connected camera is highlighted. It is not necessary to press the Enter Button to make
a selection. Menu-Down turns off the connected camera. Holding Menu-Down turns off all payloads. When all pay-
loads are off, “(ALL OFF)” is highlighted.
Figure 23. Payload Control Menu for IR Camera Payload.

IR Camera Payload .
1. To switch WHITE HOT – BLACK HOT selection, press Menu-Right.
2. To turn on IR camera, press Menu-Left. To turn off IR camera, press Menu-Down.
3. To enable illuminator, or to turn it off, press Menu-Up.
0006 00-19
0006 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
EO Camera Payload with Digital Tilt Pan Zoom
Figure 24. Payload Control Menu for EO Camera Payload.

While pressing Payload Control Button:
To connect side-look camera, press Menu-Left. To connect front-look camera, press Menu-Up. To turn off connected
camera, press Menu-Down. When side-look camera is connected, to cycle between zoom values of 1.0, 1.42 and 2.85,
press Menu-Left again.
Screen Capture Button
To capture a video still, press the Screen Capture Button on the back of the Hand Controller. If the button is then quickly
released, live display continues, otherwise the Replay Display mode begins and the newly-captured image is dis-
played. The Hub stores approximately 80 NITF files (including screen capture and S and T computations). Older files
will automatically be deleted when space is needed for new files.
Replay Display Mode
In Replay Display mode, a captured image is displayed. “R”, highlighted, is displayed at bottom-right.
To display captured images without capturing a new image, hold Menu-Left while pressing and releasing Screen Cap-
ture Button.
While in Replay Display mode:
• Press Menu-Left 2 seconds to display next-earlier image.

• Hold Menu-Left to display earliest image.
• Press Menu-Right to display next-later image.
• Hold Menu-Right to display latest image.
• Hold Left-Return standard screen.
Press Enter to add or modify range and bearing markers (refer to Range and Bearing Tool WP 0025 00 description):
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0006 00-20
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0007 00
NSN 1550-01-538-9256 EIC: 60C
DISPLAYS FRP> .
INITIAL SETUP:
NA
SECURITY MEASURES FOR ELECTRONIC DATA

Zeroizing the GPS key is possible when risk of losing an AV with a security enabled GPS is high. Refer to Zeroizing the
Crypto-Key (WP 0021 00, Figure 15). Refer to Zeroizing the Crypto-Key.
CONTROLLER DISPLAYS
The available displays are the same regardless of the Hand Controller status as a Vehicle Operator (VO) Controller or
Mission Operator (MO) Controller.
Standard Screen
The Standard Screen is the default screen and will appear when the GCS/RVT is powered up. This screen is the main
display for AV operation. The overlay data lists AV flight parameters. See Figure 1 and Table 1.
The Standard Screen is mainly a static display screen. However, it is possible to change the flight mode from this
screen. To do this, toggle the Menu Button up or down to display the flight mode shortcut menu. A small pop-up menu
with a list of flight modes will be displayed. Toggle Menu Button to highlight the desired flight mode and then press the
Enter Button to choose a new flight mode.
The Standard Screen is also accessed by toggling the Menu Button to the left.
Figure 1. Standard Screen Display.
0007 00-1 Change 1 – 11 June 2008

0007 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
CONTROLLER DISPLAYS - CONTINUED
Table 1. Standard Screen Display.

1 Mode indicator • Indicates current flight mode.
2 GPS Startup or time/date “GPS Startup” is visible until GPS satellites are acquired;
there is a 15 second count down while establishing fix;
adjusts altitude reading and changes to GPS time and
date when finished.
3 GPS fix • 4+ indicates good fix and no crypto load.
• 4+ key symbol indicates good fix and crypto load.
• 4+ key symbol with red indicates good fix and
crypto zeroize failure.
4 Link Status Bar Indicates the overall health of the uplinks downlinks and
lock status.
• A fully white bar means that both uplink and
downlink are good.
• Clock symbol indicates Loss-of-Link (LOL).
This can indicate loss of GPS data (if GPS items
are flashing), loss of downlink data (if GPS and
other data items are flashing), or loss of uplink (if
no items are flashing).
• When system is unlocked or lock status is
mismatched, warning symbol appears here.
(- indicates operations of old AV without lock
option.£ indicates system unlocked, alternating
red/X in box indicates lock mismatch).
5 Altitude MSL AV altitude in feet above Mean Sea Level (MSL).
6 Range Distance in km from the Home waypoint.
7 Bearing Direction to AV position from Home waypoint. Reference
true North.
8 Camera View Indicator View of the camera.
• Upward FOV camera icon shown in Figure 1
indicates forward-look EO.
• Left FOV camera indicates side-look EO.
9 Joystick Engagement Joystick is engaged.
• Forward arrow appears when full forward stick
engaged.
• Clock symbol appears when slight turn is being
made.
• Right- or left-pointing arrow appears in direction
of turn when a hard turn is being made.
• Back arrow appears when full back stick engaged.
Change 1 0007 00-2

TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0007 00
Table 1. Standard Screen Display. – Continued

10 Transmit (TX) Status The transmitter status message (blinking “TX OFF”
with red background) displays only when the GCS/RVT
radio transmitter is off, the message disappears when
transmitter is on. The GCS will power up with transmitter
off.
11 Flight Altitude Winds Indicates wind direction and speed in flight (not displayed
on ground).
12 Target Bearing Direction to center field of view position from AV. Refer-
ence true North.
13 Target Range Distance in meters from AV to center field of view.
14 Autoland Indication • Autoland (flashing) indicates vehicle operator
initiated.
• Autoland (solid) indicates system initiated.
GPS BATT LOW Replace GPS Battery. Refer to WP 0052 00.
15 Center Field of View Coordinate for the center field of view indicated on the
Coordinates screen by a crosshair.
16 Commanded Altitude In ALT, HOME, LOIT, modes, displays “command” altitude.
Display area Display appears only when making a change. Display
17 % Power display area In MAN mode, displays motor % power setting. Display
appears only when changing power setting. Display
18 Center Field of View Crosshair indicating center field of view correlating to
coordinate in lower left of screen.
19 Flight mode selector Displays selection of flight mode.
20 General Warning Display Displays the warning messages. See WP 0009 00 for
Area or Compass Rose descriptions. Displays Compass Rose.
Display
21 Flight Time Indicates time elapsed since AV launch. Stops running
upon landing.
22 GCS Battery Low GCS low battery warning. (Only appears when bat-
tery reaches the GCS Battery Warning Voltage, see
WP 0009 00).
23 AV battery voltage AV battery voltage is always displayed. When the AV
voltage is low, a warning is displayed next to the AV
voltage display, "(LOW)".
24 Heading Where the nose of the AV is pointing. Displayed in
magnetic reference to North.
25 Ground Speed Speed AV is moving over the ground.
26 AV coordinates Current location of the AV.
0007 00-3 Change 1

0007 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
Compass Rose Screen

A selectable compass rose underlay is added for sensor situational awareness. Allows the operator to quickly refer-
ence the sensor orientation to the nose of the aircraft.
Camera view indicator stays at top of rose. As camera direction changes the rose rotates. N, E, S, and W are
affixed to the rose as it rotates to indicate direction. Direction is reference True N. N on the rose is highlighted red
for clarity.
Aircraft Heading Icon (see Figure 2, Item 3) displays the True North heading of the aircraft.
NOTE: Aircraft true heading differs from magnetic heading display in the upper left.
Display activation:
1. Power Up – No compass rose.
2. Enable compass rose - Hold ← approximately 7 seconds.
3. Disable compass rose temporarily - Hold ← less than 1 second.
4. Display compass rose momentarily - Hold ← less than 1 second.
5. Display compass rose continuously - Hold ← greater than 1 second.
6. Disable Center Field of View crosshair with compass displayed - Hold ← approximately 6 seconds.
7. Enable Center Field of View crosshair with compass rose displayed - Hold ← approximately 6 seconds.
8. Disable compass rose - Hold ← approximately 8 seconds.
9. Re-enable compass rose - Hold ← approximately 4 seconds.
Figure 2. Compass Rose Screen Display.
Change 1 0007 00-4

TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0007 00
Table 2. Compass Rose Screen Display.
Item Number Item Description

1 Compass Rose Cardinal headings displayed in True North.
2 Camera View Indicator Icon is fixed; shows sensor orientation to the Compass Rose.
3 Aircraft Heading Icon Where the nose of the AV is pointing. Displayed in reference True
North.
4 Center Field of View Crosshair indicating center field of view correlating to coordinate in
lower left of screen.
Menu Screens
The RQ-11B system utilizes a menu and submenu system for viewing or entering data. The menus and submenus are
the same for one-and two-controller operation. The ability to edit data becomes segregated when a laptop computer or
second hand controller is connected.
Main Menu Screen
The Main Menu Screen is accessed by toggling the Menu Button to the right. This screen allows access to all sub-
menus in a simple tree structure. Each submenu screen contains individual items or data fields that may be viewed or
altered, or a further set of submenus. To exit the main menu or any submenu screen, toggle and hold the Main menu
Button left for two seconds and Standard Screen will appear.
Mode Selection
There are five AV flight modes, which can be chosen by the Mode Selector (see Figure 3 and Table 3). In the standard
screen, toggle the Menu Select Button up or down to scroll through the selection list. The highlighted text is the mode
currently used by the AV. The desired mode is shown as blinking text (unless it is the current mode) surrounded by
brackets. Scroll to the desired mode and press Enter.
Figure 3. Flight Mode Selector.
The AV is operated in one of five flight modes: MAN (manual), ALT (altitude hold), HOME (home), LOIT (loiter), and
NAV (navigation). Each of these flight modes navigates using a specific guidance feature. See Table 3.
Table 3. Flight Modes.

MANUAL MODE • Provides full control of the flight Vehicle Operator
path of the AV. (steering, speed and
altitude control)
0007 00-5 Change 1

0007 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
Table 3. Flight Modes. – Continued
CAUTION
Exercise caution when setting a command altitude; holding the Throttle Switch up/down
causes a rapid increase/decrease in commanded altitude; i.e., holding switch down for 5
seconds equals -1,500 ft. commanded altitude in ALT, HOME, LOIT and NAV modes. Failure
to comply may result in loss of AV.
ALTITUDE MODE • Maintains an operator-commanded Vehicle Operator + Altitude hold
altitude while allowing full lateral
control of the flight path.
• Altitude can be preset above the
terrain and objective allowing
the Vehicle Operator to maneuver
around the objective without concern
for altitude.
• Commanded altitude is increased
and decreased in 20 foot increments
using throttle switch.
HOME MODE • Signals the AV to return to the Home Autonomous Mode + Altitude hold + GPS
guidance
Waypoint and Orbit.
• Altitude is controlled using the
Throttle Switch just as in ALT mode.
LOITER MODE • Signals the AV to circle around a Autonomous Mode + Altitude hold + GPS
guidance
Vehicle Operator-selected location.
The location is selected by entering
Loiter mode when the AV is level and
the object of interest is roughly in the
CFOV display. The AV circles in a
counter-clockwise direction around
the objective. The joystick is used to
pan and tilt the camera view (when
not fully zoomed out).
NAVIGATE MODE
(not on an ORBIT)
• Directs the AV flight path over to a Autonomous Mode + Altitude hold + GPS
guidance
set of pre-programmed waypoints.
Table 4. Guidance Feature Descriptions.
Feature Description
Autonomous • Continuously governs AV attitude and behavior.
• Stabilizes the flight path.
Altitude Hold • Altitude Hold feature controls motor power to control AV altitude.
• Uses pitch control to maintain airspeed.
• Motor power controls climb and descent rate.
Change 1 0007 00-6

TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0007 00
Table 4. Guidance Feature Descriptions. – Continued
Feature Description
GPS Guidance • Uses operator-set waypoints to control flight path.
• Vehicle Operator can override waypoint in flight by using the Joystick.
Reroute Submenu
In NAV mode, the AV follows GPS guidance and flies toward the active waypoint. The Reroute Submenu is used to
change the active waypoint. In the two-controller configuration, either operator may command a reroute. To reroute
the AV highlight desired waypoints using up and down menu button and press enter to select. The waypoints are set
in the Mission Submenu either manually or using Diamond Default. The AV will automatically navigate the waypoints
in alphabetical order (A-D and back to A again) unless the Mission Operator or AV Operator intervenes. Selecting H
directs the AV to the H (Home) waypoint where it orbits the Home waypoint until instructed to do otherwise. Selecting
GOTO WP E will direct AV to Waypoint E, then lands at Waypoint L. GOTO LAND directs the AV to land at waypoint L.
Figure 4. Reroute Submenu.
0007 00-7 Change 1

0007 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
Mission Submenu
This is where all GPS waypoint position data is manipulated. This is a function of only the Mission Operator Hand Con-
troller. Each of the selections in this submenu will pull down a further submenu. If no DTED is available, “GND EL” is
replaced with a flashing “NO DTED AVAIL” message.
Figure 5. Mission Submenu without DTED.
Change 1 0007 00-8

TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0007 00
Mission Load Submenu
Figure 6. Mission Load Submenu.
Table 5. Mission Load Submenu.
Feature Description
From Aircraft Downloads mission data from AV. (Ensure GCS radio transmitter
is off and downlink is good, then extract existing mission from AV.)
New at Origin (+) Creates Diamond Default mission at Origin (500m, 1km, 2km,
4km). See Figure 6. (Must have GPS fix).
New at Home Creates Diamond Default mission at Home (500m, 1km, 2km,
4km). See Figure 6. (Home must be set).
Mission #1, #2, #3 Selections Selects pre-saved missions.
Last Used Restores last used mission.
0007 00-9 Change 1

0007 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P

The Mission Load Submenu allows a preset mission to be quickly selected for flight. Use the Menu Button right and
then up/down to select the desired mission.
Figure 7. Diamond Default.

When using Diamond Default, the Rally Landing waypoint will automatically set itself to 20 meters east of the Home
waypoint unless manually changed.
Mission Save Submenu
It is possible to save up to three missions with the RQ-11B system. The Mission Save Submenu is used after a series of
waypoints have been entered. Scroll up and highlight “SAVE”, then scroll right and highlight the mission number those
waypoints will be assigned to. Press the Enter Button to save the mission.
Figure 8. Mission Save Submenu.
Change 1 0007 00-10

TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0007 00
Mission Waypoint Edit Submenus
NOTE
Invalid coordinates will not be accepted by this system.
The Mission Waypoint Edit Submenus for Waypoints H, A-E and L allow the Mission Operator to manually enter coor-
dinates as required. The Home and Rally Waypoints are automatically set at the coordinate where the satellites were
acquired, but can be overridden.
Complete the following steps to set a waypoint:
1. Toggle Menu Switch to place cursor on Waypoint line of display.
2. Toggle Menu Switch left or right to highlight data point to be changed.
3. Toggle Menu Switch up or down for each digit to change numerical value.
Figure 9. Mission Edit Submenu.
4. Once all changes have been made to desired waypoint, push Enter Button to save waypoint. The value will
flash until the Enter Button is pressed.
The range and bearing for each waypoint are displayed to the right of the waypoint coordinates. The range and bearing
data can also be used to set waypoint coordinates. This data is only displayed when a valid Home Waypoint is set.
Alt Offset Submenu
This menu provides a setting for automatic adjustment of waypoint altitudes. When a waypoint coordinate is generated
or changed, the altitude is automatically adjusted according to the setting in the altitude offset submenu. Waypoint al-
titudes are adjusted to the “safe” altitude setting value above the origin waypoint. Waypoint altitude settings may be
manually set using the mission waypoint submenu.
Complete the following steps to set the “safe” altitude offset.
1. Toggle Menu Switch to place cursor on altitude value line of menu display.
2. Toggle Menu Switch up or down to change the “safe” altitude setting.
0007 00-11 Change 1

0007 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
3. Push the Enter button to save the altitude setting.
Figure 10. Alt Offset Submenu.

LOL Submenu
CAUTION
The rally altitude should be set higher than any known obstacle in the area. When operating in
flat terrain, 300 AGL feet is a safe rally altitude. Failure to comply may result in loss of AV.
The LOL Submenu (Figure 11) allows the Mission Operator to set the desired AV action upon LOL. The AV enters LOL
mode when the uplink is broken for more than three seconds. There are three options for LOL action: Finish Flight, Go
to Rally, and Land Immediately. Use the Menu Button to toggle through the three options for LOL and press Enter But-
ton to select the desired option.
Change 1 0007 00-12

TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0007 00
Figure 11. Loss of Link (LOL) Submenu.

Go to Rally (System default)
CAUTION
“E” and “L” must be loaded. Without these coordinates, the AV will auto land upon LOL. “E” must
be set a minimum of 500 meters from “L” and in the proper direction for landing.
Upon LOL, the AV will go directly to E and approach to land at L.
Land Immediately
The AV will Autoland immediately upon LOL.
Finish Flight
CAUTION
Setting the Loop Time beyond the battery life could result in loss or damage to the AV. The GCS
default Cycle Time is 360 minutes.
Loop Time Out is synonymous with Flight Loop Time in the FalconView RPUAV tool bar and cycle Loop Time in previ-
ous GCS software versions. In NAV mode, the AV will continue flying to the orbit waypoint or the NAV waypoint loop (A,
B, C, D, A...) until loop time expires. When loop time expires, the AV will complete the current NAV waypoint cycle (end-
ing at “D”) or (fly to the Orbit Point), then fly landing approach (To E to L, land at L).
0007 00-13 Change 1

0007 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
Radio Submenu
CAUTION
Reduced power levels can affect link quality.

The Radio Submenu allows the Vehicle Operator to turn the radio transmitter on and off and select the appropriate
channel. Toggle the Menu Button over the selection to highlight and then press the Enter Button to select. Power field
sets the transmitter power; toggle menu select button to change value; press Enter to apply.
Figure 12. Radio Submenu.

Secure Uplink Using Lock Feature
By default, the GCS will transmit to any AV on the same channel. This is dangerous if operating near another AV on
the same channel, due to the possibility of inadvertently controlling the other AV. To prevent this interference, an uplink
“lock” feature allows a GCS and AV to set up a “locked” communication link so that other GCSs cannot inadvertently
control the AV. While locked, the GCS cannot control any AV other than the one established in the lock. As with the other
radio control settings, the lock can only be performed by the VO. If the lock feature is not used, all uplink and downlink
are identical to legacy RPUAV systems.
CAUTION
The lock feature does not prevent mutual interference when operating on the same channel.
LOL can still occur.
The uplink lock works by having the VO select and lock to an AV by its unique identifier (avionics serial number) and
sending all uplink targeted only to this AV. When selected, the AV is placed into a locked state so that it will only listen to
Change 1 0007 00-14

TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0007 00
uplink from the locked GCS and no other GCS can lock to the “locked” AV. Unlocked AVs will still respond to commands
from other unlocked GCSs.
Figure 13. Radio Uplink Lock Section.
Table 6. Uplink Lock Fields.
Callout # Field Description

1 AV Flying Indicator If the AV downlink reports that it is flying, an airplane symbol
will appear.
2 AV Downlink Timeout Indicator If downlink is older than 15 seconds, a rotating clock symbol
will appear.
3 AV Avionics Serial Number A five-digit number that is unique to a given AV type.
4 AV Type A two-character code indicating the type of AV. Valid
codes are: RV=Raven, SW=Swift, PM=Puma, WA=Wasp,
PT=Pointer.
5 GCS Lock Status/Selector If a dash appears, the GCS cannot lock because
the AV is not lock-capable.
If an unchecked checkbox appears, the GCS can
lock to the AV but currently is not.
If an checked checkbox appears, the GCS is
currently locked to the AV. Moving the cursor to
this field and pressing Enter will toggle between
locking and unlocking the GCS only.
6 AV Lock Status/Selector If a dash appears, the AV does not have lock
capabilities.
If an unchecked checkbox appears, the AV does
have lock capabilities and is unlocked.
If an checked checkbox appears, the AV does
have lock capabilities and is currently is locked.
Moving the cursor to this field and pressing Enter
will toggle between locking and unlocking both the
AV and the GCS together. This can only be done if
there is link with the AV.
0007 00-15 Change 1

0007 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
There is no limit to how many GCSs can lock to a given AV, so that handoffs can be conducted using multiple GCSs.
Common practice should be to establish lock with an AV before launch, and then to keep both the AV and GCS locked
throughout the flight. If a GCS needs to control another AV, the GCS can unlock from the first AV (leaving the AV itself
in locked state), and lock itself to another AV.
CAUTION
Even though multiple GCSs can lock to a given AV, only one GCS should transmit (establish
link) at any time.
AV Listing
The lower-right corner of the Radio Submenu is the uplink lock control area. It consists of four lines of tracked AVs. Af-
ter a GCS tunes to a given channel, it will start to “listen” for AVs, keeping track of their serial numbers and flight status.
Next to each AV entry is a set of check boxes, one for the AV lock status and one for the GCS lock status. If an AV is not
capable of using the lock feature, a dash will appear in the AV and GCS lock fields for that AV. Each AV will be listed by
its type and avionics serial number. For example, a Raven with serial number 12345 will be listed as “RV12345.” The
list of AVs shows the latest four AVs encountered. An AV is kept on the list as long as either the GCS is locked to it or
there has been downlink from the AV in the last 15 minutes. Next to each AV, indicators show downlink and flight sta-
tus. If an AV line is highlighted (solid red background), this indicates that the GCS uplink can control the AV. A cursor
can be moved over the lock checkboxes of an AV using the menu up/down/left/right keys. The fields of the uplink lock
section are listed in Table 6.
Figure 14. GCS Receiving in Multiple AVs.

Locking/Unlocking Procedures
To lock the AV and GCS:
1. GCS must first be able to communicate with AV. GCS transmitter must be turned on and good link status
must be indicated.
2. Enter Radio submenu and locate AV ID to be locked.
Change 1 0007 00-16

TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0007 00
3. If desired AV has lock capability (a check box visible next to AV ID), move cursor to UAV box on AV line. See
Figure 15.
Figure 15. Cursor Positioned on AV Lock Check Box.
4. Press Enter key to initiate lock request. After a few seconds, both AV and GCS check boxes will be checked
(with an X) indicating lock has been established. See Figure 16.
Figure 16. Both AV and GCS Check Boxes Checked.
NOTE
If the link to the AV is poor, this process might not finish. The GCS will continue to try to lock
(indicated by blinking boxes) until either the AV is locked or the VO presses Enter again to
cancel.
To unlock both the AV and GCS:
1. GCS must first be able to communicate with AV. GCS transmitter must be turned on and good link status
must be indicated.
2. Enter Radio submenu and locate AV that GCS is locked to (AV entry with both AV and GCS boxes checked,
as shown in Figure 16).
3. Move cursor over UAV checkbox of locked AV and press Enter. After a few seconds, both checkboxes should
clear.
NOTE
If the link to the AV is poor, this process might not finish. The GCS will continue to try to unlock
(indicated by blinking boxes) until either the AV is unlocked or the VO presses Enter again to
cancel.
To unlock only the GCS:
1. Enter Radio submenu and locate AV that GCS is locked to (AV entry with both AV and GCS boxes checked,
see Figure 17). Link with AV is not required.
Figure 17. Locked AV and GCS, Cursor over GCS Box.
0007 00-17 Change 1

0007 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
2. Move cursor over GCS checkbox of locked AV and press Enter. After a second, the GCS checkbox will clear,
unlocking the GCS but leaving the AV locked. See Figure 18.
Figure 18. AV Locked, Cursor on Unlocked GCS Box.

To lock a GCS to a currently locked AV:
1. Ensure GCS transmitter is off.
2. Enter Radio submenu and locate locked AV (AV entry with AV checkbox checked).
3. Move cursor to GCS checkbox next to locked AV.
4. Press Enter to lock GCS to AV. Now AV and GCS checkboxes are checked, as shown in Figure 16.
CAUTION
If this process is being performed in relation to an AV handoff, see handoff procedure

(WP 0030 00) before transmitting.
Video Submenu
The Video Submenu allows the operator to adjust the settings for the Hand Controller, Brightness, Contrast, Color and
Backlight. Toggle the Menu Button right and then up/down to highlight the setting to be changed. Press the Enter But-
ton to make the selection.
Hub Submenu
The Hub Submenu allows the operator to delete all images from Hub. Press the Enter Button to make the selection.
Screen Submenu
The Screen Submenu brings up a series of additional submenus. Toggle the Menu Button and highlight the desired
screen. Press the Enter Button to select. Some fuselages will allow an offset to the gyro calibration. In the Submenu
text, MAG CAL will change to GYRO/MAG CAL.
Change 1 0007 00-18

TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0007 00
Figure 19. Screen Submenu.

Standard Screen
Selecting this will bring the operator back to the Standard Screen. The Standard Screen may also be selected, i.e. “re-
stored”, by holding menu button left for 2 seconds.
GPS Screen
Figure 20. GPS Screen.
0007 00-19 Change 1

0007 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
Table 7. GPS Information.
Item Meaning
Crypto-Key Status Keyed state of the GPS. One of the following messages will appear:
•Crypto-key state unknown
•Not Keyed
•Keyed - but not for today
•Keyed - correct for today
•Keyed - incorrect for today
•Keyed - waiting for Secure Voice (SV) data
•Zeroize Successful
•Zeroize Failed
•Key Loaded
GPS Data • Time: HH:MM:SS (Zulu Time)
• Date: MM-DD-YYYY
• Latitude and longitude in decimal degrees
• Altitude in meters
• Climb rate in meters per second
• Speed in meters per second
• Heading in degrees
• Area under Carrier to Noise Ratio (Cno): relative signal strength for each of
twelve tracked satellites
Age • Indicates how old GPS data is
• This can be used to determine the status of the communication between the
GPS receiver and the avionics
• Good status is indicated by an Age of 0 seconds
NOTE
The GPS can be zeroized by removing both the flight battery and the GPS backup battery (a
small cylindrical lithium battery mounted to the avionics board).
NOTE
Zeroize GPS Key will cause secure GPS units to stop functioning in the secure mode until they
are reprogrammed with a good key.
1. Ensure transmitter is on.

2. Toggle the Menu Select Switch up or down while on the GPS Info Screen to make zeroize key function visible
and available.
3. Press ENTER to zeroize.
Change 1 0007 00-20

TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0007 00
Basic Air Data Screen

The Air Data Screen allows operator to view basic air data information. This screen is where the GCS battery status
and Raven ID number is located.
Figure 21. Basic Air Data Screen.

Diagnostics Screens
The Diagnostics Screens show diagnostic and status information. There are three Diagnostics Screens. To cycle
through them, press Menu-Up.
output.

Diagnostics Screen 2, Figure 23 shows hub memory used and space available. It also shows the corners of the square
of DTED loaded.
0007 00-21 Change 1

0007 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P

At this screen, it is possible to delete all Capture Images from hub memory. To do so, press Menu-Down, then press
Enter.

Diagnostics Screen 3, Figure 24 identifies the GCS Hub software version, the Hub processor, and the network IP ad-
dresses being used. It indicates NETWORK is CONNECTED or NOT CONNECTED to Laptop, and the allocation of
controller ports to operators.
Port A is the primary Hand Controller connector.
Port B and Port C are in the Laptop connector:
Port B is used for second Hand Controller.
Port C is used for Network to Laptop.
Change 1 0007 00-22

TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0007 00
Gyro Offset and Magnetic Calibration Screen
CAUTION
This is not an Operator level procedure. Inaccurate gyro calibration settings can result in the
loss of an Air Vehicle.
GYRO OFFSETS : Provides for the very unlikely possibility that a Gyro Rate, at rest, has become unsatisfactorily large.
Gyro Offsets should not be calculated, saved or cleared without a recommendation from a Field Service Representa-
tive. Fuselage should be returned for Depot repair.
MAG CAL: Provides for performing AV magnetometer calibration. See WP 0055 00.
Figure 25. MAG CAL Screen.
0007 00-23 Change 1

0007 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
Options Submenu
The Options Submenu allows the operator to choose how GPS coordinates are displayed. Toggle Menu Button to high-
light the desired format and press the Enter Button to select. The warning level for the GCS Battery is adjusted here
(See WP 0009 00, Table 2).
Figure 26. Options Screen.
Change 1 0007 00-24

TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0007 00
Beacon Submenu
The Beacon Submenu allows the operator to select the type of beacon to be used. Toggle Menu Button to highlight the
desired beacon and press the Enter Button to select.
Figure 27. Beacon Submenu.

Payload Control Menu
Access the Payload Control menu by pressing the Payload Control Button on the back of the Hand Controller. While the
Payload Control button is depressed, the overlay displays the options for payload operation, such as forward-look or
side-look camera function. The connected camera is highlighted. It is not necessary to press the Enter Button to make
a selection. Menu-Down turns off the connected camera. Holding Menu-Down turns off all payloads. When all pay-
loads are off, “(ALL OFF)” is highlighted.
Figure 28. Payload Control Menu for IR Camera Payload.
0007 00-25 Change 1

0007 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P

IR Camera Payload .
1. To switch WHITE HOT – BLACK HOT selection, press Menu-Right.
2. To turn on IR camera, press Menu-Left. To turn off IR camera, press Menu-Down.
3. To enable illuminator, or to turn it off, press Menu-Up.
EO Camera Payload with Digital Tilt Pan Zoom
Figure 29. Payload Control Menu for EO Camera Payload.

While pressing Payload Control Button:
To connect side-look camera, press Menu-Left. To cycle through zoom values of side camera, press Menu-Left repeat-
edly. To connect front-look camera, press Menu-Up. To cycle through zoom values of front camera, press Menu-Up re-
peatedly. To turn off connected camera, press Menu-Down.
Screen Capture Button
To capture a video still, press the Screen Capture Button on the back of the Hand Controller. If the button is then quickly
released, live display continues, otherwise the Replay Display mode begins and the newly-captured image is dis-
played. The Hub stores approximately 80 NITF files (including screen capture and S and T computations). Older files
will automatically be deleted when space is needed for new files.
Replay Display Mode
In Replay Display mode, a captured image is displayed. “R”, highlighted, is displayed at bottom-right.
To display captured images without capturing a new image, hold Menu-Left while pressing and releasing Screen Cap-
ture Button.
While in Replay Display mode:
Press Menu-Left to display next-earlier image.
Hold Menu-Left 2 seconds to display earliest image.
Press Menu-Right to display next-later image.
Hold Menu-Right to display latest image.
Hold Left-Return to standard screen.
Press Enter to add or modify range and bearing markers (refer to Range and Bearing Tool WP 0025 00 description):
END OF WORK PACKAGE
Change 1 0007 00-26

TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0008 00
NSN 1550-01-538-9256 EIC: 60C
WARNING DISPLAYS LRIP> .
INITIAL SETUP:
NA
WARNING DISPLAYS LRIP> .
The RQ-11B system will provide warnings for many common problems on hand controllers.
General
• Flashing data denotes that a data parameter is currently not being updated. The data shown is the last known
correct data.
• Dashes (------) indicate that data is not available.
Table 1. Controller Warning Messages.
Message Meaning
Clock symbol in link bar Loss of GPS data, downlink data, or uplink
(LOW) AV battery is low. (20.9 to 21.9 V indicates approximately 10 minutes of flight time
remaining).
EN ROUTE RALLY AV has lost link and is en route to the Rally Waypoint and Autoland.
HOME NOT SET Home Waypoint has not been set.
LOL NOT SET LOL mode has not been set.
AUTOLAND (flashing) Autoland has been activated by Vehicle Operator.
AUTOLAND (solid) Autoland has been activated by the system.
NO HUB COM Hub not communicating with controller.
GCS XX.Xv (LOW) GCS battery voltage low (28.5V).
GPS BATT LOW GPS Backup Battery Low (This warning can only be cleared by cycling power to GCS)
The GCS/RVT is designed to operate from a BB-2557/U battery. The GCS/RVT can also be used with the common
BA-5590, the BB-390B/U and the BB-2590/U. When the GCS/RVT low battery warning is displayed the system oper-
ator has approximately 5 to 10 minutes to "hot swap" a replacement battery.
The low voltage warning is set for operation from the BB-2557/U battery and comes on when the battery reaches 28.5
volts. Using the alternative battery types will require that the operator "hot swap" batteries at different voltages since
the warning will come on early. Table 2 shows the low battery voltage that should be used for swapping each type of bat-
tery. If using other than BB-2557 VO/MO needs to periodically review air data screen for GCS/RVT voltage, because
low voltage warning is not accurate.
0008 00-1
0008 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
WARNING DISPLAYS LRIP> . - CONTINUED
Table 2. Battery Voltage Display.
Battery Type Low Voltage Notes

BB-2557/U 28.5 VDC Low Battery Warning will Display correctly.
BA-5590 22 VDC Low Battery Warning will NOT display correctly.
BB-390B/U 22 VDC Low Battery Warning will NOT display correctly.
BB-2590/U 26 VDC Low Battery Warning will NOT display correctly.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0008 00-2
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0009 00
NSN 1550-01-538-9256 EIC: 60C
WARNING DISPLAYS FRP> .
INITIAL SETUP:
NA
WARNING DISPLAYS
The RQ-11B system will provide warnings for many common problems on hand controllers.
General
• Flashing data denotes that a data parameter is currently not being updated. The data shown is the last known
correct data.
• Dashes (------) indicate that data is not available.
Table 1. Controller Warning Messages.
MESSAGE MEANING LOCATION

AUTOLAND (flashing Autoland has been commanded by GCS . General Warning Display Area
black and white)
AUTOLAND (solid red Autoland has been automatically activated by General Warning Display Area
highlighted) the AV.
CHANGE BATTERY GCS battery is low, change battery before General Warning Display Area
NOW system becomes inoperative.
Clock Symbol Loss of downlink data, or uplink. Link Status Bar
GCS XX.Xv (LOW) GCS battery voltage low (as set in OPTIONS GCS Battery Low Area
menu).
GPS BATT LOW GPS Backup Battery Low. (This warning can General Warning Display Area
only be cleared by changing the GPS Battery
and cycling power to GCS.)
EN ROUTE RALLY AV has lost link and is en route to the Rally General Warning Display Area
Waypoint and Autoland.
LOL NOT SET LOL mode has not been set. General Warning Display Area
(LOW) AV battery voltage low comes on at 21.9 AV Battery Voltage
V (approximately 10 minutes of flight time
remaining).
MISSION NOT SET AV mission has not been set. General Warning Display Area
NO HUB COM Hub not communicating with controller General Warning Display Area
SYSTEM Not enough battery voltage to power all of the General Warning Display Area
INOPERATIVE ground system components.
The GCS/RVT is designed to operate from a BB-2557/U battery. The GCS/RVT can also be used with the common
BA-5590, the BB-390B/U and the BB-2590/U. When the GCS/RVT low battery warning is displayed the system oper-
ator has approximately 5 to 10 minutes to "hot swap" a replacement battery.
0009 00-1
0009 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
WARNING DISPLAYS - CONTINUED
CAUTION
When the CHANGE BATTERY NOW warning appears on the GCS screen, swap batteries
immediately. Failure to do so will result in SYSTEM INOPERATIVE warning and loss or damage
to the AV.
VO must set the voltage that determines the Low Battery Warning, according to the battery type being used. See
Table 2.
Table 2. Battery Voltage Display.
BATTERY TYPE LOW VOLTAGE

BB-2557/U 28.5 VDC
BA-5590 22 VDC
BB-390B/U 22 VDC
BB-2590/U 26 VDC
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0009 00-2
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0010 00
NSN 1550-01-538-9256 EIC: 60C
SYSTEM ASSEMBLY (LRIP AND FRP)
INITIAL SETUP:
Materials/Parts Personnel Required
RQ-11B SUAS (1) Operator (2)
RSTA Kit (1)
SYSTEM ASSEMBLY
The RQ-11B AV is assembled from eight components. See Figure 1.
1. Right wing
2. Tailboom
3. Stabilator
4. Left wing
5. Fuselage
6. Battery
7. IR/ EO Payload Nose
8. Center wing
Figure 1. RQ-11B AV.
0010 00-1
0010 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
ASSEMBLY AND PREPARATION FOR USE

AV ASSEMBLY
WARNING
Remain clear of the propeller at all times. Work from the front of the AV whenever possible.
Failure to comply may result in injury to personnel.
NOTE
Batteries are stored separately.
Instructions for Assembly of the RQ-11B AV

Inspect components for damage during each step of assembly process.
1. Remove AV components from soft pack using the following steps:
CAUTION
Do not force soft pack open by pulling the grip tabs apart
a. Grip the soft pack by its closure with both hands, laying thumbs over the grip tabs as illustrated in
Figure 2. Keep fingers on the tracks of the seal.
Figure 2. Soft Pack Grip Tabs.
0010 00-2
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0010 00
ASSEMBLY AND PREPARATION FOR USE – CONTINUED
b. Squeeze and kink the closure into both palms, forming an “S” with the hands offset as illustrated in
Figure 3.
Figure 3. Forming an “S”.

c. The bag will pop open easily using this technique. See Figure 4.
Figure 4. Soft Pack Open.
0010 00-3
0010 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
CAUTION
It is critical that channel selection be coordinated in advance to avoid interference between

systems operating in close proximity. Failure to do so could cause damage to the system if
another GCS takes control of the AV.
NOTE
If channel selector switch breaks, system defaults to channel 1.
2. Select appropriate pre-coordinated channel using button on top of fuselage, Figure 5, Item 1.
Figure 5. Channel Select.
CAUTION
Do not twist the connection between the tailboom and fuselage when connecting and discon-
necting these parts. Twisting will stress the connector and can cause irreparable damage.
NOTE
Failure to properly seat the tailboom to the fuselage can cause reduced downlink range and
degraded video quality.
3. Align red arrows and attach tailboom to fuselage, assuring snug fit between connectors.
Figure 6. Tailboom Connect.
0010 00-4
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0010 00

CAUTION
WING CONNECTIONS
Inspect wing snap screws frequently for damage. Ensure they are not starting to crack from
previous use. Remove wing snap screws to inspect if necessary. Replace wing snap screws if
any doubt exists.
The wingtips are connected to the center wing by friction. If there is any doubt that the friction is
sufficient to keep the wingtips in place during flight, a small strip of tape should be placed across
the seam to ensure wingtips will remain secure. In turbulent wind conditions, an unsecured
wingtip may work apart in flight, causing the air vehicle to crash.
4. Attach wings to center wing, matching green Figure 7, Item 1 and red Figure 7, Item 2 arrows (wing pins are
offset at different widths to prevent incorrect installation).
Figure 7. Attach Wing Tips.
CAUTION
Failure to properly seat the snap screws into the slots on the center wing and fuselage pylon can
cause the AV to fly improperly or crash land, damaging the AV.
NOTE
Adjust snap screws IAW WP 0049 00.
5. Locate snap screws (Figure 8, Item 1) found on bottom of center wing and top of pylon. Align snap screws
with slots on center wing and pylon. Slide center wing onto fuselage, assuring top of snap screw is fully visible
on top of its slot. Gently seat into place.
Figure 8. Attach Center Wing.

6. To attach payload to fuselage, angle bottom connector onto fuselage, angle nose upward to mate with top
connector, and snap in place.
0010 00-5
0010 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
Figure 9. Attach Payload (Sheet 1 of 2).
0010 00-6
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0010 00
Figure 9. Attach Payload (Sheet 2 of 2).

7. Attach stabilator to tailboom stabilator horn Figure 10, Item 1, with red arrow up. Stabilator horn pivot housing
Figure 10, Item 3, should be firmly seated in end of tailboom and stabilator pivot pin Figure 10, Item 2, should
be centered in housing.
Figure 10. Attach Stabilator.
WARNING
Keep all body parts clear of the propeller when inserting the battery. Propeller is “live” once
battery is connected. Therefore, do not connect flight battery until cleared to do so by the AV
operator.
8. When AV is ready for Preflight, remove contact cover on battery, and store cover.
9. Insert battery (contacts facing to rear and charging port facing inboard) into compartment on left side of
fuselage by angling it into fuselage and snapping in place. Vehicle operator should hear a beep, then
propeller will twitch and stabilator should go into Autoland.
10. Place AV on ground and allow it to remain stationary until GPS has acquired and locked satellites. AV will
acquire and lock satellites more quickly if the AV remains completely stationary.
0010 00-7
0010 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P

GCS/RVT ASSEMBLY
The GCS/RVT is contained in a soft pack and is composed of the following components shown in Figure 11.
1. GCS/RVT Soft Pack

2. Radio Frequency (RF) Unit
3. Hub Unit
4. Uplink Antenna.
5. Ethernet Cable
6. RF Cable
7. Antenna Mast Bag
8. GCS-RVT Mast.
9. Controller Hood
10. Hand Controller
Figure 11. GCS/RVT Components.

Instructions for Assembling the GCS/RVT.
Inspect components for damage during each step of assembly process.
1. Remove GCS/RVT components from soft pack.
2. Remove the RSTA laptop from RSTA Kit.
3. Turn on laptop and log on to FalconView. (As required, see WP 0021 00)
4. Unfold antenna mast, assemble and hang soft pack on mast.
5. Attach Uplink Antenna to RF Unit (if functioning as a GCS).
6. Plug RF Unit cable into RF Unit and Hub Unit.
7. Attach RF Unit to top of Antenna Mast.
8. Plug Hand Controller into port on Hub Unit showing Hand Controller symbol.
9. Attach Controller Hood to Hand Controller and secure in place using straps and side-release buckles.
0010 00-8
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0010 00
10. Connect ethernet cable between laptop’s ethernet port and the hub’s laptop ethernet port.
1. RF Port
2. RCA Port
3. AUX port
4. Laptop Port.
5. Controller port
Figure 12. Hub Unit.
NOTE
Maintain a minimum distance of 6 feet between AV and GCS to prevent interference with GPS
acquisition.
11. Plug in GCS/RVT battery and set the appropriate GCS Battery Warning level (see WP 0009 00, Table 2).
Connect battery to GCS/RVT only when both operators are ready to begin preflight procedures.
CAUTION
It is critical that channel selection be coordinated in advance to avoid interference between

systems operating in close proximity. Failure to do so could damage to the system if another
GCS takes control of the AV accidentally.
12. Select desired channel and ensure no other AVs are operating on same frequency by observing video.
0010 00-9
0010 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
13. AV Operator commands Autoland on GCS.
Figure 13. Final Assembly.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0010 00-10
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0011 00
NSN 1550-01-538-9256 EIC: 60C
PREFLIGHT PROCEDURES LRIP> .
INITIAL SETUP:
Tools and Special Tools Personnel Required
Compass Operator (2)
Materials/Parts
RQ-11B SUAS (1)
RSTA Kit (1)
BASIC FLIGHT OPERATIONS LRIP> .
The Vehicle Operator (VO) and Mission Operator (MO) each perform functions during flight operations. In this section,
personnel roles are designated by the following letters:
• (VO) = Vehicle Operator

• (MO) = Mission Operator
• (VO/MO) = both
PREFLIGHT PROCEDURES LRIP> .
The preflight procedures do not detail the mission planning process, although this is a critical preflight activity. Informa-
tion on mission planning can be found in WP 0026 00.
Prior to Departure
1. (VO/MO) Before departing on a mission, conduct pre-mission checks to ensure all equipment is available,
accounted for, assembled and inspected (see WP 0045 00). If recovery is planned for a location other than
the launch area, both the launch and recovery teams must be equipped separately.
2. (VO/MO) Assemble AVs and complete Preflight Check List. Mission operator loads waypoints and rally
points into the laptop computer or Hand Controller.
3. (MO) If precise location is required for mission, install KYK adapter cable and load code as described in
WP 0032 00.
4. (VO/MO) Perform radio/communications equipment check (as required).
5. (VO/MO) Assemble and inspect recommended supplemental equipment (if available):
• Handheld GPS for the recovery team in event AV goes down.

• Maps with overlays (if required).
• Spare batteries.
6. (VO/MO) Review/rehearse flight plan, launch and recovery procedures, and contingency plans (failed
launch, LOL, unexpected crash).
7. Load RSTA Laptop computer with appropriate maps and software and Digital Terrain Elevation Data (DTED).
(See WP 0020 00)
0011 00-1
0011 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
PREFLIGHT PROCEDURES LRIP> . – CONTINUED

Site Survey and Setup
1. (VO/MO) Survey and clear area of operations (AO) for debris, obstructions, and obstacles. Survey area for
clear LOS between AV and GCS/RVT.
NOTE
In general, the VO unpacks and sets up the GCS/RVT, while the MO unpacks and assembles
the AV.
2. Set up RQ-11B System IAW WP 0010 00, System Assembly.

Preflight Checklist
The preflight system check is critical to assuring that all components are properly operating before launching the AV.
VO will hold Controller during this process, while the MO holds the AV. The Checklist will be performed utilizing the call
and respond method. The VO will read the checklist verbally calling out steps to the MO. The MO will respond verbally
back to the VO. The Preflight Checklist also appears on the hood of the GCS/RVT for easy reference.
NOTE
If any preflight checklist item determined to be mission critical fails preflight inspection, failed
item must be resolved and preflight checklist completed.
NOTE
(VO) If the AV is not going to be launched immediately, select Autoland. (This signals the MO
that the AV is safe to handle or set down.)
Perform the following steps for Preflight Check.
1. Select same channel on both AV and GCS/RVT.
• (VO) Verify correct channel selected on GCS/RVT.
WARNING
Ensure the AV is placed into Autoland once the GCS has established link with the AV. This
prevents accidental engagement of the propeller. Failure to do so could cause personal injury.
CAUTION
take control of the a AV. Failure to comply can cause damage to the equipment.
2. Transmitter on GCS.
• (VO) Turn GCS radio transmitter on.
3. GPS Locked.
• (VO) Check that GPS is "locked" (all data is steady and not flashing) on VO Controller, video display
shows "4+ (Key Symbol if crypto loaded)" and GPS countdown is complete.
• If lock not obtained in 2 minutes, go to GPS troubleshooting. See WP 0038 00.
0011 00-2
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0011 00

4. Check boot Altitude and Magnetic Compass.
• (VO) Ensure boot-up altitude is within 50 ft. of actual altitude and confirm Magnetic heading is + or - 10
degrees of actual.
• If heading is not correct, conduct Mag Cal . See WP 0055 00.
5. Check Loss of Link (LOL) Settings
• (VO) Verify LOL setting per mission plan. LOL setting is normally set to GO TO RALLY. Verify Rally
altitude.
CAUTION
Always verify the data (location, range and bearing) is accurate for the “+”,”H”, “E”, and “L”
waypoints. If these points are inaccurately entered or set outside the range limits of the system
(~10KM); this could induce Loss of Link or cause the loss of an AV. “+” and “H” are the only
points that should be the same at boot up. “L” and “E” must be set with mission data. “E” must
be set a minimum of 500 meters from “L” and in the proper direction for landing
6. Check "+", "H", “E” and "L" Waypoints
• (VO) Confirm waypoint data is correct for planned mission.

7. Man Flight Mode Selected
• (VO) Select MAN mode using Menu select button or by pressing Hot Key Button.
8. Check Throttle. The throttle must reach 100% setting during preflight check, otherwise the AV will not have
full power during launch.
• (VO) Signal readiness for motor run by calling, “Clear prop!”

• (MO) Turn away from VO and ensure hands are away from prop and signal readiness for motor run by
replying, “Prop clear.”
• (VO) Start by pressing toggle up two times to ensure toggle switch is functioning properly going up, then
throttle up to full power by pressing toggle switch forward and holding until 100% power is indicated.
• (VO) Verify throttle reading on screen reaches 100% (wait 3 seconds) and battery voltage is greater
than 23 volts.
• (VO) Throttle back to zero by pressing toggle switch down twice to check functionality and then holding
down until motor stops.
9. Video Clear
a. EO
(1) Front
(a) (MO) Hold AV wings level, point from camera toward horizon.
(b) (VO) Verify camera is clear and not off-center or canted, and working properly.
(2) Side
(a) (MO) Hold AV parallel to ground, point side camera toward horizon.
(b) (VO) Verify camera is clear and not off-center or canted, and is working properly.
(c) (VO) Check side camera zoom functions.
b. IR
(1) (MO) Hold AV parallel to ground, point side camera toward horizon.
(2) (VO) Verify camera is clear and white-hot and black-hot toggle is operational.
0011 00-3
0011 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P

10. (MO) Hold assembled AV by fuselage with tail pointing toward Vehicle Operator. Hold AV in this position
while VO performs checks.
• Check Stabilator.
• (VO) Verify stabilator is functioning by moving joystick back (nose up) and forward (nose down), and
confirm verbally with “Back Stick” and “Forward Stick.” Stabilator motion is very slight and AV may need
to be placed into Autoland to see movement.
11. Check Rudder
• (VO) Verify rudder is functioning by moving joystick left and right, and confirm verbally with “Left Stick”
and “Right Stick”.
12. Check Gyros functional and centered.
• (MO) Check gyro by slowly waving AV tail side-to-side then rolling AV left and right. Watch for motion
in stabilator and rudder. Rudder should move in direction of wave and up on side-to-side roll. Verify
rudder and stabilator both center when AV is stationary.
13. Check Autoland.
• (VO) Select Hot Key and Enter Button simultaneously and check for upward orientation of stabilator
and button functionality.
• (VO) Deselect Autoland (press Hot Key) and verify stabilator returns to flight position.
WARNING
NOTE
The pitot tube check during the preflight check causes the AVs transmitter to switch to full power
for flight. The AV transmitter can overheat if the AV is not launched or powered down soon after.
After completing preflight check, if launch will be significantly delayed, remove AV battery and
begin again at a more appropriate time. If AV transmitter overheats, it will shift to very low power
in an attempt to prevent damage. This causes downlink range to be severely reduced, and
downlink may be lost very soon after launch.
14. Check Pitot

a. (MO) Ensure pitot tube is operational. Cover open end of shaft with finger and hold 3 seconds.
Verify stabilator is active. Verify stabilator moves up and holds that position until Pitot is released
then verify stabilator moves to initial position. This motion will be very slight so it is important to
watch carefully with eyes level to stabilator.
b. Check IR Laser Illuminator (as required).
(1) (MO) Point nose of AV toward MO.
(2) (MO) Kneel with AV with Illuminator pointed toward ground.
(3) (MO) Press and hold pitot tube.
(4) (VO) After 3 seconds, turn Illuminator on using VO Hand Controller.
0011 00-4
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0011 00
(5) (VO) Observe IR spot on the ground using night vision device.
(6) (VO) Turn off IR Illuminator.
(7) (VO) Verify IR Illuminator off using night device.
(8) (MO) Release pitot.
15. Check Beacons
• (VO) Check beacons - as required.

16. Check GCS Battery Voltage
• (VO) Check GCS battery voltage. (Above minimum voltage. See WP 0008 00, Table 2).
17. Start Recorder
• (VO) Start recorder prior to launching AV. See WP 0023 00 .
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0011 00-5/6 blank

TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0012 00
NSN 1550-01-538-9256 EIC: 60C
PREFLIGHT PROCEDURES FRP> .
INITIAL SETUP:
Compass Operator (2)
Materials/Parts
RQ-11B SUAS (1)
RSTA Kit (1)
BASIC FLIGHT OPERATIONS

The Vehicle Operator (VO) and Mission Operator (MO) each perform functions during flight operations. In this section,
personnel roles are designated by the following letters:
• (VO) = Vehicle Operator
• (MO) = Mission Operator
• (VO/MO) = both
PREFLIGHT PROCEDURES
The preflight procedures do not detail the mission planning process, although this is a critical preflight activity. Informa-
tion on mission planning can be found in "WP 0026 00".
Prior to Departure
1. (VO/MO) Before departing on a mission, conduct pre-mission checks to ensure all equipment is available,
accounted for, assembled and inspected (see WP 0045 00). If recovery is planned for a location other than
the launch area, both the launch and recovery teams must be equipped separately.
2. (VO/MO) Assemble AVs and complete Preflight Check List. Mission operator loads waypoints and rally
points into the laptop computer or Hand Controller.
CAUTION
Hub and Hand controller must have compatible software versions. Verify hand controller
software version on the diagnostics page 1 and the GCS software version on diagnostics page
3 are both 1.4.0 or greater.
3. (MO) If precise location is required for mission, install KYK adapter cable and load code as described in
WP 0032 00.
4. (VO/MO) Perform radio/communications equipment check (as required). Verify the downlink filter on the RF
Unit is the proper configuration for the channel being used. (See WP 0057 01).
5. (VO/MO) Assemble and inspect recommended supplemental equipment (if available):
• Handheld GPS for the recovery team in event AV goes down.
• Maps with overlays (if required).
• Spare batteries.
6. (VO/MO) Review/rehearse flight plan, launch and recovery procedures, and contingency plans (failed
launch, LOL, unexpected crash).
0012 00-1 Change 1 – 11 June 2008

0012 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
PREFLIGHT PROCEDURES – CONTINUED

7. Load the RSTA Laptop computer with appropriate maps and Digital Terrain Elevation Data (DTED). (See
WP 0021 00)
Site Survey and Setup
1. (VO/MO) Survey and clear area of operations (AO) for debris, obstructions, and obstacles. Survey area for
clear LOS between AV and GCS/RVT.
NOTE
In general, the VO unpacks and sets up the GCS/RVT, while the MO unpacks and assembles
the AV.
2. Set up RQ-11B System IAW WP 0010 00 (FRP) System Assembly.

Preflight Checklist
The preflight system check is critical to assuring that all components are properly operating before launching the AV.
VO will hold Controller during this process, while the MO holds the AV. The Checklist will be performed utilizing the call
and respond method. The VO will read the checklist verbally calling out steps to the MO. The MO will respond verbally
back to the VO. The Preflight Checklist also appears on the hood of the GCS/RVT for easy reference.
NOTE
If any preflight checklist item determined to be mission critical fails preflight inspection, failed
item must be resolved and preflight checklist completed.
NOTE
(VO) If the AV is not going to be launched immediately, select Autoland. (This signals the MO
that the AV is safe to handle or set down.)
Perform the following steps for Preflight Check.
• (VO) Verify correct channel selected on GCS/RVT.
WARNING
Ensure the AV is placed into Autoland once the GCS has established link with the AV. This
prevents accidental engagement of the propeller. Failure to do so could cause personal injury.
CAUTION
take control of the a AV. Failure to comply can cause damage to the equipment.
2. Turn GCS radio transmitter on.
3. Lock AV to GCS.
4. GPS Locked.
Change 1 0012 00-2

TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0012 00

degrees of actual.
6. Check Loss of Link (LOL) Settings.
• (VO) Verify LOL setting per mission plan. LOL setting is normally set to GO TO RALLY. Verify Rally
altitude.
CAUTION
Always verify the data (location, range and bearing) is accurate for the “+”,”H”, “E”, and “L”
waypoints. If these points are inaccurately entered or set outside the range limits of the system
(~10KM); this could induce Loss of Link or cause the loss of an AV. “+” and “H” are the only
points that should be the same at boot up. “L” and “E” must be set with mission data. “E” must
be set a minimum of 500 meters from “L” and in the proper direction for landing
7. Check "+", "H", “E” and "L" Waypoints.
• (VO) Confirm waypoint data is correct for planned mission.
8. Man Flight Mode Selected.
• (VO) Select MAN mode using Flight Mode Selection or Hot Key.
than 23 volts.
10. Video Clear.
a. EO
(1) Front
(a) (MO) Hold AV wings level, point front camera toward horizon.
(c) (VO) Check front camera zoom functions.
(2) Side
b. IR
0012 00-3 Change 1

0012 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P

11. (MO) Hold assembled AV by fuselage with tail pointing toward Vehicle Operator. Hold AV in this position
• Check Stabilator.
12. Check Rudder.
14. Check Autoland.
NOTE
The pitot tube check during the preflight check causes the AVs transmitter to switch to full power
for flight. The AV transmitter can overheat if the AV is not launched or powered down soon after.
After completing preflight check, if launch will be significantly delayed, remove AV battery and
begin again at a more appropriate time. If AV transmitter overheats, it will shift to very low power
in an attempt to prevent damage. This causes downlink range to be severely reduced, and
downlink may be lost very soon after launch.
15. Check Pitot.

• (MO) Ensure pitot tube is operational. Cover open end of shaft with finger and hold 3 seconds. Verify
stabilator is active. Verify stabilator moves up and holds that position until Pitot is released then verify
stabilator moves to initial position. This motion will be very slight so it is important to watch carefully with
eyes level to stabilator.
WARNING
16. Check IR Laser Illuminator (as required).
a. (MO) Point nose of AV toward MO.
b. (MO) Kneel with AV with Illuminator pointed toward ground.
c. (MO) Press and hold pitot tube.
d. (VO) After 3 seconds, turn Illuminator on using VO Hand Controller.
Change 1 0012 00-4

TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0012 00
e. (VO) Observe IR spot on the ground using night vision device.

f. (VO) Turn off IR Illuminator.
g. (VO) Verify IR Illuminator off using night device.
h. (MO) Release pitot.
17. Check Beacons.

18. Check Battery Voltage.
• (VO) Check GCS battery voltage and make sure it is above the minimum voltage (shown in
orWP 0009 00, Table 2 ). Set the GCS Battery Warning on the Hand Controller.
19. Start Recorder.
• (VO) Start recorder prior to launching AV. See WP 0024 00 .
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0013 00
NSN 1550-01-538-9256 EIC: 60C
LAUNCH (LRIP AND FRP)
INITIAL SETUP:
LAUNCH
Upon completion of Preflight Check, the AV is ready for launch. To obtain airspace clearance, follow the procedures
outlined in FM 3-04.155 . To launch:
1. (VO) Determine wind direction. Always launch AV into wind.
2. (MO) Point AV nose in desired launch direction.
WARNING
A rotating propeller can cause personal injury or equipment damage. Keep all body parts clear
of the propeller and keep the propeller arc clear of obstruction when inserting the battery and at
all times when the battery is installed.
3. (VO) Select MAN mode (using Hot Key Button). Horizontal stabilizer will move from Autoland to flight
position. VO states “Clear prop.”
0013 00-1
0013 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
LAUNCH - CONTINUED
4. (MO) Grasp AV from bottom aft of skid pad with Uplink Antenna positioned between palm and skid pad to
ensure antenna stays clear of prop during launch. Ensure uplink antenna is hanging free and not tangled.
Assume correct stance for launching AV depicted in Figure 1. Acknowledge with “Prop clear.”
Figure 1. AV Launch Stance.
5. (VO) Throttle up to full power (press Toggle Switch forward and hold until 100% throttle achieved (three
seconds)).
CAUTION
Wait until the motor is at full throttle for three seconds before launching the AV. Otherwise, a
crash landing and possible damage to the AV could result.
6. (MO) Wait three seconds after motor is at full power, then throw AV into wind. Throw it upward at angle
between 25° and 45° (see Figure 2). Throw it hard with complete follow-through. Maintain focus on correct
stance and technique.
CAUTION
In the event of a bad launch, the VO must be prepared to command Autoland immediately to
minimize damage to the AV. Autoland must be commanded well before the AV reaches the
ground in order to prevent damage.
7. (VO) Should be prepared to provide joystick inputs to adjust for desired flight path, however, if launch appears
to be unrecoverable, VO must command Autoland immediately.
0013 00-2
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0013 00
LAUNCH - CONTINUED
8. (VO) Maintain climb direction into wind until approximately 200-300 feet AGL then select appropriate flight
mode.
Figure 2. RQ-11B Launch Diagram.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0013 00-3/4 blank

TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0014 00
NSN 1550-01-538-9256 EIC: 60C
LANDING, RECOVERY AND INSPECTION LRIP> .
INITIAL SETUP:
LANDING, RECOVERY AND INSPECTION LRIP> .
WARNING
AVs in flight can impact objects/personnel if flight path and flight path control are not managed
properly, especially during takeoff and landing. Personnel in the landing site area shall be
prepared to move quickly if necessary.
WARNING
Ensure the Infrared (IR) payload laser illuminator is in the “off” state when approaching the
landing site. Personnel recovering the vehicle should consider the illuminator live until the AV
battery has been removed, and take the appropriate precautions. Never look into the beam.
The RQ-11B is designed with an Autoland feature that causes the AV to descend in a deep stall. This enables landings
in confined areas (see Figure 1). The landing is triggered by Vehicle Operator (VO) or as programmed in Loss of Link
(LOL).
Figure 1. RQ-11B Landing Site.
0014 00-1
0014 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
LANDING, RECOVERY AND INSPECTION LRIP> . - CONTINUED
NOTE
During Mission Oriented Protective Posture (MOPP) operations, determination of winds is very
difficult. Dropping dirt or grass will identify wind direction.
The AV should always be landed into the wind. This helps to slow forward motion and stabilize the AV horizontally dur-
ing descent. The landing site should be surveyed before initiating a landing or from the air just prior to activating the
landing.
CAUTION
During LOL mode, AV will not automatically align to land into wind, and could cause damage to
AV.
CAUTION
Autoland can be initiated at any time and any altitude. There will be a greater chance of AV
damage at altitudes lower than 75 feet AGL.
Upon command of Autoland, power is cut from the motor and the stabilator deflects fully upward. The AV pitches nose
up and begins a steep descent to the ground with wings level. Impact with the ground usually causes the AV compo-
nents to separate. This is normal and helps dissipate the energy of landing impact and protect the AV. A landing pad on
the bottom of the fuselage also provides impact protection.
It is possible to safely abort the flight at any time. For typical landing procedures, it is recommended that Autoland be
initiated above 75 feet AGL.
Autoland Landing
NOTE
Increased wind speed will decrease AV glide distance.
The following procedure outlines a VO-initiated landing.
1. Ensure laser illuminator is off if IR payload is attached.
2. Direct AV down to altitude of approximately 75 to 100 ft. AGL and orient AV into wind.
3. When AV is approximately 45 degrees from operator’s LOS and still at approximately 75 to 100 ft. AGL, AV is
properly oriented into wind for Autoland.
4. Press Hot key and Enter Buttons simultaneously to manually enter Autoland. Autoland on VO Controller will
flash.
5. VO should continue to fly AV to ground, ensuring nose of AV remains directed into wind.
Loss of Link Options
One of three actions will be initiated upon LOL (These options are preselected during preflight procedures): the AV will
immediately Autoland, “LAND IMMEDIATE”, the AV will go to Rally Point, “GO TO RALLY” and Autoland at that loca-
tion, or the AV will Finish Flight , “FINISH FLIGHT” before proceeding to Rally Point. The LOL action is automatically
engaged after 3 continuous seconds of loss of uplink (Loss of down link only does not initiate LOL mode.). The link sta-
tus bar on Hand Controller will appear as a red bar with clock symbol (indicating no signal).
0014 00-2
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0014 00
LANDING, RECOVERY AND INSPECTION LRIP> . - CONTINUED
CAUTION
Do not attempt to regain control of the AV after LOL if altitude is below 75 ft. AGL.
If link is regained, control of the AV can be regained. To take the AV out of Autoland, press the Hot Key Button by itself
once. This will put the AV in MAN mode at 0% throttle. Begin manually piloting the AV and immediately add power.
Land Immediate
If the mission has been set to “LAND IMMEDIATE” upon LOL, the hand controller will read “AUTOLAND” (red high-
lighted bar not flashing). The AV is in descent at this time. The AV coordinates on the hand controller(s) is the last
location down link.
Go to Rally
If the mission has been set to “GO TO RALLY” upon LOL, the AV will proceed to the E Waypoint and then proceed to the
L Waypoint. The hand controller will read “EN ROUTE RALLY”. Upon reaching the L Waypoint, the hand controller will
read “AUTOLAND” (not blinking).
Finish Flight
If the mission has been set to “FINISH FLIGHT”, the AV will continue its mission until flight loop time expires then pro-
ceed to E waypoint for landing at L waypoint.
Unintended Landing
If the GCS/RVT is still powered-up and the down link and GPS link was good at the time of the landing, the last known
coordinates will be displayed on the Hand Controller. A recovery team should record the last known AV coordinates
and other data (altitude, range, distance, heading, wind direction and speed) that will aid in search, and then plot the
location on a map and/or program it as a waypoint on a hand-held GPS before moving to the area to begin a system-
atic search to recover the AV.
The GCS/RVT can be taken to the vicinity of the downed AV and used to pick up video signal from a grounded AV,
provided it is intact enough to transmit. As the nose usually separates from the AV, watch for data (not video). An au-
tolanded AV may transmit for quite a long time after landing, as battery usage is significantly diminished after the motor
is off.
Recovery and Inspection
Follow these steps to recover and inspect an AV.
1. Retrieve fuselage first by approaching from front, keeping body away from propeller area.
NOTE
Write down all pertinent data before disconnecting battery. Data is lost when battery is discon-
nected.
2. Disconnect battery from AV.

3. Gather all eight AV components.
4. Inspect all components for damage. Generally, minor dents or cracks will not require immediate maintenance
before launching again. However, be wary of flying AV with damage to center wing and wing tips, stabilator,
or tailboom, as these control flight. (Detailed inspection, maintenance, and repair procedures appear in
Chapter 4, Field Level Maintenance Instructions).
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0014 00-3/4 blank

TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0015 00
NSN 1550-01-538-9256 EIC: 60C
LANDING, RECOVERY AND INSPECTION FRP> .
INITIAL SETUP:
LANDING, RECOVERY AND INSPECTION
WARNING
AVs in flight can impact objects/personnel if flight path and flight path control are not managed
properly, especially during takeoff and landing. Personnel in the landing site area shall be
prepared to move quickly if necessary.
WARNING
Ensure the Infrared (IR) payload laser illuminator is in the “off” state when approaching the
landing site. Personnel recovering the vehicle should consider the illuminator live until the AV
battery has been removed, and take the appropriate precautions. Never look into the beam.
The RQ-11B is designed with an Autoland feature that causes the AV to descend in a deep stall. This enables landings
in confined areas (see Figure 1). The landing is triggered by Vehicle Operator (VO) or as programmed in Loss of Link
(LOL).
Figure 1. RQ-11B Landing Site.
0015 00-1
0015 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
LANDING, RECOVERY AND INSPECTION - CONTINUED
NOTE
During Mission Oriented Protective Posture (MOPP) operations, determination of winds is very
difficult. Dropping dirt or grass will identify wind direction.
The AV should always be landed into the wind. This helps to slow forward motion and stabilize the AV horizontally dur-
ing descent. The landing site should be surveyed before initiating a landing or from the air just prior to activating the
landing.
CAUTION
During LOL mode, AV will not automatically align to land into wind, and could cause damage to
AV.
CAUTION
Autoland can be initiated at any time and any altitude. There will be a greater chance of AV
damage at altitudes lower than 75 feet AGL.
Upon command of Autoland, power is cut from the motor and the stabilator deflects fully upward. The AV pitches nose
up and begins a steep descent to the ground with wings level. Impact with the ground usually causes the AV compo-
nents to separate. This is normal and helps dissipate the energy of landing impact and protect the AV. A landing pad on
the bottom of the fuselage also provides impact protection.
It is possible to safely abort the flight at any time. For typical landing procedures, it is recommended that Autoland be
initiated above 75 feet AGL.
Autoland Landing
NOTE
Increased wind speed will decrease AV glide distance.
The following procedure outlines a VO-initiated landing.
1. Ensure laser illuminator is off if IR payload is attached.
2. Direct AV down to altitude of approximately 75 to 100 ft. AGL and orient AV into wind.
3. When AV is approximately 45 degrees from operator’s LOS and still at approximately 75 to 100 ft. AGL, AV is
properly oriented into wind for Autoland.
4. Press Hot key and Enter Buttons simultaneously to manually enter Autoland. Autoland on VO Controller will
flash.
5. VO should continue to fly AV to ground, ensuring nose of AV remains directed into wind.
Loss of Link Options
One of three actions will be initiated upon LOL (These options are preselected during preflight procedures): the AV will
immediately Autoland, “LAND IMMEDIATE”, the AV will go to Rally Point, “GO TO RALLY” and Autoland at that loca-
tion, or the AV will Finish Flight , “FINISH FLIGHT” before proceeding to Rally Point. The LOL action is automatically
engaged after 3 continuous seconds of loss of uplink (Loss of down link only does not initiate LOL mode.). The link sta-
tus bar on Hand Controller will appear as a red bar with clock symbol (indicating no signal).
0015 00-2
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0015 00

CAUTION
Do not attempt to regain control of the AV after LOL if altitude is below 75 ft. AGL.
If link is regained, control of the AV can be regained. To take the AV out of Autoland, press the Hot Key Button by itself
once. This will put the AV in MAN mode at 0% throttle. Begin manually piloting the AV and immediately add power.
LOL: Land Immediate
If the mission has been set to “LAND IMMEDIATE” upon LOL, the hand controller will read “AUTOLAND” (red high-
lighted bar not flashing). The AV is in descent at this time. The AV coordinates on the hand controller(s) is the last
location down link from AV.
LOL: Go to Rally
If the mission LOL has been set to “GO TO RALLY” upon LOL, the AV will proceed to the E Waypoint and then to the L
Waypoint. The Hand Controller will read “EN ROUTE RALLY”. Upon reaching the L Waypoint, the Hand Controller will
also read “AUTOLAND” (not blinking).
LOL: Finish Flight
If the mission has been set to “FINISH FLIGHT”: In NAV mode, the AV will continue its NAV mission until flight loop time
expires, then proceed to E waypoint for landing at L waypoint. In all other modes, the AV will perform Go To Rally.
CAUTION
Setting the loop time beyond the battery life could result in loss or damage to the AV. The GCS
default time is 360 minutes.
Unintended Landing
If the GCS/RVT is still powered-up and the down link and GPS link was good at the time of the landing, the last known
coordinates will be displayed on the Hand Controller. A recovery team should record the last known AV coordinates
and other data (altitude, range, distance, heading, wind direction and speed) that will aid in search, and then plot the
location on a map and/or program it as a waypoint on a hand-held GPS before moving to the area to begin a system-
atic search to recover the AV.
The GCS/RVT can be taken to the vicinity of the downed AV and used to pick up video signal from a grounded AV,
provided it is intact enough to transmit. As the nose usually separates from the AV, watch for data (not video). An au-
tolanded AV may transmit for quite a long time after landing, as battery usage is significantly diminished after the motor
is off.
Recovery and Inspection
Follow these steps to recover and inspect an AV.
1. VO unlock AV from GCS.
2. Retrieve fuselage first by approaching from front, keeping body away from propeller area.
NOTE
Write down all pertinent data before disconnecting battery. Data is lost when battery is discon-
nected.
3. Disconnect battery from AV.

4. Gather all eight AV components.
5. Inspect all components for damage. Generally, minor dents or cracks will not require immediate maintenance
before launching again. However, be wary of flying AV with damage to center wing and wing tips, stabilator,
0015 00-3
0015 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
or tailboom, as these control flight. (Detailed inspection, maintenance, and repair procedures appear in
Chapter 4, Field Level Maintenance Instructions).
6. Conduct post flight IAW WP 0017 00
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0015 00-4
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0016 00

NSN 1550-01-538-9256 EIC: 60C
SYSTEM DISASSEMBLY (LRIP AND FRP)
INITIAL SETUP:
WARNING
Always approach AV from front to prevent injury from accidental activation of propeller.
Remove the battery from the AV before beginning disassembly to prevent injury from accidental
activation of the propeller. Failure to comply may result in personal injury.
AV DISASSEMBLY
1. Ensure battery has been removed from AV. To remove battery, first remove Payload, then push battery out
from front of AV.
CAUTION
Use caution when removing wings. Failure to comply may result in damage to thin trailing edge.
2. Remove wing assembly (left, right and center sections) from fuselage. Ensure that center wing is completely
free of fuselage before lifting center wing away from fuselage.
3. Remove left and right wings from center wing.
4. Remove stabilator.
CAUTION
Do not twist the connection between the tailboom and fuselage when connecting and discon-
necting these parts. Twisting will stress the connector and can cause irreparable damage.
5. Remove tailboom by pulling it straight from fuselage.
6. Inspect AV components for damage after disassembly or collection.
0016 00-1
0016 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
AV DISASSEMBLY - CONTINUED
CAUTION
When disassembling and storing the RQ-11B SUAS, ensure that components are stored in their
appropriate locations. Failure to comply may result in damage to the system.
7. Place all AV components in AV Soft Pack ensuring Payload Figure 1, Item 1 is the last component stored.
FRK and second Payload are installed in bottom of pack.
Figure 1. Package AV Components.
GCS/RVT DISASSEMBLY
Inspect components for damage during each step of disassembly process.
1. Disconnect Hub Unit from battery and remove GCS Soft Pack from Mast.
2. Disconnect Ethernet cable from the RSTA laptop and Hub Unit, then coil and stow cable.
3. Disconnect RF cable from RF Unit and Hub Unit, then coil and stow cable.
4. Remove Controller Hood from Hand Controller.
5. Disconnect Hand Controller from Hub Unit.
6. Stow Hub Unit.
7. Lay Controller Hood across Hand Controller screen and wrap Hand Controller cord around Hand Controller
and Controller Hood and stow (see Figure 2).
Figure 2. Wrap Controller and Hood.
0016 00-2
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0016 00
GCS/RVT DISASSEMBLY - CONTINUED
8. Remove RF Unit from top of Antenna Mast.

9. Remove Uplink Antenna from RF Unit, place Uplink Antenna in Mast Bag, and stow RF Unit in GCS Soft
Pack.
10. Collapse Antenna Mast and place in Mast Bag.
11. Place Mast Bag in GCS Soft Pack.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0016 00-3/4 blank

TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0017 00
NSN 1550-01-538-9256 EIC: 60C
POST-FLIGHT PROCEDURES (LRIP AND FRP)
INITIAL SETUP:
POST-FLIGHT PROCEDURES
Prior to departing the launch/recovery site or as mission dictates, inventory and account for all equipment. Report any
discrepancies immediately to the chain of command. A thorough visual and functional equipment inspection should be
conducted after every mission day. Detailed inspection and repair procedures appear in Chapter 4, Field Level Main-
tenance Instructions. After each flight, complete an entry to the flight log. See WP 0070 00 for an example flight log.
1. (VO/MO) Assemble and inspect equipment.
• (VO) Verify correct channel selected on GCS/RVT. (Ensure deconfliction of frequency)
3. Transmitter on GCS.
• Select Autoland.
• (VO) Turn GCS radio transmitter on.
• Establish lock between the AV and GCS. (LRIP N/A)
4. GPS Locked.
degrees of actual.
6. Man Flight Mode Selected.
• (VO) Select MAN mode using Flight Mode Selection or Hot Key.
than 23 volts.
8. Video Clear
a. EO
(1) Front
0017 00-1
0017 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
POST-FLIGHT PROCEDURES - CONTINUED

(a) (MO) Hold AV wings level, point front camera toward horizon.
(c) (VO) Check front camera zoom functions.
(2) Side
b. IR
9. Check Stabilator.
• (MO) Hold assembled AV by fuselage with tail pointing toward Vehicle Operator. Hold AV in this position
10. Check Rudder.
12. Check Autoland.
NOTE
The pitot tube check during the postflight check causes the AVs transmitter to switch to full
power for flight. The AV transmitter can overheat if the AV is not launched or powered down
soon after. After completing preflight check, if launch will be significantly delayed, remove AV
battery and begin again at a more appropriate time. If AV transmitter overheats, it will shift to
very low power in an attempt to prevent damage. This causes downlink range to be severely
reduced, and downlink may be lost very soon after launch.
13. Check Pitot.

• (MO) Ensure pitot tube is operational. Cover open end of shaft with finger and hold 3 seconds. Verify
stabilator is active. Verify stabilator moves up and holds that position until Pitot is released then verify
stabilator moves to initial position. This motion will be very slight so it is important to watch carefully with
eyes level to stabilator.
14. Check IR Laser Illuminator (as required).
a. (MO) Point nose of AV toward MO.
b. (MO) Kneel with AV with Illuminator pointed toward ground.
0017 00-2
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0017 00
POST-FLIGHT PROCEDURES - CONTINUED
c. (MO) Press and hold pitot tube.

d. (VO) After 3 seconds, turn Illuminator on using VO Hand Controller.
e. (VO) Observe IR spot on the ground using night vision device.
f. (VO) Turn off IR Illuminator.
g. (VO) Verify IR Illuminator off using night device.
h. (MO) Release pitot.
15. Check Beacons

16. Unlock GCS from AV. (LRIP N/A)
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0017 00-3/4 blank

TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0018 00
NSN 1550-01-538-9256 EIC: 60C
BATTERY CHARGING PROCEDURE LRIP> .
INITIAL SETUP:
Materials/Parts
RQ-11B SUAS (1)

BATTERY CHARGING PROCEDURE LRIP> .
The RQ-11B System is provided with a DC AV Battery Charger, an AC AV Battery Charger, and a GCS battery charger
with NATO slave cable. Through attrition these battery chargers will be replaced with Universal Battery Chargers
(UBC). For information regarding the UBC refer to WP 0019 00.
AC/DC AV Battery Charging Procedure
The AC and DC versions of the charger function in the same manner and are capable of charging two AV batteries si-
multaneously. It takes approx. 1-2 hours to fully charge two AV batteries. The charger uses a micro-controller to control
and protect against overcharging, overheating, and unbalanced charging. The micro controller will allow a reasonable
threshold voltage difference between the cells.
The chargers have indicator lights for each battery charge cable. Charger indications are listed in Table 1.
1. Battery Charger
2. Battery Charger Cables
3. AC Plug
Figure 1. AC Battery Charger.
0018 00-1
0018 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
LRIP> .
1. Battery Charger
2. Batteries/Charger Cables
3. NATO Adapter Cable
Figure 2. DC Battery Charger.
Table 1. AV Battery Charger Indications.
Charge Indicator Color Meaning

FAULT RED No battery or damaged battery.
CHARGE flashing ORANGE Evaluating battery.
CHARGE ORANGE Charging battery.
CHARGE with FAULT flashing ORANGE with RED flashing Battery is too hot. Charging paused.
FAULT after CHARGE RED Charging error.
READY GREEN Battery is charged.
0018 00-2
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0018 00
LRIP> .
WARNING
If battery is very hot or battery case exhibits bulging, battery should be removed from charger
and placed in open location. Battery should not be used again and must be disposed of in
accordance with (IAW) Service procedures. Use of defective batteries may result in injury to
personnel.
WARNING
The battery contact on the end of the battery is active at all times. Use low residue tape, gaffer’s
tape or battery cap cover to cover the contact when not installed in AV. Care must be taken not
to short across the contacts. This could result in injury to personnel.
CAUTION
The red FAULT indicator will light if the battery has a fault. This can happen if the fuse has blown,
cells become unbalanced, or the battery gets too hot during charge. If fuse has blown, replace
fuse per WP 0054 00. If a fault condition persists, the battery should not be used and should be
disposed of IAW service procedures.
To charge batteries, follow these procedures:
1. Open charger case and stand it upright, cooling fins should be vertical during charging for optimum cooling.
Charger will get warm under normal operating conditions.
2. Plug charger into power source. Both red FAULT charge indicators should illuminate, indicating charger has
power but no batteries are plugged in.
a. If using HMMWV power source, plug NATO Adapter Cable into 24V power socket under front
passenger seat.
b. If using AC charger, plug charger into outlet.
3. Plug charger cable into battery charge jack on side of battery. Orange CHARGE light will initially flash for 5
seconds while determining charge state.
4. Charger will indicate one of states shown in Table 1.
5. Charging can take up to 1-2 hours if battery is completely expended.
6. Remove battery from charger when green READY light indicates battery is fully charged.
GCS BATTERY CHARGE PROCEDURE
Using Battery Charger PP-8498/U, charge GCS batteries IAW manufacturers manual BTD-960002.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0018 00-3/4 blank

TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0019 00
NSN 1550-01-538-9256 EIC: 60C
BATTERY CHARGING PROCEDURE FRP> .
INITIAL SETUP:
Materials/Parts
RQ-11B SUAS (1)

UNIVERSAL BATTERY CHARGING PROCEDURE
System Components
The Universal Battery Charger is supplied with the following accessories:
• AC Cable (1 each)
• DC Cable (1 each)
• 12 VDC Power Adapter (1 each)
• Alligator Clip Adapter (1 pair)
• NATO Adapter (1 each)
• GCS Battery Adapter (2 each)
• 15 Amp Fuse

The lid of the unit houses the DC Cable, NATO Adapter and GCS Adapters behind a transparent cover. The DC cord is
wrapped around the four corner posts for storage. The transparent cover secures these accessories in place. The two
pin DC connector is for the DC input cable and can be connected to the Alligator Clips Adapter, 12 VDC Power Adapter
or the NATO Adapter. The base of the charger also includes the AC receptacle for the AC cable, DC input receptacle,
15 Amp fuse, spare fuse, and status indicators. The 12 VDC Power and Alligator Clip Adapters are located in the initial
spares package.
The base side of the unit accommodates the battery charger, two output DC cables and the DC input cable. These out-
put cables are permanently fixed to the battery charger and for storage are routed around the heat sink.
0019 00-1
0019 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
WARNING
If battery is very hot or battery case exhibits bulging, battery should be removed from charger
and placed in open location. Battery should not be used again and must be disposed of in
accordance with (IAW) Service procedures. Use of defective batteries may result in injury to
personnel.
WARNING
The battery contact on the end of the battery is active at all times. Use low residue tape, gaffer’s
tape or battery cap cover to cover the contact when not installed in AV. Care must be taken not
to short across the contacts. This could result in injury to personnel.
CAUTION
The red FAULT indicator will light if the battery has a fault. This can happen if the fuse has blown,
cells become unbalanced, or the battery gets too hot during charge. If fuse has blown, replace
fuse per WP 0054 00. If a fault condition persists, the battery should not be used and should be
disposed of IAW service procedures.
Status Indicators
The Universal Battery charger status lights indicate if a fault has been detected or charging status and Status of Charge
(SOC) percentage for each battery connected to the charger. See Figure 2.
Figure 2. Status of Charge Indicators.
0019 00-2
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0019 00
Charging
WARNING
Do not touch the heat sink during operation as it will become very hot. Failure to comply can
result in injury.
NOTE
Placing the Universal Battery Charger in an upright position as shown in Figure 3 provides for
faster charging.
NOTE
Charging rate is reduced to 100 watts when powered from a 12 VDC source to prevent blown
fuses in automobiles.
NOTE
Charging rate is reduced when the battery temperature is above 40°C.
NOTE
The normal charging cycle is approximately 90 minutes. However if two deeply discharged
batteries are charged at the same time, if the battery is hot or battery is severely out of balance,
charging times will be increased.
Charging AV Batteries
1. Open case and place Battery Charger in position shown in Figure 3. This heat sink orientation provides most
efficient use of input power and charges batteries in least amount of time.
2. Connect either AC or DC input cable to power source and battery charger. When powering up charger a lamp
test is performed. If any LED does not light up for one second during power-up. Refer to next higher level of
maintenance.
CAUTION
Ensure connector is positioned properly. Forcing charge connector in the wrong way will
permanently damage charge connector.
3. Connect AV batteries to output cables on charger.
4. Monitor LEDs for SOC. The charging LEDs flash to indicate current SOC.
0019 00-3
0019 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
5. Disconnect battery when fully charged. When the 100% SOC LED is flashing during charge, the battery is
near fully charged and is ready for use. The last 5% of charge is when the final balancing will occur and can
take between 30 and 60 minutes to complete. The charger is designed to accurately measure the SOC of AV
batteries to within 10%.
Figure 3. AV Battery Charging.
Charging GCS Batteries
1. Open case and place Universal Battery Charger in position shown in Figure 3. This heat sink orientation
provides most efficient use of input power and charges batteries in least amount of time.
2. Connect either AC or DC input cable to power source and battery charger. When powering up battery
charger, a lamp test is performed. If any LED does not light up for one second during power-up. Refer to next
higher level of maintenance.
3. Connect GCS Adapter(s) to output cable on battery charger.
NOTE
The GCS adapter is designed to sense chemistry of battery and charge accordingly. Auto-
sensing prevents charging of non-rechargeable batteries.
4. Connect GCS Adapter to battery.
0019 00-4
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0019 00
CAUTION
Do not leave adapter plugged in to the GCS batteries when not actively charging as this will
discharge batteries and could cause damage to adapter.
NOTE
The Ni-MH BB390 battery should be periodically left on battery charger overnight (12 hours) for
charge equalization to occur. At times, Ni-MH battery may indicate “fully charged” by battery
charger, but not by battery. This error is due to inaccuracies of measurement of SOC or if battery
is hot.
5. Monitor LEDs for SOC. The charging LEDs flash to indicate current SOC. As the SOCs near 100% it is normal
for charging current to be reduced dramatically; the charger indicates extended charge times by flashing
the charge LED at slower rate than normal when the SOC is 75% or below. Charge is complete when the
charging LED is off and the SOC indicates 100%.
6. Disconnect battery when fully charged. If left plugged into charger, battery charger will automatically keep
GCS battery fully charged.
Figure 4. Universal Battery Charger, GCS Adapters and GCS Batteries.
0019 00-5
0019 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
Table 1. GCS Battery Charge Times.
Battery Expected Charge Time

Li-Ion BB2590/U < 2 Hours
Li-Ion BB2557/U < 2 Hours
Ni-MH BB390B/U < 2 Hours
Ni-Cd BB-557/U < 1 Hours
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0019 00-6
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0020 00
NSN 1550-01-538-9256 EIC: 60C
FALCONVIEW AND THE RPUAV TOOL LRIP> .
INITIAL SETUP:
Equipment Condition
RSTA Assembled (WP 0071 00)
Hub Assembled (WP 0010 00)
RPUAV TOOL FOR FALCONVIEW LRIP> .
CAUTION
Software will not be added, deleted or upgraded by the user. The RSTA laptop is provided for
flight control so any changes may effect safe operation.
NOTE
RPUAV tool is an add-on tool, issued only with SUAS RSTA Systems.
Mission Operator functions of the SUAS (RQ-11B) system may be performed using the RPUAV Tool in FalconView.
The RSTA laptop will have FalconView software and the RPUAV Tool pre-installed. The tool enhances the basic ca-
pabilities of FalconView by providing an AV interface for :
• Managing Mission Plan waypoint information and Loss of Link settings.

• Connecting to the GCS in order to perform Mission Operator functions.
• Allowing mission overlays to be shown graphically on map displays.
• Providing Digital Terrain Elevation Data (DTED) for the mission area.
• Providing mission review capabilities for data analysis.
Opening the RPUAV Tool.

The RPUAV tool can be opened from the FalconView “Tools” pull-down menu or by using the icon found on the Fal-
conView Editor Toggle Toolbar accessed from the “View” pull-down menu. When the Editor Toggle Toolbar is checked
on the View pull-down menu, this toolbar will show automatically whenever FalconView is opened. All functions of the
RPUAV tool can be controlled with clicks and drags using the touch screen or keypad. The keyboard is used in some
screen displays to enter or edit information (the shift key is required to enter alpha characters S and Z.
Grid Coordinate Format
The coordinate format displayed in the lower right corner of the FalconView Main Map Display, and in the RPUAV Tools
Mission management Screen and Mission Replay .jpg files is dictated by the coordinate format chosen in FalconView.
To change the format, press "CTRL-F", click on the FalconView Options Drop-down Menu and then choose Coordi-
nate Format or place cursor over the coordinate data in the lower right hand corner of FalconView and double left click.
Available options include latitude/longitude, Military Grid Reference System (MGRS) or Universal Transverse Merca-
tor (UTM) Grid formats.
FALCONVIEW SETUP LRIP> .
1. Ensure that “Main”, “Status”, and “Editor Toggle” toolbars are checked on the “View” pull-down menu.
2. Press CTRL+F to select the appropriate coordinate format (ensure cursor is on the Main Map Window).
0020 00-1
0020 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
FALCONVIEW SETUP LRIP> . - CONTINUED

NOTE
FalconView Help Menu can provide in-depth information on loading maps and all other aspects
of the program.
Prior to using FalconView, DTED Level 1 (100 meter) map coverage for the entire mission area and any maps or satel-
lite imagery to be used for the mission should be loaded.
FalconView Map Data
Map data is stored on the RSTA Laptop at C:\PFPS\falcon\data. Updates to maps can be obtained from the unit’s S2
or other sources. Use Map Data Manager to show, copy and delete map data on the RSTA Laptop.
Loading FalconView Maps:
1. Connect Map Source Data to the USB drive.
2. Open FalconView.
3. Scale Out – to view area of interest
4. Press Ctr+ M – (opens Map Data Manager)
5. In the Map Data Manager window, select the Paths dialog. Ensure the path to the map data source is
displayed or use the following procedure to select any local path as an additional source of map data.
a. Click Add.
b. Browse, find, and highlight the path to the drive that contains map data. Click Add and OK. Ensure
the path to the Map Data is displayed in the Paths dialog of the Map Data Manager Window
6. Ensure the Target data path in the Paths dialog of the Map Data Manager Window is set to C:\PFPS\fal-
con\data.
7. Go to the Multiple dialog and click “SHOW ALL”.
NOTE
Green shading indicates map data already loaded on C:\PFPS\falcon\data.
Red shading indicates map data on other paths.
8. Click and drag a box over the red-shaded maps that are required for the mission.
NOTE
Light Green shading indicates maps that are selected for deletion.
Pink shading indicates maps that are selected to be copied.
NOTE
If both Red and Green maps are selected, the Ambiguous Map Selection window that appears
will ask you to:
• “Select red for copying to the target data path” or,
• “Select green for removal from the target data path”.
9. Select “red for copying...”, and click “OK”.

10. Click the “Copy” button on the Multiple dialog of the Map Data Manager.
11. When the map copy is complete, exit Map Data Manager.
0020 00-2
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0020 00
FALCONVIEW SETUP LRIP> . - CONTINUED

RPUAV TOOLBAR SETUP
The software configuration is preset prior to delivery. If the software configuration must be reset, the RPUAV Options
window is used to configure the settings. Configure the software using the steps below:
1. Launch FalconView and open the RPUAV Toolbar from the “Tools” pull-down menu.
2. Click the bottom icon on the RPUAV toolbar to access the RPUAV Options window.
3. On the RPUAV Options window, select the “Config” tab.
4. Ensure the COM Port is set to “Ethernet”.
5. Select the “Hub” tab, on the RPUAV Options window.
6. Set the Remote Host IP Address to “192.168.1.1” and click "update".
7. Set the UDP Send port to “5000” and click "update".
8. Set the UDP Receive port to “5001” and click "update".
9. Close the RPUAV Options window.
FALCONVIEW AND RPUAV TOOL OPERATION LRIP> .
Establish Communications between the RSTA laptop and the GCS using the following steps:
1. Power up a GCS and connect the Ethernet cable between the GCS laptop port and the Ethernet port of the
RSTA laptop.
2. Turn on the RSTA laptop and allow Windows to boot up completely.
3. Open FalconView.
NOTE
Click “OK” on the DAFIF data warning banner. Do not use DAFIF information unless the data is
up to date.
4. Display desired mission area on FalconView Main Map Display.

5. Open “RPUAV Toolbar” from the “Tools” pull-down menu. Alternatively, click the “RPUAV” icon.
6. Click the top icon on the RPUAV Toolbar. This Connects/Disconnects Serial Communications Button is used
to open the serial port and connect to the GCS Hub.
Mission Area Selection
Use the FalconView map view tools to zoom and pan until the area of interest for mission operation is centered on the
screen. Select an adequate area larger than the area of interest as a safety buffer.
CAUTION
Missions outside DTED coverage increases risk of mission failure or loss of AV.
The RPUAV tool uses FalconView DTED to safely plan mission altitudes. If DTED is unavailable, the RPUAV Tool
will use 0 ft MSL as the terrain altitude for all positions outside of DTED coverage. Loading DTED is discussed under
RPUAV Options Tab.
Mission Status Overlay
Once the RPUAV toolbar has been opened, a text overlay providing data on the GCS and AV (Figure 1) will appear in
the lower left corner of the FalconView Main Map Display. Before communication is established with the GCS, the “Ser
Port” status will read: CLOSED and all other mission status text overlay readings will show their default values. After
0020 00-3
0020 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
FALCONVIEW AND RPUAV TOOL OPERATION LRIP> . - CONTINUED
communication with an AV is established, the mission text status overlay will reflect the current AV status. Table 1 de-
tails the data found in the Mission Status Overlay.
Figure 1. Mission Status Overlay.
Table 1. Mission Status Overlay Fields.
Field Explanation
Range->”Home” Distance in kilometers between the AV and “Home” or other currently selected waypoints.
UAV Mode Current mode of operation (MAN, NAV, etc.).
Wind Spd Wind speed in knots.
Link Qlt Link quality between GCS and AV (0-100%).
Flt Time Time (minutes) AV has been flying.
UAV Batt AV battery voltage.
GCU Batt GCS/RVT battery voltage.
Ser Port Status of serial port (CLOSED, OPEN, REPLAY).

UAV Alt Altitude of AV in feet MSL.
Wind Dir Wind direction in magnetic degrees.

Range Distance in kilometers from Home Waypoint to AV.
Bearing Direction from the Home Waypoint and to the AV.
GPS Sats Number of engaged satellites and lock status .
Gnd Speed Ground speed of AV in knots.
Rally Mode LOL mode for AV.
Rally Alt Altitude setting for LOL.
Connect/Disconnect Serial Communications (Open/Close Network Port)
Connect/Disconnect Serial Communications

This button is used to connect/disconnect communications between the RSTA laptop and the GCS hub. The RPUAV
tool is preset for use with the RSTA laptop. The GCS communicates with the FalconView program on the RSTA laptop
only through the Ethernet port. After all cable connections are made and the GCS is turned on, clicking this button will
0020 00-4
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0020 00

toggle the communications port open and closed. A message in the middle of the screen will indicate that the port is be-
ing opened.
When the serial comms are lost, close the network port before re-establishing LAN connection. If the LAN connection is
interrupted, and the RPUAV tool “Fails To Open The Network Port”, the FalconView program must be restarted to re-es-
tablish the connection.
Mission Management Screen (Figure 4)

Accessed with the Mission Management Button, this screen allows mission waypoint coordinates, altitudes, and set-
tings to be entered, edited, saved and used as a Mission Profile. There are distinct steps to building a mission plan,
saving a Mission Profile, using a Mission Profile loading the mission Profile to the GCS and sending a Mission Profile
to the AV. Depending on the communications between the RPUAV tool and the AV, these steps can be transparent.
Figure 2. Steps In Creating Mission Profile.

When the RPUAV tool is connected to the GCS, the RSTA laptop performs functions of the Mission Controller, includ-
ing editing mission waypoints. If waypoints are changed in a mission profile on the Mission Management Screen when
communications are established with the GCS, those coordinates will overwrite existing mission coordinates in the
GCS hub.
CAUTION
Selecting Map center or UAV Origin will overwrite existing data in the GCS. Caution must be
exercised when using these functions while AV is in flight. This could result in loss of AV if
new coordinates are outside the range limit of the system or altitude entered does not provide
adequate obstruction clearance.
Map Center
Clicking the Map Center Button creates a new RPUAV Mission Profile at the center of the map currently displayed
and closes the Mission Management Screen. Once the map-centered mission is displayed, the Mission Operator can
move the waypoints by clicking and dragging to a desired location or by re-opening the Mission Management Screen
and manually changing the coordinates. Figure 3 illustrates a map-centered mission.
UAV Origin
If the GPS receiver has locked onto signals and fixed the AV’s point of origin, the UAV Origin button will set the GPS ori-
gin as the Home Waypoint, and arrange Waypoints A-D in a default 500 meter diamond pattern around the origin. This
button is not active unless the AV has a GPS lock and the GCS is communicating with the RPUAV tool. The GPS ac-
quisition location is indicated on the map as a yellow “+” sign.
UAV Mission
If communication is established with AV that already has a mission loaded into it (as when a handoff between GCS
controllers occurs) the mission can be extracted from that AV into the GCS. As with the UAV Origin Button, this will only
work if the AV is communicating properly with the RPUAV tool and the AV has a mission already loaded.
0020 00-5
0020 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
Open
This button allows the Mission Operator to select and open a previously saved mission. Mission files are found in
C:/Program Files/ RPUAV/Missions with a .smd file extension. This is the default folder for storing mission files.
Once a valid RPUAV mission profile is selected, the mission waypoints appear in green on the main map display.
Figure 3. Map-centered Mission.
0020 00-6
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0020 00
Figure 4. Mission Management Screen.
CAUTION
Home waypoint is not dependent on the location of the GCS. Range and Bearing to the AV is
derived from the Home waypoint coordinates, not from the GCS location. Use caution when
loading missions, and verify the coordinates of the Home Waypoint.
Home
The Home Waypoint (H) is the location used to reference range and bearing to the AV. The altitude for H is set according
to the Safe Altitude Buffer setting above the maximum DTED value in a 300m x 300m box centered over the waypoint.
If H is not entered when the AV is in communication with the GCS and has a GPS lock, the Home Waypoint will default
to the place of origin, the location where the AV acquires GPS. H can be manually entered at any time, or moved when
a new mission is loaded.
0020 00-7
0020 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P

Waypoint E
Waypoint E marks the beginning of the final approach to landing. The default location for Waypoint E is 500 m north-
east of H. Whenever the AV is directed to fly to E, after crossing the E waypoint it will then fly and land at L.
In NAV mode, when the flight loop time expires the aircraft will complete the current NAV loop (ending at D), proceed to
E, and land at L. The AV can also be redirected to E at any time to initiate the approach to landing sequence.
If LOL is set to Rally or Finish Flight (with the AV not in NAV mode) and link is lost, the AV will fly directly to E at the cho-
sen rally altitude. A message on the Hand Controller(s) and in the top left of the Main Map Display will read “EN ROUTE
RALLY” when this is occurring.
Land/Rally (L) Waypoint
The Landing Waypoint (L) will default 20m to the east of the Home Waypoint location at 0 feet AGL, but can be changed
by the Mission Operator. (Consideration should be given to terrain along the E to L approach path). The altitude on the
Final Approach Course (E to L) will be the altitude setting at waypoint E. No consideration is made for height of the ter-
rain on the Final Approach to landing.
Mission Waypoints (A-D)
These waypoints represent a navigation loop. The AV will pursue an A->B->C->D->A, etc. flight path until it is redi-
rected or the flight time exceeds the flight loop time setting. Waypoints A-D are displayed in green unless their altitude
has been below the Altitude Safety Warning value, in which case they will display in red. The default configuration for
these waypoints is set around H in a diamond pattern at 500m due north, south, east and west. The altitude for the
navigation loop will be set at the Safe Altitude Buffer Setting above the highest DTED point on the entire flight path,
including waypoint E.
Orbit Waypoints (1-3)
Each mission is allocated three orbit waypoints that may be used to designate specific points of interest and can be
moved as required. The orbit waypoints are not part of a navigation cycle. In the Nav mode the AV must be redirected
to an orbit waypoint. The radius of the orbit over an orbit waypoint is determined by the AV altitude, assuring the objec-
tive remains in sight regardless of adjustments in altitude. The orbit waypoints are designed for use with a side-look
camera, but forward-look may be used as well. The default location for the orbit waypoints in a diamond default con-
figuration is 500 m east of Waypoint D (O-2), and 500 m north (O-1) and south (O-3) of Waypoint O-2. When the AV is
in orbit and the flight cycle time expires, the AV will exit the orbit, proceed to E and then land at L.
Adjusting Waypoint Locations
Waypoints can be moved by clicking and dragging to new locations on the Main Map display or by manually entering
coordinates into the waypoint fields on the Mission Management screen. While being dragged, a green “X” will appear
in the Main Map Display to indicate the new coordinate location. Upon release, the new position will be immediately up-
dated and the green circle will move to the new waypoint position. If the “Auto Update Waypoint Altitudes” feature is on,
the waypoint altitudes will be updated to safe values (See Mission Altitude Control Screen). Otherwise, the waypoints
and flight path lines are displayed in green if their altitudes are above the safe altitude warning setting (set in the RPUAV
Options Config Tab, See Figure 14). Flight paths or waypoint altitudes that breach the safe altitude warning value will
display in red.
The RPUAV tool draws the AV’s current Mission Profile waypoint locations position in purple, and the new mission
waypoint positions in green. If the AV receives the new waypoint position(s) properly, the current (purple) mission way-
points will disappear and only the green rings will be visible. If waypoint positions are not the same (due to radio delays
or loss of link), then both sets of rings (purple and green) will be visible as shown in Figure 11.
Rally Altitude
The rally altitude is a single, safe altitude used for flying from any point in the mission to Waypoint E in the event of Loss
of Link. This altitude setting is used to avoid terrain and obstacles over the entire mission range. If set properly, the
Rally Altitude assures that regardless of the AV’s location, it is commanded to fly above terrain features and obstacles
within that area. The Rally Altitude provides a buffer above the highest DTED point within a rectangle that extends 500
m north, south, east and west of the northernmost, southernmost, easternmost and westernmost waypoint or Orbit
0020 00-8
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0020 00
points see Figure 5. On initial issue, the RPUAV tool Safe Altitude Buffer is preset at 300 ft. This default setting can be
changed by the operator on the Config Tab of the RPUAV Options Window. The Rally Altitude for each mission can be
adjusted in the in the Mission Management screen or the Mission Altitude Control screen.
CAUTION
Figure 5. Safe Rally Altitude Area.
0020 00-9
0020 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
Flight Loop Time
CAUTION
Setting the flight loop time beyond the battery life could result in loss of or damage to the AV. At
initial issue, Flight Loop Time is set at 360 min to avoid limiting mission endurance.
NOTE
Flight Loop Time is synonymous with Loop Time Out on the GCS LOL Sub-menu.
When in NAV mode, the flight loop time setting determines when the AV will conclude its final NAV loop at D, proceed to
E, and then land at L. When set at 0 minutes, the AV will only complete one navigation loop before proceeding to E and
then landing at L. This is typically used as a safety backup so that the AV is not commanded to fly beyond the life of the
battery. The flight time always begins at launch.
The flight loop time can also be set in the Mission Altitude Control Screen. Setting the flight loop time from either screen
will change the setting on both screens.
Loss of Link Setting
This menu area allows the Mission Operator to choose a course of action upon Loss of Link (LOL). Default setting for
LOL action is “GO TO RALLY”.
• “Land Now” will cause the AV to go into Autoland immediately upon LOL.
• “FINISH FLIGHT”
NAV mode: the AV will fly the A>B>C>D navigation loop or NAV at an orbit point until flight time reaches flight
loop time. The AV will then NAV from D (or the orbit point) to E, and approach to land at L. All other Modes:
immediately directs the AV to E and then land at L.
• “GO TO RALLY” directs the AV to immediately proceed to E and then land at L.

The LOL action can also be set in the Mission Altitude Control Screen (see Figure 6). Changing this setting from either
screen will change the setting on both screens.
Save, Use, Save As and Cancel
These buttons allow a mission to be saved, used or cancelled. Clicking the “Save Button” will save the mission and as-
sign it a filename according to the convention shown in Figure 6. If a previously saved mission was used to create a
new mission, clicking the “Save Button” will overwrite the original mission. Use the “Save As Button” when saving a new
mission with a new filename. The Use button allows a mission that has been edited to be used without saving it. The
“Cancel Button” exits the Mission Management Screen without saving any settings.
Figure 6. Default Mission Filename Convention.
0020 00-10
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0020 00

Mission Altitude Control Screen
The Mission Altitude Control Button will bring up the Mission Altitude Control Screen (Figure 7). This screen al-
lows the Mission Operator to set altitudes for each of the waypoints. Like the Mission Management screen, the Mission
Altitude Control screen allows the flight loop time, LOL action and rally altitude to be set. Once all the settings are set
according to the mission plan, close the window to accept all settings.
Figure 7. Mission Altitude Control Screen.

Waypoint Altitudes
The altitude of each waypoint in the Mission Altitude Control Screen is indicated by a diamond. When creating a new
mission, the altitude for Waypoints A-E is set according to the Safe Altitude Buffer setting in the RPUAV Options Config
tab in feet (AGL) above the highest point on the entire flight path. The altitude for H and O waypoints apply this altitude
setting above the maximum DTED value in a 600m x 600m box centered over the waypoint. The altitude on the Final
Approach Course (E to L) will be the altitude setting at waypoint E. No consideration is made for height of the terrain on
the Final Approach to landing. The L Waypoint defaults to 0 AGL and must be adjusted to safe landing altitude.
A waypoint altitude is adjusted by clicking and holding a blue diamond and sliding it up or down. The new MSL altitude
will be displayed just over the diamond and the AGL altitude will be displayed in the lower right corner of the screen.
When the Auto Update Waypoint Altitudes option is selected, altitudes for all waypoints are automatically updated, only
if waypoint is moved (See Figure 14).
Rally Altitude
Rally Altitude for the mission is set according to the Safe Altitude Buffer setting on the Config Tab of the RPUAV Options
Window. The Rally Altitude can be adjusted in either the Mission Management Screen (Figure 4) or the Mission Altitude
Control screen. Setting the rally altitude from either screen will change the setting on both screens.
Loop Time Setting
This setting can be set in either the Mission Management Screen (Figure 4) or Mission Altitude Control Screens. Set-
ting the flight loop time from either screen will change the setting on both screens.
This setting can be set in either the Mission Management Screen (Figure 4) or Mission Altitude Control Screens. Set-
ting the LOL action from either screen will change the setting on both screens. The RPUAV Tool default LOL setting is
"GO TO RALLY"
0020 00-11
0020 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
Show Loss Of Link Data Checkbox

Checking this box activates a scan for altitudes that the AV must remain above in order not to lose link with the GCS
at the Home Waypoint. (This assumes that the GCS is located at H.) When checked, a second elevation projection is
shown in addition to the ground elevations in the altitude charts. This projection indicates the portion of the flight path
along which LOL should be expected to occur if the AV is below the LOL Altitude displayed. The LOL projection is drawn
in red. If there is no line of sight obstructions between the AV flight track and the Home Waypoint, nothing is drawn.
Figure 8. LOL Altitude Display on Mission Altitude Control Screen.

Reroute Buttons
These buttons are used to redirect the AV to the waypoint of choice when in NAV mode. For example, if the AV is navi-
gating from point B to point C, and the A button is pressed, the AV will immediately reroute to A as its current target way-
point. When the E button is pressed, the AV will fly to E and immediately enter a landing pattern to L.
Mission Operation
Once a mission is created, the user can manipulate the mission components. The main map displays the mission com-
ponents using different colors and symbols.
Table 2. Mission Map Symbols.
Mission Element Symbol Description

AV Yellow plus sign - AV GPS point of origin.
Yellow chevron - current AV position.
Yellow X - camera center field of view.
Waypoint Green circle - waypoint is at a safe altitude.

Green circle - current waypoint if no purple lines are visible.
Green circle - proposed waypoint if purple lines are visible.
Red circle - waypoint at altitude below Altitude Safety Warning.
Purple circle - current waypoint until new green waypoint is accepted by AV.
0020 00-12
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0020 00
Table 2. Mission Map Symbols. – Continued

Flight Path Green line - flight path is at a safe altitude.
Green line - current flight path if no purple lines are visible.
Green line - proposed flight path if purple lines are visible.
Red line - flight path below the safe altitude warning.
Purple line - current flight path until new green flight path is accepted by AV.
AV Icons
Information relative to the AV’s origin, position or view is displayed in yellow. The chevron indicating the current AV lo-
cation will only appear once the AV has locked GPS. If the GPS in the AV is not locked, the position is not updated. Upon
LOL, the AV icon will freeze at its last known position on the display. See Figure 9.
Figure 9. AV Location Symbols.
0020 00-13
0020 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
Waypoints
The waypoints can be dragged to any location while the live mission is being displayed (not during the mission replay
mode). While being dragged, a green “X” will appear to indicate where it is being moved see Figure 10. Upon release,
the new position will be immediately updated and the green circle will move over the modified waypoint position. If the
“Auto Update Waypoint Altitudes” feature is on, the waypoint altitudes will be updated to safe values.
Figure 10. Moving a Waypoint.

While communicating with the AV, there is always an inherent delay in updating waypoint positions. The tool will draw
the AV’s waypoint positions in purple, and the mission waypoint positions in green. If the AV receives the new waypoint
position properly, only the green rings will be visible. If waypoint positions are not the same (due to issues like link radio
delays or radio problems) then both sets of rings (purple and green) will be visible as shown in Figure 11.
0020 00-14
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0020 00
Figure 11. Waypoint Coordinate Update.

Mission Replay Button
The Mission Replay Button opens the Mission Replay Screen (Figure 12) in order to review mission events
(screen captures) and create .jpg images of the event. Mission events must first be downloaded from the hub and
stored on the computer hard drive in the C:\RPUAV_Logs folder. Downloading (File Transfer) instructions are provided
under RPUAV Options Hub Tab. Images are stored in the C:\RPUAV_Logs folder as National Imagery Transmission
Format (NITF) files with a .ntf file extension. These files include both an image and text data relevant to the captured
image. This is a national standard developed for exchange of digital imagery among members of the Intelligence
Community.
0020 00-15
0020 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
Image Selection
The Image Selector Slider is located just beneath the image in the Mission Replay Screen. When a mission
event/screen capture is selected using the slider, the filename is displayed at the bottom of the Mission Replay Screen
and the mission parameters associated with the are shown in the Main Map Display.
Figure 12. Mission Replay Screen.

A yellow warning (“Displaying Recorded Mission Data; Close Replay Window For Live Mission”) will appear and blink
intermittently on the FalconView Main Map Display screen, indicating that the map display is not live and cannot be ma-
nipulated.
Save As .JPG
Clicking this button allows the image to be saved as a .jpg file into the C:\RPUAV_Logs folder. The image will include
relevant data from the screen capture above and below the picture. AV and CFOV locations will appear in the co-
ordinate format (MGRS, UTM or LAT/LONG) that is currently selected in FalconView. To change the format, press
“CTRL-F” or click on the FalconView “Options” drop down menu and then choose Coordinate Format. The base file-
name will be the same as the .ntf file that was the source of the image and data. See Figure 13.
0020 00-16
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0020 00
Figure 13. .JPG Captured Image.
0020 00-17
0020 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
Config Tab
The Config Tab is used to view and adjust the default settings in the RPUAV Tool. Figure 14 shows the Config Tab and
Table 3 details the functions.
Figure 14. Config Tab.
0020 00-18
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0020 00
Table 3. Config Tab Elements.
Field Explanation
Serial Port Settings: COM The default selection is Ethernet and is chosen when using an Ethernet cable. If a
Port serial connection is being made, choose the appropriate COM port.
Serial Port Settings: Baud The default setting is 9600. The drop-down menu displays additional choices to be
Rate used when the serial port setting is not Ethernet.
Altitude Settings: Safe This is the altitude (in feet AGL) each of the waypoints is commanded to when a
Altitude Buffer waypoint is dragged and the “Auto Update Waypoint Altitudes” option is checked
(see below). This can be adjusted between 0 and 1,000 ft. AGL. The default is 300
ft. AGL.
Altitude Settings: Altitude This setting is used to alert the user when an altitude below the setting is included in
Safety Warning the programmed flight path. At initial issue, the default setting is at 100 ft. AGL. Once
the default value is altered, the setting will remain changed even when the computer
is rebooted. An altitude setting below the safe altitude is indicated on the flight path
in the Main Map Screen by a dashed red line. A waypoint altitude setting below the
safe altitude is indicated by the waypoint displayed in red. This feature is especially
useful when the “Auto Update Waypoint Altitudes” feature is turned off. If it is turned
off and a waypoint is dragged over higher elevation, there is a danger of the AV hitting
the ground. The warning alerts the user before the AV is endangered.
Waypoint Altitudes Update: This feature allows the tool to automatically compute safe altitudes for all waypoints
Auto Update Waypoint and when any waypoint is moved. This assures that altitude commands remain safe as
Rally Altitudes waypoints are modified. When this feature is enabled and a waypoint is changed, all
of the waypoint segments are searched for the highest DTED elevation. This highest
elevation is added to the Safe Altitude Buffer and becomes the new altitude for all
waypoints.
GPS Key Tab
CAUTION
Clicking the Zeroize GPS Key will cause the GPS to stop functioning in the secure mode
until reprogrammed with a good key and may render the GPS unusable until the next system
power-up.
The GPS Key Tab (Figure 15) provides information on the GPS key status. One of eight key status codes in Table 4 will
be displayed in the status field. From this tab, it is also possible to zeroize the GPS security key. This is useful when the
risk of losing an AV with a security-enabled GPS is high and the GPS security must be disabled. Click on the Zeroize
GPS Key Only button to zeroize the GPS key.
0020 00-19
0020 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
Figure 15. GPS Key Tab.
Table 4. GPS Key Status Codes.
Code Explanation
??? Key Status Unknown

0 Not Keyed
1 Keyed with CVw*, but not for today
2 Keyed and Verified (GUV* or CVw)
3 Keyed with CVw or GUV, failed CV cert
4 Keyed with GUV, data not collected yet
5 Not Keyed (response to zeroize command)
6 Key status unknown, Zeroize failed
7 Key loaded
* Crypto Variable Weekly

* Group Unique Variable
0020 00-20
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0020 00
GPS Status Tab

The GPS Status Tab (Figure 16) displays the GPS data being sent from the AV, such as satellite status, date, time, AV
position in GPS (Lat/Long) format, speed, altitude (in Meters) and course (referenced to True North). This is an infor-
mation-only tab; the data may not be adjusted by the user. When the GPS receiver has acquired a sufficient number
of satellites with adequate signal strength, and fixed the AV’s point of origin, the Fix check block will lock indicating that
the AV position has been defined. After the Fix is locked, the Home waypoint will be set to AV’s point of origin.
Figure 16. GPS Status Tab.
0020 00-21
0020 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
Hub Tab
The Hub Tab (Figure 17) is used to manage NITF mission capture files on the GCS Hub and to send DTED to the hub.
It is also used to set the IP address and User Datagram Protocol (UDP) ports of the hub. Elements are explained in
Table 5.
Figure 17. Hub Tab in RPUAV Options Window.
Table 5. Hub Tab Elements.
Element Explanation
Get NITFs from HUB This button is used to initiate the transfer of the NITF mission capture files from the
hub. See Figure 17.
Start DTED Transfer to Hub This button is used to initiate the transfer of DTED for the RSTA laptop’s current
mission from the RSTA laptop to the hub. See Transferring DTED File to the Hub.
Remote Host IP Address By default, this is set to 192.168.1.1. This is the default local IP address of the hub.
If the local IP address of the hub is changed, this Remote Host IP Address must be
changed to match.
0020 00-22
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0020 00
Table 5. Hub Tab Elements. – Continued
Element Explanation
UDP Send Port By default, this is set to 5000. This is the default UDP Send port of the Add-On Tool
and the default UDP Receive port of the hub. If the UDP Receive port of the hub is
changed, this UDP Send Port must be changed to match.
UDP Receive Port By default, this is set to 5001. This is the default UDP Receive port of the Add-On
Tool and the default UDP Send port of the hub. If the UDP Send port of the hub is
changed, the UDP Receive Port must be changed to match.
Transferring NITF Files from the Hub

To transfer NITF files from hub, verify the hub is connected to the Ethernet port and use the Connect Serial Commu-
nications Button to open the serial port. Click the Get NITFs From Hub Button, see Figure 17. The transfer will begin,
the message “Getting NITFs” will be displayed at the bottom of the Transfer NITF Files from Hub window, and each
NITF image will be shown as it is transferred. When the transfer is complete, the message on the window will change
to “Done getting NITFs.” Click the OK button to close the window.
Deleting NITF Files on the Hub
Click the Delete NITFs button to enable deletion of mission events/screen captures that are stored on the hub.
1. Click the Delete NITFs button to enable deletion of mission events/screen captures that are stored on the hub.
2. NITFs can also be deleted from the hub by going to the Hub Submenu on the hand controller and selecting delete
all captured images.
Transferring DTED File to the Hub
This feature is used to transfer DTED for the mission area to the GCS Hub. The Hub will hold DTED for a 2500 square
kilometer area (50 km x 50 km). If a valid mission is loaded when DTED transfer process begins, the display will center
on the Home coordinate of the mission and zoom to a map scale that can show the entire DTED area. If a mission is not
loaded, the DTED Transfer area will center on the Main Map Display.
When the Start DTED Transfer button is clicked, the user is prompted to review the coverage area and click the Start
DTED Data Transfer button. The Main Map Display will be restored to its previous scale, centered on the DTED area.
The Transfer DTED To Hub window will display the status of the DTED data transfer (Connecting to 192.168.1.1, then
Uploading DTED data, then done). When the transfer is complete, Hub power must be cycled to complete the process.
The steps to transfer DTED are:
1. Center map view around selected location.
2. Select RPUAV options tab.
3. Select Hub tab.
4. Select “Start DTED transfer to Hub” (50 km x 50 km shaded area will be highlighted).
5. Click Start DTED data transfer once file transfer is complete.
6. Disconnect and reconnect the GCS Battery.
7. Verify DTED coverage on hand controller diagnostic screen #2.
Ethernet Hub Settings
Remote Host IP address and UDP Ports are set as shown in Figure 17.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0020 00-23/24 blank

TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0021 00
NSN 1550-01-538-9256 EIC: 60C
FALCONVIEW AND THE RPUAV TOOL FRP> .
INITIAL SETUP:
Equipment Condition
RPUAV TOOL FOR FALCONVIEW
CAUTION
Software will not be added, deleted or upgraded by the user. The RSTA laptop is provided for
flight control so any changes may effect safe operation.
NOTE
RPUAV tool is an add-on tool, issued only with SUAS RSTA Systems.
Mission Operator functions of the SUAS (RQ-11B) system may be performed using the RPUAV Tool in FalconView.
The RSTA laptop will have FalconView software and the RPUAV Tool pre-installed. The tool enhances the basic ca-
pabilities of FalconView by providing an AV interface for :
• Managing Mission Plan waypoint information and Loss of Link settings.

• Connecting to the GCS in order to perform Mission Operator functions.
• Allowing mission overlays to be shown graphically on map displays.
• Providing Digital Terrain Elevation Data (DTED) for the mission area.
• Providing mission review capabilities for data analysis.
Opening the RPUAV Tool.

The RPUAV tool can be opened from the FalconView “Tools” pull-down menu or by using the icon found on the Fal-
conView Editor Toggle Toolbar accessed from the “View” pull-down menu. When the Editor Toggle Toolbar is checked
on the View pull-down menu, this toolbar will show automatically whenever FalconView is opened. All functions of the
RPUAV tool can be controlled with clicks and drags using the touch screen or keypad. The keyboard is used in some
screen displays to enter or edit information (the shift key is required to enter alpha characters S and Z).
Grid Coordinate Format
The coordinate format displayed in the lower right corner of the FalconView Main Map Display, and in the RPUAV Tools
Mission management Screen and Mission Replay .jpg files is dictated by the coordinate format chosen in FalconView.
To change the format, press "CTRL-F" or click on the FalconView Options Drop-down Menu and then choose Coordi-
nate Format or place cursor over the coordinate data in the lower right hand corner of FalconView and double left click.
Available options include latitude/longitude, Military Grid Reference System (MGRS) or Universal Transverse Merca-
tor (UTM) Grid formats.
FALCONVIEW SETUP
1. Ensure that “Main”, “Status”, and “Editor Toggle” toolbars are checked on the “View” pull-down menu.
2. Press CTRL+F to select the appropriate coordinate format (ensure cursor is on the Main Map Window).
0021 00-1
0021 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
FALCONVIEW SETUP - CONTINUED

NOTE
FalconView “Help” Menu can provide in-depth information on loading maps and all other
aspects of the program.
Prior to using FalconView, DTED Level 1 (100 meter) map coverage for the entire mission area and any maps or satel-
lite imagery to be used for the mission should be loaded.
FalconView Map Data
Map data is stored on the RSTA Laptop at C:\PFPS\falcon\data. Updates to maps can be obtained from the unit’s S2
or other sources. Use Map Data Manager to show, copy and delete map data on the RSTA Laptop.
Loading FalconView Maps:
1. Connect Map Source Data to the USB drive.
2. Open FalconView.
3. Scale Out to view area of interest.
4. Press “Ctr+ M” to open Map Data Manager.
5. In the Map Data Manager window, select the Paths dialog. Ensure the path to the map data source is
displayed or use the following procedure to select any local path as an additional source of map data.
a. Click “Add”.
b. Browse, “Find”, and highlight the path to the drive that contains map data. Click “Add” and “OK”.
Ensure the path to the Map Data is displayed in the Paths dialog of the Map Data Manager Window
6. Ensure the Target data path in the Paths dialog of the Map Data Manager Window is set to C:\PFPS\fal-
con\data.
7. Go to the Multiple dialog and click “SHOW ALL”.
NOTE
Green shading indicates map data already loaded on C:\PFPS\falcon\data.
Red shading indicates map data on other paths.
8. Click and drag a box over the red-shaded maps that are required for the mission.
NOTE
Light Green shading indicates maps that are selected for deletion.
Pink shading indicates maps that are selected to be copied.
NOTE
If both Red and Green maps are selected, the Ambiguous Map Selection window that appears
will ask you to:
• “Select red for copying to the target data path” or,
• “Select green for removal from the target data path”.
9. Select “red for copying...”, and click “OK”.

10. Click the “Copy” button on the Multiple dialog of the Map Data Manager.
11. When the map copy is complete, exit Map Data Manager.
0021 00-2
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0021 00
FALCONVIEW SETUP - CONTINUED
RPUAV TOOLBAR SETUP

The software configuration is preset prior to delivery. If the software configuration must be reset, the RPUAV Options
window is used to configure the settings. Configure the software using the steps below:
1. Launch FalconView and open the RPUAV Toolbar from the “Tools” pull-down menu.
2. Click the “RPUAV OPTIONS” icon on the RPUAV toolbar to access the RPUAV Options window.
3. On the RPUAV Options window, select the “Config” tab.
4. Ensure the COM Port is set to “Ethernet”.
5. Select the “Network” tab, on the RPUAV Options window.
6. Set the Remote Host IP Address to “192.168.1.1” and click “SAVE CHANGES”.
7. Set the UDP Send port to “5000” and click “SAVE CHANGES”.
8. Set the UDP Receive port to “5001” and click “SAVE CHANGES”.
9. “Close” the “RPUAV” Options window.
FALCONVIEW AND RPUAV TOOL OPERATION

Establish Communications between the computer and the GCS using the following steps:
1. Power up a GCS and connect the Ethernet cable between the GCS laptop port and the Ethernet port of the
RSTA laptop.
2. Turn on the RSTA laptop and allow Windows to boot up completely.
3. Open FalconView.
NOTE
Click “OK” on the DAFIF data warning banner. Do not use DAFIF information unless the data is
up to date.
4. Display desired mission area on FalconView Main Map Display.

5. Open “RPUAV Toolbar” from the “Tools” pull-down menu. Alternatively, click the “RPUAV” icon.
6. Click the top icon on the RPUAV Toolbar. This Connects/Disconnects Hub Communications Button is used
to open the serial port and connect to the GCS Hub.
Mission Area Selection
Use the FalconView map view tools to zoom and pan until the area of interest for mission operation is centered on the
screen. Select an adequate area larger than the area of interest as a safety buffer.
CAUTION
The RPUAV tool uses FalconView DTED to safely plan mission altitudes. If DTED is unavailable, the RPUAV Tool
will use 0 ft MSL as the terrain altitude for all positions outside of DTED coverage. Loading DTED is discussed under
RPUAV Options Tab.
0021 00-3
0021 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
FALCONVIEW AND RPUAV TOOL OPERATION - CONTINUED
Mission Status Overlay

Once the RPUAV toolbar has been opened, a text overlay providing data on the GCS and AV (Figure 1) will appear in
the lower left corner of the FalconView Main Map Display. Before communication is established with the GCS, the “Ser
Port” status will read: CLOSED and all other mission status text overlay readings will show their default values. After
communication with an AV is established, the mission text status overlay will reflect the current AV status. Table 1 de-
tails the data found in the Mission Status Overlay.
Figure 1. Mission Status Overlay.
Table 1. Mission Status Overlay Fields.
Field Explanation
Range->”Home” Distance in kilometers between the AV and “Home” or other currently selected waypoints.
UAV Mode Current mode of operation (MAN, NAV, etc.).
Wind Spd Wind speed in knots.
Link Qlt Link quality between GCS and AV (0-100%).
Flt Time Time (minutes) AV has been flying.
UAV Batt AV battery voltage.
GCS Batt GCS/RVT battery voltage.
COM Status of serial port (CLOSED, OPEN, REPLAY).

UAV Alt Altitude of AV in feet MSL.
Wind Dir Wind direction.

Range Distance in kilometers from Home Waypoint to AV.
Bearing Direction from the Home Waypoint to the AV.
GPS Sats Number of engaged satellites and lock status .
Gnd Speed Ground speed of AV in knots.
LOL LOL mode for AV.
Rally Alt Altitude setting for LOL.
0021 00-4
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0021 00

Connect/Disconnect Serial Communications (Open/Close Network Port)
Connect/Disconnect Serial Communications

This button is used to connect/disconnect communications between the RSTA laptop and the GCS hub. The RPUAV
tool is preset for use with the RSTA laptop. The GCS communicates with the FalconView program on the RSTA laptop
only through the Ethernet port. After all cable connections are made and the GCS is turned on, clicking this button will
toggle the communications port open and closed. A message in the middle of the screen will indicate that the port is be-
ing opened.
When the serial comms are lost, close the network port before re-establishing LAN connection. If the LAN connection is
interrupted, and the RPUAV tool “Fails To Open The Network Port”, the Falconview program must be restarted to re-es-
tablish the connection.
Mission Management Screen (Figure 4)

Accessed with the Mission Management Button, this screen allows mission waypoint coordinates, altitudes, and set-
tings to be entered, edited, saved and used as a Mission Profile. There are distinct steps to building a mission plan,
saving a Mission Profile, using a Mission Profile loading the mission Profile to the GCS and sending a Mission Profile
to the AV. Depending on the communications between the RPUAV tool and the AV, these steps can be transparent.
Figure 2. Steps In Creating Mission Profile.

When the RPUAV tool is connected to the GCS, the RSTA laptop performs functions of the Mission Controller, includ-
ing editing mission waypoints. If waypoints are changed in a mission profile on the Mission Management Screen when
communications are established with the GCS, those coordinates will overwrite existing mission coordinates in the
GCS hub.
CAUTION
Selecting Map center or UAV Origin will overwrite existing data in the GCS. Caution must be
exercised when using these functions while AV is in flight. This could result in loss of AV if
new coordinates are outside the range limit of the system or altitude entered does not provide
adequate obstruction clearance.
Map Center
Clicking the Map Center Button creates a new RPUAV Mission Profile at the center of the map currently displayed
and closes the Mission Management Screen. Once the map-centered mission is displayed, the Mission Operator can
move the waypoints by clicking and dragging to a desired location or by re-opening the Mission Management Screen
and manually changing the coordinates. Figure 3 illustrates a map-centered mission.
UAV Origin
If the GPS receiver has locked onto signals and fixed the AV’s point of origin, the UAV Origin button will set the GPS ori-
gin as the Home Waypoint, and arrange Waypoints A-D in a diamond pattern around the origin. This button is not ac-
tive unless the AV has a GPS lock and the GCS is communicating with the RPUAV tool. The GPS acquisition location
0021 00-5
0021 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P

is indicated on the map as a yellow “+” sign. Size of the diamond pattern can be adjusted on creation (see Table 3) oth-
erwise Waypoints default to 500 meters from home.
UAV Mission
If downlink is being received from AV that already has a mission loaded into it (as when a handoff between GCS con-
trollers occurs) the mission can be extracted from that AV into the GCS. As with the UAV Origin Button, this will only
work if the AV is communicating properly with the RPUAV tool.
Open
This button allows the Mission Operator to select and open a previously saved mission. Mission files are found in
C:/Program Files/ RPUAV/Missions with a .smd file extension. This is the default folder for storing mission files.
Use Last
This button allows the Mission Operator to reload the last mission uploaded to the AV. This file can be found in the Mis-
sion Logs folder (typically C:\Program Files\RPUAV\Missions) with a .smd file extension.
Once a valid RPUAV mission profile is selected, the mission waypoints appear in green on the main map display.
Figure 3. Map-centered Mission.
0021 00-6
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0021 00
Figure 4. Mission Management Screen.
CAUTION
Home waypoint is not dependent on the location of the GCS. Range and Bearing to the AV is
derived from the Home waypoint coordinates, not from the GCS location. Use caution when
loading missions, and verify the coordinates of the Home Waypoint.
Home
The Home Waypoint (H) is the location used to reference range and bearing to the AV. The altitude for H is set accord-
ing to the Altitude Offset setting above the maximum DTED value in a 300m x 300m box centered over the waypoint. H
can be manually entered at any time, or moved when a new mission is loaded.
0021 00-7
0021 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P

Waypoint E
Waypoint E marks the beginning of the final approach to landing. The default location for Waypoint E is 500 m northeast
of H. Recommended flight altitude for E is to be set at 250 ft AGL. Whenever the AV is directed to fly to E, after crossing
the E waypoint it will then fly towards L and land.
In NAV mode, when the flight loop time expires the aircraft will complete the current NAV loop (ending at D), proceed to
E, and land at L. The AV can also be redirected to E at any time to initiate the approach to landing sequence.
If LOL is set to Rally or Finish Flight (with the AV not in NAV mode) and link is lost, the AV will fly directly to E at the cho-
sen rally altitude. A message on the Hand Controller(s) and in the top left of the Main Map Display will read “EN ROUTE
RALLY” when this is occurring.
WARNING
Air vehicle will not auto-navigate toward L once Autoland has activated.
Air vehicle calculates Autoland activation point based on winds, distance from E to L, and altitude at E. AV should land
±50m from Wayoint L provided winds and altitude at Waypoint E are not excessive. If E is set at 500 meters from L, al-
titude should be set at 250 ft AGL (depending on situation and terrain).
Figure 5. Auto-Navigation from E-L (NAV or LOL Mode).

Land/Rally (L) Waypoint
The Landing Waypoint (L) will default 20m to the east of the Home Waypoint location at 0 feet AGL, but can be changed
by the Mission Operator. (Consideration should be given to terrain along the E to L approach path). The altitude on the
Final Approach Course (E to L) will be the altitude setting at waypoint E. No consideration is made for height of the ter-
rain on the Final Approach to landing.
Mission Waypoints (A-D)
These waypoints represent a navigation loop. The AV will pursue an A->B->C->D->A, etc. flight path until it is redi-
rected or the flight time exceeds the flight loop time setting. Waypoints A-D are displayed in green unless their altitude
has been below the Altitude Safety Warning value, in which case they will display in red. The default configuration for
these waypoints is set around H in a diamond pattern at 500m due north, south, east and west. The altitude for the nav-
igation loop will be set at the Altitude Offset Setting above the highest DTED point on the entire flight path, including
waypoint E.
Orbit Waypoints (1-3)
Each mission is allocated three orbit waypoints that may be used to designate specific points of interest and can be
moved as required. The orbit waypoints are not part of a navigation cycle. In NAV mode the AV must be redirected to
0021 00-8
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0021 00
an orbit waypoint. The radius of the orbit over an orbit waypoint is determined by the AV altitude, assuring the objec-
tive remains in sight regardless of adjustments in altitude. The orbit waypoints are designed for use with a side-look
camera, but forward-look may be used as well. The default location for the orbit waypoints in a diamond default con-
figuration is 500 m east of Waypoint D (O-2), and 500 m north (O-1) and south (O-3) of Waypoint O-2. When the AV is
in orbit and the flight cycle time expires, the AV will exit the orbit, proceed to E and then land at L.
Range and Bearing
The range and bearing fields for each waypoint are refreshed any time their corresponding waypoint coordinate is mod-
ified; the waypoint’s coordinates are refreshed any time the range or bearing information is changed. This allows the
Mission Operator to modify or enter waypoint data using just range and bearing (from Home).
Adjusting Waypoint Locations
Waypoints can be moved by clicking and dragging to new locations on the Main Map display or by manually entering
coordinates or range and bearing from the home point into the waypoint fields on the Mission Management screen.
While being dragged, a green “X” will appear in the Main Map Display to indicate the new coordinate location. Upon
release, the new position will be immediately updated and the green circle will move to the new waypoint position. If
the “Auto Update Waypoint and Rally Altitudes” feature is on, the waypoint altitudes will be updated according to the
ALTITUDE OFFSET SETTING (See Mission Altitude Control Screen). Otherwise, the waypoints and flight path lines
are displayed in green if their altitudes are above the Altitude Safety Warning setting (set in the RPUAV Options Config
Tab, See Figure 14). Flight paths or waypoint altitudes that breach the Altitude Safety Warning value will display in red.
The RPUAV tool draws the AV’s current Mission Profile waypoint locations position in purple, and the RPUAV Tool’s
mission waypoint positions in green. If the AV receives the new waypoint position(s) properly, the current (purple) mis-
sion waypoints will disappear and only the green rings will be visible. If waypoint positions are not the same (due to
radio delays or loss of link), then both sets of rings (purple and green) will be visible as shown in Figure 6.
0021 00-9
0021 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
Figure 6. Waypoint Coordinate Update.

Rally Altitude
The rally altitude is a single, safe altitude used for flying from any point in the mission to Waypoint E in the event of Loss
of Link. This altitude setting is used to avoid terrain and obstacles over the entire mission range. If set properly, the
Rally Altitude assures that regardless of the AV’s location, it is commanded to fly above terrain features and obstacles
within that area. The Rally Altitude provides a buffer above the highest DTED point within a rectangle that extends
500 m north, south, east and west of the northernmost, southernmost, easternmost and westernmost waypoint or Or-
bit points see Figure 7. On initial issue, the RPUAV tool Altitude Offset is preset at 300 ft. This default setting can be
changed by the operator on the Config Tab of the RPUAV Options Window. The Rally Altitude for each mission can be
adjusted in the Mission Altitude Control screen.
0021 00-10
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0021 00
CAUTION
Figure 7. Safe Rally Altitude Area.
0021 00-11
0021 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
Flight Loop Time
CAUTION
Setting the Flight Loop Time beyond the battery life could result in loss of or damage to the AV.
At initial issue, Flight Loop Time is set at 360 min to avoid limiting mission endurance.
NOTE
Flight Loop Time is synonymous with Loop Time Out on the GCS LOL Sub-menu.
When in NAV mode, the flight loop time setting determines when the AV will conclude its final NAV loop at D, proceed to
E, and then land at L. When set at 0 minutes, the AV will only complete one navigation loop before proceeding to E and
then landing at L. This is typically used as a safety backup so that the AV is not commanded to fly beyond the life of the
battery. The flight time always begins at launch.
This menu area allows the Mission Operator to choose a course of action upon Loss of Link (LOL). Default setting for
LOL action is “Go to Rally”.
• “Land Now” will cause the AV to go into Autoland immediately upon LOL.
• “Finish Flight”
NAV mode: the AV will fly the A>B>C>D navigation loop or NAV at an orbit point until flight time reaches flight
loop time. The AV will then NAV from D (or the orbit point) to E, and approach to land at L. All other
Modes: immediately directs the AV to E and then land at L.
• “Go To Rally” directs the AV to immediately proceed to E and then land at L.
• “Loss of Link Timeout” allows the Mission Operator to set the AV link loss timeout to a value appropriate for the
current mission. This field is not used.
The LOL action can also be set in the Mission Altitude Control Screen (see Figure 6). Changing this setting from either
screen will change the setting on both screens.
Save, Use, Save As and Cancel
These buttons allow a mission to be saved, used or cancelled. Clicking the “Save Button” will save the mission and as-
sign it a filename according to the convention shown in Figure 8. If a previously saved mission was used to create a
new mission, clicking the “Save Button” will overwrite the original mission. Use the “Save As Button” when saving a new
mission with a new filename. The Use button allows a mission that has been edited to be used without saving it. The
“Cancel Button” exits the Mission Management Screen without saving any settings.
Figure 8. Default Mission Filename Convention.
0021 00-12
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0021 00
Mission Altitude Control Screen
The Mission Altitude Control Button will bring up the Mission Altitude Control Screen (Figure 9). This screen al-
lows the Mission Operator to set RALLY ALTITUDES and altitudes for each of the waypoints. Once all the settings are
set according to the mission plan, close the window to accept all settings.
Figure 9. Mission Altitude Control Screen.

Waypoint Altitudes
The altitude of each waypoint in the Mission Altitude Control Screen is indicated by a diamond. When creating a new
mission, the altitude for Waypoints A-E is set according to the Altitude Offset setting in the RPUAV Options Config tab in
feet (AGL) above the highest point on the entire flight path. The altitude for H and O waypoints apply this altitude setting
above the maximum DTED value in a 300m x 300m box centered over the waypoint. The altitude on the Final Approach
Course (E to L) will be the altitude setting at waypoint E. No consideration is made for height of the terrain on the Final
Approach to landing. The L Waypoint defaults to 0 feet AGL.
A waypoint altitude is adjusted by clicking and holding a blue diamond and sliding it up or down. The new MSL altitude
will be displayed just over the diamond and the AGL altitude will be displayed in the lower right corner of the screen.
When the Auto Update Waypoint Altitudes option is selected, altitudes for all waypoints are automatically updated, only
if waypoint is moved (See Figure 14).
Rally Altitude
Rally Altitude for the mission is set according to the Altitude Offset setting on the Config Tab of the RPUAV Options Win-
dow. The Rally Altitude can be adjusted in either the Mission Management Screen (Figure 4) or the Mission Altitude
Control screen. Adjustments on Mission Management Screen will be overwritten in Auto-Update Waypoint and Rally
Altitudes check block is selected.
0021 00-13
0021 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P

Show Loss Of Link Data Checkbox
Checking this box activates a scan for altitudes that the AV must remain above in order not to lose link with the GCS
at the Home Waypoint. (This assumes that the GCS is located at H.) When checked, a second elevation projection is
shown in addition to the ground elevations in the altitude charts. This projection indicates the portion of the flight path
along which LOL should be expected to occur if the AV is below the LOL Altitude displayed. The LOL projection is drawn
in red. If there is no line of sight obstructions between the AV flight track and the Home Waypoint, nothing is drawn.
Figure 10. LOL Altitude Display on Mission Altitude Control Screen.

Reroute Buttons
These buttons are used to redirect the AV to the waypoint of choice when in NAV mode. For example, if the AV is navi-
gating from point B to point C, and the A button is pressed, the AV will immediately reroute to A as its current target way-
point. When the E button is pressed, the AV will fly to E and immediately enter a landing pattern to L.
Mission Operation
Once a mission is created, the user can manipulate the mission components. The main map displays the mission com-
ponents using different colors and symbols.
Table 2. Mission Map Symbols.

AV Yellow plus sign - AV GPS point of origin.
Yellow chevron - current AV position and heading.
Yellow X - camera center field of view.
Waypoint Green circle - waypoint is at a safe altitude.

Green circle - current waypoint if no purple lines are visible.
Green circle - proposed waypoint if purple lines are visible.
Red circle - waypoint at altitude below Altitude Safety Warning.
0021 00-14
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0021 00

Table 2. Mission Map Symbols. – Continued

Purple circle - current waypoint until new green waypoint is accepted by AV.
Flight Path Green line - flight path is at a safe altitude.

Green line - current flight path if no purple lines are visible.
Green line - proposed flight path if purple lines are visible.
Red line - flight path below the Altitude Safety Warning.
Purple line - current flight path until new green flight path is accepted by AV..
AV Icons
Information relative to the AV’s origin, position or view is displayed in yellow. The chevron indicating the current AV lo-
cation will only appear once the AV has locked GPS. If the GPS in the AV is not locked, the position is not updated. Upon
LOL, the AV icon will freeze at its last known position on the display. See Figure 11.
Figure 11. AV Location Symbols.
0021 00-15
0021 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
Mission Replay Button
The Mission Replay Button opens the Mission Replay Screen (Figure 12) in order to review mission events
(screen captures) and create .jpg images of the event. Mission events must first be downloaded from the hub and
stored on the computer hard drive in the C:\RPUAV_Logs folder. Downloading (File Transfer) instructions are provided
under RPUAV Options Hub Tab. Images are stored in the C:\RPUAV_Logs folder as National Imagery Transmission
Format (NITF) files with a .ntf file extension. These files include both an image and text data relevant to the captured
image. This is a national standard developed for exchange of digital imagery among members of the Intelligence
Community.
Image Selection
The Image Selector Slider is located just beneath the image in the Mission Replay Screen. When a mission
event/screen capture is selected using the slider, the filename is displayed at the bottom of the Mission Replay Screen
and the mission parameters associated with the are shown in the Main Map Display.
Figure 12. Mission Replay Screen.

A yellow warning (“Displaying Recorded Mission Data; Close Replay Window For Live Mission”) will appear and blink
intermittently on the FalconView Main Map Display screen, indicating that the map display is not live and cannot be ma-
nipulated.
0021 00-16
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0021 00
Save As .JPG
Clicking this button allows the image to be saved as a .jpg file into the C:\RPUAV_Logs folder. The image will include
relevant data from the screen capture above and below the picture. AV and CFOV locations will appear in the co-
ordinate format (MGRS, UTM or LAT/LONG) that is currently selected in Falcon View. To change the format, press
“CTRL-F” or click on the FalconView “Options” drop down menu and then choose Coordinate Format. The base file-
name will be the same as the .ntf file that was the source of the image and data. See Figure 13. This button is not used.
Figure 13. .JPG Captured Image.
0021 00-17
0021 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
Config Tab
The Config Tab is used to view and adjust the default settings in the RPUAV Tool. Figure 14 shows the Config Tab and
Table 3 details the functions.
Figure 14. Config Tab.
Table 3. Config Tab Elements.
Field Explanation
Serial Port Settings: COM The default selection is Ethernet and is chosen when using an Ethernet cable. If a
Port serial connection is being made, choose the appropriate COM port.
Serial Port Settings: Baud The default setting is 9600. The drop-down menu displays additional choices to be
Rate used when the serial port setting is not Ethernet.
Altitude Settings: Altitude This is the altitude (in feet AGL) each of the waypoints is commanded to when a
Offset waypoint is dragged and the “Auto Update Waypoint Altitudes” option is checked
(see below). This can be adjusted between 0 and 1,000 ft. AGL. The default is 300
ft. AGL.
0021 00-18
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0021 00
Table 3. Config Tab Elements. – Continued
Field Explanation
Altitude Settings: Altitude This setting is used to alert the user when an altitude below the setting is included in
Safety Warning the programmed flight path. At initial issue, the default setting is at 100 ft. AGL. Once
the default value is altered, the setting will remain changed even when the computer
is rebooted. An altitude setting below the safe altitude is indicated on the flight path
in the Main Map Screen by a dashed red line. A waypoint altitude setting below the
safe altitude is indicated by the waypoint displayed in red. This feature is especially
useful when the “Auto Update Waypoint Altitudes” feature is turned off. If it is turned
off and a waypoint is dragged over higher elevation, there is a danger of the AV hitting
the ground. The warning alerts the user before the AV is endangered.
Waypoint Altitudes Update: This feature allows the tool to automatically compute safe altitudes for all waypoints
Auto Update Waypoint and when any waypoint is moved. This assures that altitude commands remain safe as
Rally Altitudes waypoint locations are modified. When this feature is enabled and a waypoint is
changed, all of the waypoint segments are searched for the highest DTED elevation.
This highest elevation is added to the Altitude Offset and becomes the new altitude
for all waypoints.
Allow Adjustable Mission Allows the tool to request that the Mission Operator enter a mission’s size upon
Size on creation creation (via Map Center or UAV Origin).
Mission Mode: Mission Determines that the toolbar’s mode of operation is as Mission Operator. This is the
Operator default operation.
Mission Mode: Remote Sets the toolbar system into a “listen only” mode, but allows the mission viewer to
Viewing Terminal with change radio channels. This will only control the radio if the hand controller is not
Radio Control connected.
GPS Key Tab
CAUTION
Clicking the Zeroize GPS Key will cause the GPS to stop functioning in the secure mode
until reprogrammed with a good key and may render the GPS unusable until the next system
power-up.
The GPS Key Tab (Figure 15) provides information on the GPS key status. One of eight key status codes in Table 4 will
be displayed in the status field. From this tab, it is also possible to zeroize the GPS security key. This is useful when the
risk of losing an AV with a security-enabled GPS is high and the GPS security must be disabled. Click on the Zeroize
GPS Key Only button to zeroize the GPS key.
0021 00-19
0021 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
Figure 15. GPS Key Tab.
Table 4. GPS Key Status Codes.
Code Explanation
??? Key Status Unknown

0 Not Keyed
1 Keyed with CVw*, but not for today
2 Keyed and Verified (GUV* or CVw)
3 Keyed with CVw or GUV, failed CV cert
4 Keyed with GUV, data not collected yet
5 Not Keyed (response to zeroize command)
6 Key status unknown, Zeroize failed
7 Key loaded
* Crypto Variable Weekly

* Group Unique Variable
0021 00-20
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0021 00
GPS Status Tab

The GPS Status Tab (Figure 16) displays the GPS data being sent from the AV, such as satellite status, date, time, AV
position in GPS (Lat/Long) format, speed, altitude (in Meters) and course (referenced to True North). The only user-ad-
justable field in this tab is the GPS Timeout field. This field sets the maximum amount of time that a GPS signal denial
will be tolerated before the system reacts. When the GPS receiver has acquired a sufficient number of satellites with
adequate signal strength, and fixed the AV’s point of origin, the Fix check block will lock indicating that the AV position
has been defined. The GCS GPS area will display the location of the RSTA laptop, if a GPS receiver is available. (This
is currently not used.)
Figure 16. GPS Status Tab.
0021 00-21
0021 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
Hub Tab
The Hub Tab (Figure 17) is used to manage NITF mission capture files on the GCS Hub, to send DTED to the hub, and
to query the current DTED coverage. Elements of this tab are explained in Table 5.
Figure 17. Hub Tab in RPUAV Options Window.
Table 5. Hub Tab Elements.
Element Explanation
Get NITFs from HUB This button is used to initiate the transfer of the NITF mission capture files from the
hub. See Figure 17.
Start DTED Transfer to Hub This button is used to initiate the transfer of DTED for the laptop’s current mission
from the RSTA laptop to the hub. See Transferring DTED File to the Hub.
Show Hub DTED Coverage This button is used to query the hub’s current DTED coverage. The map will be
repositioned in such a manner and scale as to allow the display of the current DTED
coverage available.
0021 00-22
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0021 00

Transferring NITF Files from the Hub
1. Verify hub is connected to the RSTA laptop via the Ethernet cable.
2. Click “Get NITFs From Hub” button on the Hub Tab of the RPUAV Options Menu (transfer will begin and “Getting
NITFs” message will be displayed).
3. When transfer is completed, the message on the window will change to “Done getting NITFs”. Click on OK button
to close Window.
4. NITFs are stored on the laptop in C:\RPUAV_Logs folder with .ntf extension.
Deleting NITF Files on the Hub
To delete mission events/screen captures that are stored on the hub:
1. Click the “Delete NITFs on Hub” button.
2. Click “OK” in the popup window to confirm delete.
3. NITFs can also be deleted from the hub by using the hand controller.
Transferring DTED File to the Hub
This feature is used to transfer DTED for the mission area to the GCS Hub. The Hub will hold DTED for a 2500 square
kilometer area (50 km x 50 km). If a valid mission is loaded when DTED transfer process begins, the display will center
on the Home coordinate of the mission and zoom to a map scale that can show the entire DTED area. If a mission is not
loaded, the DTED Transfer area will center on the Main Map Display.
When the Start DTED Transfer button is clicked, the user is prompted to review the coverage area and click the Start
DTED Data Transfer button. The Main Map Display will be restored to its previous scale, centered on the DTED area.
The Transfer DTED To Hub window will display the status of the DTED data transfer (Connecting to 192.168.1.1, then
Uploading DTED data, then done). The steps to transfer DTED are:
1. Center map view around selected location.
2. Select “RPUAV” “Options” tab.
3. Select “Hub” tab.
4. Select “Start DTED transfer to Hub” (50 km x 50 km shaded area will be highlighted).
5. Click Start DTED data transfer to start the data transfer.
6. Click close once data transfer is complete.
7. Verify DTED coverage on hand controller diagnostic screen #2.
Show Hub DTED Coverage
This feature allows the Mission Operator to display the current 2500 square kilometer (50 km x 50 km) DTED cover-
age area held in the hub. The map scale and position will be automatically changed to allow the coverage to be shown,
in the same manner as for DTED transfer. This allows the DTED coverage to be validated, and if necessary, re-trans-
ferred to the hub.
Flying Without DTED
The RPUAV toolbar uses DTED in the following ways:
• Calculation of Rally Altitude: the DTED altitude of the highest point in an area large enough to cover the entire
mission and its orbits is used to determine the Rally altitude.
• Safe Altitude: the maximum DTED altitude of the ground track currently flown by the Air Vehicle is used to
determine the current Safe altitude.
• DTED altitudes are sent to the Air Vehicle for each waypoint and for the entire mission.
If there is no DTED coverage for the mission:
• The origin altitude (used for waypoints and Rally altitude) must be acquired from map study.
• Loiter radius will not be accurate (Loiter FOV is calculated using 500 ft. AGL without DTED).
• If there is no DTED coverage for the mission loaded in the GCS Hub, CFOV coordinates will not be shown.
• FalconView will display the “Inadequate DTED Coverage” message.
0021 00-23
0021 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
Network Tab
The Network Tab is used to set the IP address and User Datagram Protocol (UDP) ports of the hub, and the UDP port
for the AVScreener tool. See Figure 18 and Table 6.
Figure 18. Network Tab in RPUAV Options Window.
Table 6. Network Tab Elements.
ELEMENT EXPLANATION
Remote Host IP Address By default, this is set to 192.168.1.1. This is the default
local IP address of the hub. If the local IP address of the
hub is changed, this Remote Host IP Address must be
changed to match.
UDP Send Port By default, this is set to 5000. This is the UDP Send port
of the Add-On Tool and the default UDP Receive port of
the hub. If the UDP Receive port of the hub is changed,
the UDP Send port must be changed to match.
0021 00-24
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0021 00
Table 6. Network Tab Elements. – Continued
ELEMENT EXPLANATION
UDP Receive Port By default, this is set to 5001. This is the default UDP
Receive port of the Add-On Tool and the default UDP
Send port of the hub. If the UDP Send port of the hub
is changed, the UDP Receive port must be changed to
match.
AVScreener Video Port Sets the UDP port number for the video stream read by
AVScreener.
Cursor on Target (CoT) Tab

The CoT tab is used to manage the IP address, UDP port, data update rates, and enable status of the Situational
Awareness data streamer; it also manages the input TCP port and enable status of the input data server. The default
values and enable statuses should be maintained as is. See Figure 19. This tab is intended for future use.
Figure 19. Cursor on Target (CoT) Tab.
0021 00-25
0021 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
User Interface (UI) Config Tab

This tab manages the user-selectable logs directory and the color and style of the mission status text background. See
Figure 20 and Table 7.
Figure 20. UI (User Interface) Configuration Tab.
Table 7. UI Config Tab Elements.
ELEMENT EXPLANATION
Logs Directory Shows the currently-selected directory for data captured from the hub. The default is
C:\RPUAV_Logs.
Browse Button Allows the user to select a new directory.
Highlight Mission Status Allows the user the enable or disable the background contrast for the mission status
Fields fields.
Background Color Presents a pull-down menu of color choices for the mission status field background.
Background Type Presents a pull-down menu of background styles.
0021 00-26
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0021 00
AVScreener
This icon opens the AVScreener line. See WP 0024 00.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0021 00-27/28 blank

TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0022 00
NSN 1550-01-538-9256 EIC: 60C
MISSION IMAGE PROCESSING (LRIP AND FRP)
INITIAL SETUP:
Equipment Condition
RSTA assembled (WP 0071 00)
MISSION IMAGE PROCESSING
NOTE
Detailed information on the use of the image tools is provided in FRP> WP 0021 00 < , Falcon-
. .
View and the RPUAV Tool and FRP> WP 0024 00 < , AVScreener.
. .
NOTE
Detailed information on the use of the image tools is provided in LRIP> WP 0020 00 <, Falcon-
. .
View and the RPUAV Tool and LRIP> WP 0023 00 <, AVScreener.
. .
DOWNLOAD NATIONAL IMAGERY TRANSFER FILE (NITF) FROM HUB USING FALCONVIEW
1. Verify hub is connected to the RSTA laptop via the Ethernet cable.
2. Click “Get NITFs From Hub” button on the Hub Tab of the RPUAV Options Menu (transfer will begin and
“Getting NITFs” message will be displayed).
3. When transfer is completed, the message on the window will change to “Done getting NITFs”. Click on OK
button to close Window.
4. NITFs are stored on the laptop in C:\RPUAV_Logs folder with .ntf extension.
DELETE NITFS FROM HUB

The NITF images stored on the hub can be deleted using the hand controller or by using the Options Menu on the
RPUAV Toolbar.
1. To delete using the RSTA laptop computer:
a. Verify hub is connected to the RSTA laptop via the Ethernet cable.
b. Click the “Delete NITFs On Hub” button from the Hub Tab of the RPUAV Options Menu.
2. To delete using the hand controller, select “Delete all Captured Images” from the Hub submenu on hand
controller and press enter.
Review NITFs and Create Joint Photographic Expert Group (JPG) Images from NITF Files
1. Select Mission Replay from the RPUAV Toolbar.
2. Use the image slider at bottom of mission replay screen to view available images and associated mission
information in FalconView.
3. LRIP> After desired image is shown in mission replay screen, select the save using the JPG button.
.
4. FRP> After desired image is shown in mission replay screen, save using the “Save as JPG” button.
.
5. The photo will be stored as a .jpg file in the C:\RPUAV_Logs folder .
0022 00-1
0022 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
MISSION IMAGE PROCESSING - CONTINUED
Delete Images from Computer
NOTE
NITF, JPG, and MPG files are all stored in the same directory (C:/RPUAV_Logs). Deleting files
using the “Select All” will cause the loss of mission files.
1. Open “My Computer” icon and navigate to the C:\RPUAV_Logs folder.

2. Select .NTF, .JPG, and/or .MPG files and delete.
3. Delete from recycle bin.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0022 00-2
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0023 00
NSN 1550-01-538-9256 EIC: 60C
AVSCREENER LRIP> .
INITIAL SETUP:
Equipment Condition
NOTE
All settings (e.g., units and coordinate format) used in the data display window cannot be
changed when the program is running.
NOTE
AVScreener files (.mpg) that are larger than 1.5 GB may not replay correctly. Recordings should
be restarted approximately every 30 minutes to avoid very large files.
INTRODUCTION LRIP> .
AVScreener programs manage the video/telemetry stream from the GCS. With them, the user can display live video
and data during a mission, record the stream to a file for later playback, and do other tasks. There are two variants in-
stalled, AVScreener Live and AVScreener.
AVScreener Live opens a small, re-sizable window for real-time viewing and recording. It can be launched and config-
ured by another application, such as the FalconView RPUAV Add-On Toolbar, or the Tactical Operations Center appli-
cation.
AVScreener opens a full-size window for viewing, recording, and playing back previously recorded files. The main win-
dow displays primary telemetry data along with video. The user can configure the network inputs, network outputs, and
displayed units. While a file is being played, it can be paused or forwarded as a single frame, and any segment of in-
terest can be recorded as a separate file. The user can request a snapshot of video/telemetry, which creates a picture
framed by AV data.
AVScreener Live. AVScreener Live is capable of viewing and recording a video/telemetry stream live from the GCS.
For those familiar with the FalconView RPUAV Add-On Toolbar (which supports the GCS), it is similar to that toolbar’s
video display function, except it is capable of recording the video/telemetry stream rather than capturing single frames.
Features. Launching AVScreener Live opens a re-sizable window, featuring a video screen for viewing live video, a
button for recording the video/telemetry data stream, a button for displaying data window, a clickable “Always on Top”
selection, and brightness control. Details on these features are found in Figure 1 and Table 1. Details on the features
of the Data Window are found in Figure 2 and Table 2.
0023 00-1
0023 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
INTRODUCTION LRIP> . – CONTINUED
Figure 1. AVScreener Live Screen.
Table 1. AVScreener Live Screen Information.
Screen Text Function/Definition

1 Video Window Displays current video.
2 Show Data Shows data window (See Figure 2 and Table 2).
Window Button
3 Brightness Slider Controls display brightness.
4 Always on Top Keeps AVScreener window displayed on top of other windows.
5 Record Button Starts/stops video recording.
0023 00-2
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0023 00
INTRODUCTION LRIP> . – CONTINUED
Figure 2. AVScreener Data Window.
Table 2. AVScreener Data Window Information.

1 Air Vehicle Displays AV identification, coordinates, altitude, heading, ground speed, pitch
and roll.
2 Center FOV Displays center field of view coordinates, bearing, elevation, and slant range.
3 Image Corners Displays coordinates of each corner of current video.
4 Video UTC Displays Universal Time Coordinated (UTC) of current video.
HOW TO USE AVSCREENER LIVE LRIP> .
NOTE
changed when the program is running.
1. Access AVScreener Live.

AVScreener Live can be launched from a separate program, such as Rucksack Portable Unmanned
Aerial Vehicle (RPUAV) software. The launching program provides the necessary configuration
information.
AVScreener Live can also be launched from a desktop shortcut or Windows Start Menu. When
launched, in this way, it supports a single GCS with pre-selected display units.
0023 00-3
0023 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
HOW TO USE AVSCREENER LIVE LRIP> . - CONTINUED
2. Record / Stop Recording Video in AVScreener Live.

Click Record button in lower left corner of AVScreener Live window to start recording. To stop recording,
click Record button again.
HOW TO USE AVSCREENER LRIP> .
The full version of AVScreener is capable of playing and recording live video, and playing previously recorded
video/telemetry from a file using Video Cassette Recorder (VCR)-style controls. The current version supports taking
frame captures of the currently displayed video and data, and sending Cursor on Target (CoT) data or data/snapshots
at four times per second. This version contains user-changeable settings for the GCS network interface, unit and
coordinate format.
Features
Launching AVScreener opens a full-size window from which the user can view and record live video, open/playback
and record from an existing video (previously recorded video/telemetry files), display the data window, adjust video
brightness, skip to a location in the video, Play/Pause video, advance the current video by one frame, capture snap-
shots, Stop/Close the current file, and open the Setup screen. Details on these features are found in Figure 3 and
Table 3.
0023 00-4
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0023 00
HOW TO USE AVSCREENER LRIP> . - CONTINUED
Figure 3. AVScreener Screen.
0023 00-5
0023 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
Table 3. AVScreener Screen Information.

1 Video Window. Displays current video.
2 Video UTC. Displays Coordinated Universal Time of current video.
3 Air Vehicle. Displays AV identification, coordinates, altitude and heading.
4 Center FOV. Displays center field of view coordinates, bearing, elevation,
and slant range.
5 Current Configuration. Displays name of current configuration.
6 Cursor on Target Status. Future Capability.
7 Brightness Slider. Controls display brightness.
8 Control Buttons. Left to right.
Play live input stream from GCS.
Play from file (“playback”), Record/Stop recording.
Pause/Resume play from file, Stop (Close file).
Forward 1 Frame while paused, Capture Snapshot,
Show Data Window.
Setup (show configuration window).
9 File Position Indicator and Control Displays video progress during playback. It is also used to
reposition within the file being played back. This is not a “click
and drag” control, “Click” a point on the horizontal line. The
indicator jumps to that point, and play resumes from there.
1. Launch AVScreener. Launch AVScreener from shortcut on desktop or from Start Menu.
2. Control Buttons.
• Play live input stream from GCS. Click to start.

• Play from file (“playback”). Click to start. Select the file from the file-selection dialog box that opens.
• Record/Stop Recording. Click to start recording. Click again to stop recording. A new file is begun,
each time recording is started. The file name contains the UTC of the beginning of the file. Files can be
recorded from previously recorded files.
• Pause/Resume play from file. Click to pause play from file. Click again to resume. Note that file
begins playing immediately upon opening.
• Stop. Click to stop play. This also stops recording and closes the file.
• Forward 1 Frame. While playback is paused, click to display next frame. Clicking this button while the
video is playing will cause the video to pause.
• Capture Snapshot. Click to record current video frame and data to file. Filename is “avsnap-“ followed
by UTC, with extension .jpg. Snapshot files can be viewed with a browser or picture viewer. The AV
information appears above the frame; the center FOV information, below. Snapshot can be performed
at any time, whether video is playing or paused, or being recorded.
• Show Data Window. Click to display the data window, Figure 2.
• Setup. Click to display the Setup window, with the current configuration. For details on AVScreener
Setup window, see Figure 4 and Table 4.
0023 00-6
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0023 00
Figure 4. AVScreener Setup Dialogue Box.
Table 4. AVScreener Setup Dialogue Box Information.

1 Current Displays current AVScreener configuration. Select configuration from drop-down list.
Configuration.
2 Cursor On Select location of CoT, format of CoT data and CoT Internet Protocol (IP) and
Target (CoT) Port locations
Settings.
3 Units. Select Feet or Meters.
4 Coord Select format of coordinates
Format.
5 Input Stream Select name of current configuration, IP, Port and Interface IP settings.
Network
Settings.
0023 00-7
0023 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
Table 4. AVScreener Setup Dialogue Box Information. – Continued

6 Buttons. New — Start a new configuration.
Delete — Delete displayed configuration.
Apply — Use displayed configuration.
Restore Defaults — Use original configuration.
OK — Use currently-applied configuration and close window.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0023 00-8
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0024 00
NSN 1550-01-538-9256 EIC: 60C
AVSCREENER FRP> .
INITIAL SETUP:
Equipment Condition
NOTE
INTRODUCTION
AVScreener programs manage the video/telemetry stream from the GCS. With them, the user can display live video
and data during a mission, record the stream to a file for later playback, and do other tasks. There are two variants in-
stalled, AVScreener Live and AVScreener.
AVScreener Live opens a small, re-sizable window for real-time viewing and recording. It can be launched and config-
ured by another application, such as the FalconView RPUAV Add-On Toolbar, or the Tactical Operations Center appli-
cation.
AVScreener opens a full-size window for viewing, recording, and playing back previously recorded files. The main win-
dow displays primary telemetry data along with video. The user can configure the network inputs, network outputs, and
displayed units. While a file is being played, it can be paused or forwarded as a single frame, and any segment of in-
terest can be recorded as a separate file. The user can request a snapshot of video/telemetry, which creates a picture
framed by AV data.
AVSCREENER LIVE
AVScreener Live is capable of viewing and recording a video/telemetry stream live from the GCS.
For those familiar with the FalconView RPUAV Add-On Toolbar (which supports the GCS), it is similar to that toolbar’s
video display function, except it is capable of recording the video/telemetry stream rather than capturing single frames.
Features
Launching AVScreener Live opens a re-sizable window, featuring a video screen for viewing live video, a button for
recording the video/telemetry data stream, a button for displaying data window, a clickable “Always on Top” selection,
and brightness control. Details on these features are found in Figure 1 and Table 1. Details on the features of the Data
Window are found in Figure 2 and Table 2.
0024 00-1
0024 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
AVSCREENER LIVE - CONTINUED
Figure 1. AVScreener Live Screen.
Table 1. AVScreener Live Screen Information.

2 Show Data Shows data window (See Figure 2 and Table 2).
Window Button
4 Show Video Toggles video display on and off.
5 Always on Top Keeps AVScreener window displayed on top of other windows.
6 Record Button Starts/stops video recording.
0024 00-2
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0024 00
Figure 2. AVScreener Data Window.
Table 2. AVScreener Data Window Information.

1 Air Vehicle Displays AV identification, coordinates, altitude, heading, ground speed, pitch
and roll.
2 Center FOV Displays center field of view coordinates, bearing, elevation, and slant range.
3 Image Corners Displays coordinates of each corner of current video.
4 Video UTC Displays Universal Time Coordinated (UTC) of current video.
AVScreener Live Command Line
NOTE
Do not change the command line values unless you are instructed to do so or unless you fully
understand what the values mean. If any command line options are set to incorrect values,
AVScreener Live may fail to work properly.
A number of command line options can be used to configure the way AVScreener Live starts up and displays data. The
typical user will not have to modify the command line settings, as the default settings will work for most configurations.
However, for some configurations, the user will need to change some command line options. If the command line op-
tions must be changed for a specific configuration, the instructions on how to do so will be included in the instructions
for that configuration.
0024 00-3
0024 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P

To set the command line parameters for AVScreener Live, go to the AVScreener Live shortcut icon on the Windows
desktop. Right click on the “Shortcut Icon” and select “Properties” to display AVScreener Live Properties dialog box
(see Figure 3). Command line parameters can be changed by clicking in the text box labeled “Target” and editing text.
Figure 3. AVScreener Live Properties Dialog Box.

The default command line for the AVScreener Live shortcut installed on the desktop is as follows:
C:\AVScreener\avscreener.exe –u 192.168.1.1 –p 6000 –d 0 –a 0 –f c:\RPUAV_Logs\ -1
How to Use AVScreener Live
NOTE
changed when the program is recording.
1. Access AVScreener Live.

AVScreener Live can be launched from a separate program, such as Rucksack Portable Unmanned
Aerial Vehicle (RPUAV) software. The launching program provides the necessary configuration
information.
AVScreener Live can also be launched from a desktop shortcut or Windows Start Menu. When
launched, in this way, it supports a single GCS with pre-selected display units.
0024 00-4
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0024 00
2. Record / Stop Recording Video in AVScreener Live.

Click “Record button” in lower left corner of AVScreener Live window to start recording. To stop record-
ing, click “Record button” again.
Turning Off Video in AVScreener Live
AVScreener Live provides the capability to turn off the video while maintaining all other capability. To do so, uncheck
the checkbox next to Show Video in the AVScreener Live window. Using the tool without video display reduces the pro-
cessing load on the computer.
Video recording is independent of video display. However, if the Show Video status is changed while video is being
recorded, the video that is being sent from the GCS to the RSTA laptop during the several seconds that AVScreener is
switching from one state to another will not be recorded. Video recording will resume after the status change is com-
plete.
AVSCREENER
The full version of AVScreener is capable of playing and recording live video and playing previously–recorded
video/telemetry from a file using video cassette recorder (VCR)-style controls. The full version supports taking frame
captures of the currently displayed video and data. AVScreener Full also provides user-changeable settings for the
GCS network interface and unit and coordinate formats.
Features
Launching AVScreener Full opens a full-size window from which the user can:
• View and record live video

• Open/playback an existing video
• Display the data window
• Adjust video brightness
• Skip to a location in the video
• Play/pause the video
• Advance the current video by one frame
• Capture snapshots
• Stop/close the current file
• Open the Setup window in order to change settings
0024 00-5
0024 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
AVSCREENER - CONTINUED
Details on these features can be found in Figure 4 and Table 3.
Figure 4. AVScreener Screen.
Table 3. AVScreener Screen Information.

1 Crosshair The Crosshair is turned off by default. Turn the Crosshair on or off by toggling
Crosshair > Show.
2 Video UTC Displays Universal Time Coordinated of current video.
3 Air Vehicle Displays AV identification, coordinates, altitude and heading.
4 Center FOV Displays CFOV coordinates, bearing, elevation and slant range. Also displays
a graphic indicating which camera is being used. (The graphic shown in the
Center FOV section of Figure 4 indicates front-look camera is being used.)
5 Current Configuration Displays name of current configuration.
6 Status Displays current system mode, radio link status, flight time in HH:MM:SS,
Autoland status, and En Route Rally status.
0024 00-6
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0024 00
Table 3. AVScreener Screen Information. – Continued

8 Control Buttons Play live input stream from GCS.Play from file (“playback”), Record/Stop
recording. Pause/Resume Play from file, Stop (close file). Forward 1 Frame
while paused, Capture Snapshot, Show Data Window Setup (show configu-
ration window).
9 Record Options Selecting “Stream File” and pressing the Record button will cause AVScreener
to record the video and telemetry data to a .mpg file in the C:\RPUAV_Logs
folder. Selecting “Log File” and pressing the Record button will cause
AVScreener to extract all telemetry data from the currently playing video
(either file or live stream) into a .txt file in the C:\RPUAV_Logs folder. This is
typically used to log flight data.
10 File Position Indicator Shows progress of video during playback, and is used to reposition within the
file being played.
Moving Through Video

The File Position Indicator and Control slider is used to indicate the position of the currently displayed image in the over-
all video file and can also be used to move incrementally within the video. The slider can be clicked and dragged while
video is playing or paused. Dragging the slider to move through the video can be a useful way of finding a particular
place in the video, as images from the video will be displayed as the slider is moved.
1. Launch AVScreener. Launch AVScreener from shortcut on desktop or from Start Menu.
2. Control Buttons.
• Play live input stream from GCS. Click to start.

• Play from file (“playback”). Click to start. Select the file from the file-selection dialog box that opens.
• Record/Stop Recording.
• Click “Stream File” to indicate that both video and data should be recorded into a .mpg file.
• Click “Log File” to indicate that data should be extracted from the current video source (either live
video or playback from a file) and written into a .txt file in the C:\RPUAV_Logs folder.
• Click the “Record button” to start recording.
• Click again to stop recording.
• A new file is created each time a recording is started.
The file name of the recorded file is in the following format: Aircraft Type-Avionics ID-GPS
Year-GPS Month-GPS Day_GPS Hour_GPS Second.mpg (e.g., RQ-11A-4702-2007-02-
24_15_36_12_00.mpg). The time chosen is the GPS time from the flight video at the time the
Record button is pressed. If there is no GPS data available in the flight video at the time the Record
button is pressed, then the word “Unknown” will replace date and time in the file name.
• Pause/Resume play from file. Click to pause play from file. Click again to resume. Note that file
begins playing immediately upon opening.
• Stop. Click to stop play. This also stops recording and closes the file.
• Forward 1 Frame. While playback is paused, click to display next frame. Clicking this button while the
video is playing will cause the video to pause.
0024 00-7
0024 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
• Capture Snapshot. Click to record current video frame and data to file in the C:\RPUAV_Logs folder.
The filename of the recorded image is “avsnap-” followed by the video GPS date and time, with exten-
sion .jpg. Snapshot files can be viewed with a browser or picture viewer. The AV information appears
above the frame and the center FOV information appears below. Snapshot can be performed at any
time video is displayed in the video window. Details on these features are found in Figure 5.
Figure 5. Image Captured when Capture Snapshot Button is Pushed.
• Show Data Window. Click to display the data window, Figure 2.
0024 00-8
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0024 00
• Setup. Click to display the Setup window, with the current configuration. For details on AVScreener
Setup window, see Figure 6 and Table 4.
Figure 6. AVScreener Setup Dialogue Box.
Table 4. AVScreener Setup Dialogue Box Information.

1 Current Displays current AVScreener configuration in drop-down box..
Configuration
2 Cursor On CoT capability will be implemented in later versions.
Target (CoT)
Settings
3 Log Settings Select rate at which data logging occurs. Future versions will have the capability to log
images as well as data.
4 Control New — Start a new configuration.
Buttons Delete — Delete displayed configuration.
Apply — Use displayed configuration. The Apply
button must be pressed for the settings to take effect.
Restore Defaults — Use original configuration.
OK — Use currently-applied configuration and close window.
5 Units Select feet or meters.
6 Coordinate Select format of coordinates.
Format
7 GCS Settings Edit current configuration name, and IP, Port, and Interface settings.
0024 00-9
0024 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
Using Configurations
• Creating a New Configuration
To create a new configuration, follow these steps:
1. In AVScreener Full window, click “Setup button”. Setup window will display.
2. In Setup window, click “New”.
3. To change configuration name, click in “Config Name” field and type new name.
4. Change other fields in Setup window if needed.
5. Click “Apply” to apply settings and save configuration.
6. Click “OK” to close Setup window.
• Editing a Configuration
To edit an existing configuration, follow these steps:
1. In AVScreener Full window, click “Setup”. Setup window will display.
2. Using pulldown menu in upper-left corner of Setup window, select configuration to edit.
3. To change configuration name, click in “Config Name” field and type new name.
4. Change other fields in Setup window if needed.
5. Click “Apply” to apply settings and save configuration.
• Deleting a Configuration
1. In AVScreener Full window, click “Setup”. Setup window will display.
NOTE
A configuration cannot be deleted while it is being used. If this is attempted, a warning dialog
will appear reading, “Error: Unable to delete the current configuration.” To delete this configu-
ration, first select a new configuration using the pulldown menu and click Apply, then delete the
unneeded configuration.
2. Use pulldown menu to select configuration to delete. Settings in configuration fields will change, but will not
be applied if Apply is not clicked.
3. Click “Delete” to delete currently displayed configuration.
AVScreener Known Errors and Troubleshooting
Known error messages and common problems with AVScreener are outlined below. If it appears that AVScreener is
not working properly, first check the errors listed below to see if the problem is a known error. If it is not a known error,
try closing and then restarting AVScreener. If correct operation does not resume after restarting the program, restart
the RSTA laptop.
• File Playback Errors
At times, recorded files will not play back correctly. The video playback window is black. Telemetry data contin-
ues to be available, but is unreliable, as the playback of the file will be much shorter than the actual length of the
video. There is no work-around for this problem at this time. To view the video only, play the video file with an
application like Windows Media Player.
0024 00-10
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0024 00
• Short Files Playback Errors

At times, short files (less than approx. 10 seconds) will not play back correctly. If this occurs, AVScreener Full
may fail and the Task Manager may be required to stop AVScreener. (Press Ctrl+Alt+Delete. In window, click
“Task Manager”. In Task Manager window, click “Processes tab”, click once on “avscreener.exe”, then click “End
Process button”.) There is no work-around for this problem at this time. To view the video only, play this file with
an application like Windows Media Player.
• Too Many Videos Played Error

AVScreener Live and AVScreener Full will stop working properly after playing more than approx. 8 separate
video streams (either live or from saved files). Closing and then restarting AVScreener will reset AVScreener
and solve this problem.
• Error Upon Exit

On some of the RSTA laptops, AVScreener might cause an error upon exit. This should not affect the applica-
tion’s function.
• Heavily Loaded Computers

AVScreener is more likely to encounter errors/problems when running on a heavily loaded RSTA laptop. To only
record video, use AVScreener Live with video turned off. This will allow AVScreener Live to record using minimal
effort.
• Video Skips When Displaying Crosshair

On some of the RSTA laptops, when the crosshair is in use, the video may skip every 3-10 seconds. This
typically occurs only when video from the hub is being played. If video is being recorded, the recorded video is
not affected, and skipping will not occur when the video is played back later. Proper video playback will resume
when the crosshair is turned off.
• Video Will Not Play

On some of the RSTA laptops, if “Hardware Acceleration” is not set to Full, the playing of video will fail. The error
shown in AVScreener Live will be “Network Error.” (The same error will be displayed if there is a problem with
the network.) The error shown in AVScreener Full will be “Error: Could not connect to the video source!” when
trying to play video over the network. (The same error will be displayed if there is a problem with the network.)
The error can also occur when video is played back from a file. The error message that will be displayed is: Error
Playing File: (Name of file) AVScreener has problems playing some files. The problem generally occurs with
files shorter than 30 seconds.
• File Length and File Time Not Accurate

For some video files, typically very short (less than 10 seconds) or very long (greater than 1.5 hours), file length
and file time values may be off by significant amounts. To determine actual file time, either use time displayed in
Video UTC box at top-right of AVScreener Full window, or use flight time displayed in Status box.
• Incompatibility With Other Computers

RSTA laptops other than toughbook CF18 or CF19 should not be used.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0024 00-11/12 blank

TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0025 00
NSN 1550-01-538-9256 EIC: 60C
RANGE AND BEARING TOOL
INITIAL SETUP:
NA
RANGE AND BEARING TOOL
NOTE
Center Field of View accuracy could be off by as much as 50 meters.
NOTE
The Range and Bearing Tool will only work if proper DTED information has been loaded for the
current area. If no DTED information has been entered, the Hand Controller screen will show
the message “Not enough data to compute.”
The Range and Bearing Tool is used to measure distances between two objects on the ground and their precise loca-
tion. The objects are identified on the screen as Point S, Figure 1, Item 1 (the original point) and Point T, Figure 1, Item
2 (the target point).
Figure 1. Range and Bearing Tool points S and T.
USING THE RANGE AND BEARING TOOL

The Range and Bearing Tool uses captured NITF files that already exist in the system. The NITF image file used by this
tool is selected using the GCS Hand Controller. Once a capture is displayed using the NITF review feature of the Hand
Controller the targeting feature can be used. To use the Range and Bearing Tool follow these steps:
1. Ensure that you have at least one NITF still capture in the GCS system or use the Screen Capture Button on
the back of the GCS Hand Controller to capture a still during a flight.
0025 00-1
0025 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
USING THE RANGE AND BEARING TOOL - CONTINUED
CAUTION
Manual control of AV will not be available while using the Range and Bearing Tool. AV should
be flown using an autonomous Navigation Mode during this time.
2. Review the desired captured image. To do this enter replay mode on the Hand Controller by either holding
the Screen Capture Button until a still image is present or hold Menu Left and tap the Screen Capture Button.
Once in replay mode you can use the Menu Left and Right buttons to move through available captures.
3. Once the desired capture image is on screen the Enter Button is used to cycle through the three steps in the
Range and Bearing Tool. The steps are:
a. Push “Enter Button” once to activate the Range and Bearing Tool. “S” and “T” points will display on
screen. S point will blink.
b. Use joystick to move S point to desired location.
c. Press “Enter Button” to confirm S point, now T point will blink.
d. Use joystick to move T point to desired location.
e. Press “Enter Button” to confirm T point. Targeting calculations are now performed and the results
drawn on the screen.
f. To adjust S or T, push the “Enter Button” to return to step a.
g. To exit press “Screen Capture Button”.
Computed information will be shown on the right-hand side of the Hand Controller screen, see Figure 2 and Table 1.
Computed data assumes that the Operator is viewing the scene from a southern position and includes:
Figure 2. Computed Data.
0025 00-2
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0025 00
Table 1. Computed Data.
1. DROP/ADD DROP indicates need to move south from point S.

ADD indicates need to move north from point S.
2. RIGHT/LEFT RIGHT indicates need to move east from point S.
LEFT indicates need to move west from point S.
3. RNGE Indicates Range in meters between S and T points.
4. BRNG Indicates Bearing from point S to point T.
Saving the File

After the Range and Bearing Tool has computed the S and T data a new NITF capture file is automatically saved with
the new S and T data by simply leaving the review of this file. This includes exiting the image review mode to live video
or moving to another image. The file is saved only when the image review is completed and not during each computa-
tion. The Hub stores approximately 80 NITF files (including screen captures and S and T computations). Older files will
automatically be deleted when space is needed for new files.
The system creates a new NITF file with the original imagery and new S, T and S and T computations. The new file-
name is the same as the original NITF but with a 2-character rolling extension, e.g., AA, AB, AC, etc. For example, if
the original capture file was CAP01200.NTF then the new files would be CAP01200AA.NTF, CAP01200AB.NTF, etc.
Reviewing Range and Bearing Tool Files
Captured images that have been generated by the Range and Bearing Tool can be reviewed using the same tools as a
conventional capture file. The GCS Hand Controller, the RPUAV FalconView tool and any NITF viewer can review the
capture along with the S and T data. The Operator must download NITF from the Hub in order to view S and T points
and calculation data on the RSTA laptop. (See WP 0022 00)
0025 00-3
0025 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P

The operator can also use FalconView to save a captured NITF image as a JPEG. If the NITF image includes computed
data, that data will be displayed on the JPEG (if the data appears within the boundary of the image). See
Figure 3.
Figure 3. JPEG file produced by FalconView.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0025 00-4
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0026 00
NSN 1550-01-538-9256 EIC: 60C
BASIC MISSION PLANNING (LRIP AND FRP)
INITIAL SETUP:
References
FM 3-04.155 Army Unmanned Aircraft System
Operations
BASIC MISSION PLANNING

The purpose, mission, and use of the RQ-11B system must be approved and set by the mission commander. Upon
notification of an SUAS operation, the SUAS crew meets with the mission commander and conducts mission planning
procedures. SUAS system limitations are located in , LRIP> WP 0002 00, Table 5 < or FRP> WP 0003 00, Table 5 <.
. . . .
Mission Considerations
A number of factors will influence the conduct of an SUAS mission and should be considered in the planning process.
See Table 1 for a list of planning considerations.
Table 1. Planning Considerations.
Factor Considerations
Mission • Overall/Supported mission objective (higher headquarter’s mission)
• How best to configure SUAS to support mission
• EO vs. IR payload for day/night operations
• Type of mission/task
• Remote route and area tactical reconnaissance/surveillance
• Force protection
• Convoy security
• Target identification
• Personnel recovery/combat search and rescue
• Battle damage assessment
• Other missions
Enemy • Enemy capabilities to detect/combat SUAS.
• Enemy capabilities to:
• Detect/compromise GCS
• Detect/compromise launch/recovery site.
• Enemy electronic warfare (EW) and night vision capabilities.
Terrain and • Elevation of surrounding terrain and LOS between GCS/RVT and objective.
Weather • Ground contour along proposed flight route(s).
• Foliage effects on RF link.
• Effect of operation in high altitude.
• Weather effects including:
• Wind effect on launch, downwind legs, upwind legs, loiter, thermals, and landing.
• Temperature extremes and effect on AV, cameras, and batteries.
• Effect of high humidity on imagers.
• Effect of precipitation on camera, batteries, and electronics.
0026 00-1 Change 1 – 11 June 2008
0026 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
BASIC MISSION PLANNING - CONTINUED
Table 1. Planning Considerations. – Continued
Factor Considerations
Time • Coordination for launch/on-target times.
• Expected duration of SUAS mission.
• Setup and recovery time required.
Troops • Two-person team (recommended).
Available • Security for SUAS crew.
• Training level of SUAS crew.
• Other support/augmentation (data capture, remote launch/recovery).
Civilian • Civilian compromise of GCS site.

Factors • Civilian recovery of downed SUAS.
• Civilian RF and airspace interference.
Other SUAS • Launch and recovery site selection (security, stability, etc.).
Planning • Noise (during preflight and over the objective).
Considerations • Battery requirements/status.
• AV marking for night operations.
• Data recording/export.
• RVT location (with/away from GCS).
• Contingency plans:
• Failed launch
• LOL
• Crash/unplanned landing
• Loss of GPS
• Location of rally point
• Use of advanced skills:
• Mobile launch/mounted operations
• AV hand-off for extended ranged or increased mobility
• Rough terrain operations
• Airspace coordination (Airspace Control Authority, Air Defense Authority, Air Com-
mand/Unit).
After all considerations have been analyzed, produce a detailed flight plan with map and overlay. The flight plan should
consist of the following elements:
• Launch site.
• Landing location.
• Flight routes.
• Waypoints.
• Altitude: MSL in feet; each leg of the flight route if flying over uneven terrain.
• Recovery site.
• Restricted operating zones (if required by Airspace Control).
Change 1 0026 00-2

TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0026 00
BASIC MISSION PLANNING - CONTINUED
OPERATIONS ORDER (OPORD)

One way to structure SUAS mission planning is to use the five-paragraph operations order (OPORD) format. SUAS op-
erations may also be incorporated as a planning annex. This OPORD format is not all-inclusive, but provides a frame-
work for SUAS mission planning.
SITUATION
• Friendly: overall mission of supported unit, other friendlies.
• Enemy forces/capabilities: night vision, EW.
• Terrain: elevation, canopy, foliage.
• Weather: temp, winds, illumination, precipitation.
MISSION
• Who, what, when, where, why.
• Type of mission: point, area, mobile target.
• Time of mission: day/night, duration.
CONCEPT OF OPERATION
• Commander’s intent, success criteria, risk.
• Type/location of launch: normal, remote, hand-off, mobile, etc.
• Security of GCS team.
• Flight route (may be depicted on overlay).
• Actions on objective.
• Type/mounting location of camera.
• Data reporting/recording: who/where.
• Recovery location.
• Rally point and Autoland (contingency) considerations, land point and Rally altitude.
• Coordinating instructions.
• Airspace management.
• Frequency management.
SERVICE SUPPORT
• Battery type and quantity.
• Insertion/recovery of support equipment.
COMMAND AND SIGNAL
• GCS/RVT location (if applicable).
• Uplink frequency. Verify the RF Unit Filter on the RF Unit is the proper configuration for the channel being used.
(See WP 0057 01).
• Downlink frequency. Verify the RF Unit Filter on the RF Unit is the proper configuration for the channel being
used. (See WP 0057 01).
• EW considerations (including friendly comms interference).
MULTIPLE SUAS OPERATIONS IN CLOSE PROXIMITY
0026 00-3 Change 1

0026 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
MULTIPLE SUAS OPERATIONS IN CLOSE PROXIMITY - CONTINUED
When operating more than one SUAS and specifically multiple GCSs in the same area, particular attention must be
paid to avoid interference between the two systems (see Figure 1).
Figure 1. GCS Separation in Multiple SUAS Operations.

Follow these steps to safely operate multiple SUASs in close proximity.
1. Always verify channel selection with all SUAS operators in area. Multiple GCS may operate in close proximity
(one on each of eight different channels). Select different channels for systems operating in close proximity
of one another.
2. Locate multiple GCSs at least 400 m apart (recommended). Each system should perform launch and
recovery operations separately and away from any other GCS.
CAUTION
Flying too close to another GCS will interfere with the GCS’s signal reception, which may result
in loss of the other GCS’s AV.
3. Operator will not fly AV within 200-meter radius of another GCS. Although AVs have different channels,
similar transmit frequency of another AV will overpower other GCSs locally and blank out other AV’s video
downlink. This area extends in spherical dome 360 degrees around each GCS and up to altitude of 650 ft.
AGL.
4. Maintain safe separation between AVs at all times. Do not attempt to fly formations, dogfight, or purposely
bring SUASs into close proximity.
Change 1 0026 00-4

TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0026 00
USE OF UPLINK LOCK FEATURE FRP> .
The GCS/AV lock capability is used to prevent inadvertent crosstalk from one system to another operating in the same
area using the same frequencies. By “locking” an AV to the GCS prior to flight, this crosstalk can be avoided. Without
use of the lock feature it is possible for two systems operating on the same frequency to cross uplink. See Figure 2.
Figure 2. Crosstalk Danger in Unlocked Systems.
0026 00-5 Change 1

0026 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
By enabling the lock feature, two systems operating in the same area will not cross uplinks. However, it is possible for
an AV to lose link and rally in this situation. See Figure 3. Downlinks are not locked, and the stronger signal (usually the
closer AV) will be received by the GCS. Down links are not locked and the stronger signal (usually the closer AV) will be
received by the GCS.
Figure 3. Locked Systems Cannot Cross Uplinks.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
Change 1 0026 00-6

TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0027 00
NSN 1550-01-538-9256 EIC: 60C
REMOTE LAUNCH (LRIP AND FRP)
INITIAL SETUP:
Tools and Special Tools
Compass
REMOTE LAUNCH
The remote launch is useful when it is necessary or desirable to launch the AV from a different location than the
GCS/RVT site. The procedures described in this section are based on conducting remote launch operations without
radio communications. Radio communications and/or a GCS/RVT will aid in this procedure. Careful coordination,
rehearsal and an understanding of signalling techniques between the VO and Launcher is required for this to be suc-
cessful.
Establish the following prior to attempting a remote launch:
• AV/GCS channel.
• Camera view being used.
• Date/time the AV and GCS will be powered.
• Date/time for insertion of batteries.
Signal Techniques
NOTE
An RVT set up at the launch site will aid in this procedure.
Understanding remote signals is essential to success. The VO and Launcher have a written checklist and need to be
clear on the following signals:
LAUNCHER
• Thumb up in front of camera indicates “yes.”
• Thumb down in front of camera indicates “no.” A "no" signal means corrective action required before preflight
can continue.
• Circular hand rotation with thumbs up in front of camera indicates prop clear, ready for throttle.
• Thumb up and a 360º rotation and 20º rotation left and right of yaw indicates ready for launch.
Indicates which step of the preflight checklist is being checked with hand/finger count signal described below.
• Launcher controls/leads sequence of preflight checklist by placing finger with corresponding step in front of
camera for VO to see. For steps 3 through 5, hold fingers pointing up. For steps 6 through 10, hold fingers canted
to side. For steps 11 through 15, hold fingers pointed down. For step 16, finger is held up.
0027 00-1
0027 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
REMOTE LAUNCH - CONTINUED
Table 1. Hand Signal Table.
(6)
(11) (16)
(7)
(12)
(17)
(8)
(13) (18)
(9)
(4) (14)
(10)
(5) (15)
VO
• Stabilator up (by activating Autoland) indicates “yes.”
• Rudder left and right indicates “no.” A "no" signal indicates corrective action required before preflight can con-
tinue.
REMOTE LAUNCH PREFLIGHT CHECKLIST

Power up AV and GCS at pre-designated time (separate locations).
Begin standard preflight, signals and variations indicated:
1. Select Channel (AV and GCS, no signals exchanged).
2. Transmitter on (GCS, no signals exchanged).
3. VO lock AV to GCS.
LRIP> VO lock AV GCS N/A.
.
4. GPS Locked, VO signals "Yes", Launcher signals "4" and "yes".
0027 00-2
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0027 00
REMOTE LAUNCH PREFLIGHT CHECKLIST - CONTINUED
5. Check Boot Altitude and Compass (Launcher hold AV with nose heading north and Launcher signals "5" and
"yes", VO signals "yes" or "no").
6. Check Loss of Link (LOL) Setting (Launcher signals "6", and "yes" or "no").
7. Check "+", "H", “E” and "L" Waypoints (Launcher signals "7", VO signals "yes" or "no").
8. MAN flight mode (Launcher signals "8", VO signals "yes" or “no”).
9. Check Throttle (Launcher signals “9” and “prop clear”, VO checks throttle and launcher signals “yes” or “no”,
VO Autoland Launcher signals “yes” or “no”).
10. Ensure Video Clear (Day = Front, Side and Zoom; Night = White-Hot, Black-Hot) (Launcher signals “10”, VO
signals “yes” or “no”).
11. Check Stab (Back Stick/Forward Stick) (Launcher signals "11", Launcher signals "yes" or "no").
12. Check Rudder (Left Stick/Right Stick) (Launcher signals "12", Launcher signals "yes" or "no").
13. Check Gyros (Functional and Centered) (Launcher signals "13", Launcher signals "yes" or "no").
14. Check Autoland (Launcher signals "14", Launcher signals "yes" or "no").
15. Check Pitot Tube (Launcher signals “15”, Launcher signals “yes” or “no”).
16. Check Illuminator (Night = Check IR Illuminator.
Launcher signals “16” (Thumb over pitot).
VO turn laser on, and signals yes.
Launcher verifies laser on.
VO turns laser off signals yes.
Launcher verifies laser off and signals yes.
17. Check Beacons (Launcher signals “17”, Launcher signals “yes” or “no”).
18. Check GCS Battery Voltage (Launcher signals “18”, Launcher signals “yes” or “no”).
19. VO Start Recorder.
20. Launcher lifts AV to launch position, performs 360 degree rotation, then a 20 degree rotation left and right of
launching direction, to give VO a view of surroundings and give “Prop Clear” signal to VO.
21. VO throttles to 100 percent.
22. Launcher throws AV upwards between 25 and 45 degrees.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0027 00-3/4 blank

TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0028 00
NSN 1550-01-538-9256 EIC: 60C
HEADS DOWN LANDING PROCEDURE (LRIP AND FRP)
INITIAL SETUP:
NA
HEADS DOWN LANDING PROCEDURE (NO ASSISTANCE)

In certain situations, such as Night or Mobile Operations, it is difficult/impossible for VO to observe AV during ap-
proach/landing. The following procedure allows VO to safely land aircraft without coming heads-up.
Figure 1. Heads Down Landing Procedure.
0028 00-1
0028 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
HEADS DOWN LANDING PROCEDURE (NO ASSISTANCE) - CONTINUED
1. VO NAVs the AV to waypoint “E” 500 m downwind of “L”.

2. VO checks altitude for “E”. The altitude at “E” (250 - 300 ft AGL) should result in the AV landing within + or -
50 meters at ”L” (based on windspeed and terrain).
3. VO remains heads down and closely monitors AV range.
4. When the AV reaches “L” it will autoland.
HEADS DOWN LANDING PROCEDURE (WITH ASSISTANCE)

1. MO reroutes AV to waypoint “E” 500 m downwind of “L”.
2. MO checks altitude for “E”. The altitude at “E” (250 - 300 ft AGL) should result in the AV landing within + or -
50 meters at ”L” (based on windspeed and terrain).
3. MO comes heads-up and acquires AV.
4. VO closely monitors AV range, calling out to MO every 100m.
5. When the MO acquires the AV he calls out to the VO “I have the AV”.
6. The VO remains heads down.
7. At “L” AV will Autoland. The MO gives the VO steering instructions to ensure the AV remains into the wind
and clear of obstacles.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0028 00-2
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0029 00
NSN 1550-01-538-9256 EIC: 60C
UNTRAINED ASSISTANT OPERATIONS (LRIP AND FRP)
INITIAL SETUP:
OPERATING WITH AN UNTRAINED ASSISTANT

The RQ-11B should be operated by two certified and current operators, but can be operated by one certified and current
operator working with an untrained assistant. It is recommended that a second trained operator be used whenever pos-
sible and that an untrained assistant be used when only one trained operator is available. One trained operator, with an
untrained assistant, can operate the system but will be challenged.
WARNING
When working with Untrained Assistants, it is possible to allow an untrained individual to attempt
a task which could have serious results if executed incorrectly (for example assembly/disas-
sembly, programming waypoints, or launching the AV). The trained operator is responsible for
ensuring that the untrained assistant performs only those minimal tasks that support the opera-
tion. The trained operator is ultimately responsible for the actions of the untrained assistant.
There are two roles that untrained assistants can fill:
1. General support to the UAS mission (local security for the team, visual surveillance of local airspace, communi-
cations with friendly units, transportation of equipment, etc.).
2. Direct support to the UAS mission (requires brief instructions from a trained operator, and may include holding AV
during preflight checks, operating the GCS while trained operator launches AV, providing data from the RSTA lap-
top Mission controller. Upon request visually acquire AV upon landing).
Table 1 outlines the types of tasks that should be performed by the Trained Operator or the Untrained Assistant during
each phase of the operator.
Table 1. Operating with an Untrained Assistant.
Trained Operator Tasks Untrained Assistant Tasks

Mission • Plan mission. • Secure launch site.
• Provide airspace surveillance.
• Time hack.
Preflight • Set waypoints in Mission Hand • Transport equipment.
Controller. • Hold AV for preflight checks.
• Run preflight check on VO Controller.
Launch • Launch AV. • Press manual button and engage
• Take control of VO Controller once toggle switch to power propeller.
airborne. • Hold VO Controller during launch,
be prepared to engage Autoland if
required.
0029 00-1
0029 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
OPERATING WITH AN UNTRAINED ASSISTANT - CONTINUED
Table 1. Operating with an Untrained Assistant. – Continued
Trained Operator Tasks Untrained Assistant Tasks

Flight • Operate VO Controller. • Monitor data off RSTA laptop.
• Come heads-up first for landing.
• Visually acquire AV and report (I
have the AV) to the VO.
Post-flight • Inspect equipment. • Recover AV.
• Pack and transport equipment.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0029 00-2
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0030 00
NSN 1550-01-538-9256 EIC: 60C
HANDOFF PROCEDURE (LRIP AND FRP)
INITIAL SETUP:
Personnel Required
Operator (2)
CAUTION
Do not try to control AV with more than one GCS or autoland may be commanded. Failure to
comply may result in damage to AV.
HANDOFF GENERAL
The Handoff Procedure can be employed to:
• Allow the RQ-11B to be launched and recovered in safe area.

• Reduce forward GCS crew workload and exposure.
• Extend operating distance possible between launch/recovery area and mission objective.
AV LOL Mode
LOL mode is used to perform a handoff. The transmitter is switched off, allowing the AV to fly in LOL mode. Any prop-
erly setup GCS with LOS and within operating range may take control of the AV.
LOL mode is entered when uplink is broken for 3 seconds. To exit LOL, reestablish uplink and then enter any other flight
mode. There are 3 choices for the action that the AV will take upon entering LOL mode. Selecting LOL action is a mis-
sion control function and is selected in the LOL Submenu. See LOL Submenu for description of action choices.
FRP> . GCS Uplink Lock
LRIP> NA
.
Prior to turning on the transmitters, the GCS operators should lock AV to the GCS. This prevents inadvertent uplink con-
trol from another GCS that might be operating on the same channel at the time of the handoff.
GCS Transmitter Operation
The GCS transmitter can be switched on/off in the Radio Submenu. Switching off the transmitter during flight places
the AV in LOL mode. The GCS/RVT functions as an RVT (downlink only) when the transmitter is switched off.
CAUTION
Waypoint data and LOL action must be properly set before resuming transmission or AV flying
in LOL mode will follow the new instructions and may be commanded to Autoland.
For ground handling safety, the GCS powers up with Autoland selected. Autoland must be de-selected before switch-
ing transmitter on, or AV will Autoland. Sending waypoint data and LOL instructions begins immediately upon resum-
ing transmission. Waypoint data and LOL setting previously uploaded to the AV will be immediately overwritten by the
current data and setting. LOL instructions must be set properly before resuming transmission. If LOL is set to Land Im-
mediate, AV flying in LOL mode will Autoland upon resuming transmission.
PLANNING CONSIDERATIONS
0030 00-1
0030 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
PLANNING CONSIDERATIONS - CONTINUED
NOTE
Range and bearing are based on the Home Waypoint, so each GCS/RVT should enter different
Home Waypoints as appropriate.
Programming Waypoints
• Waypoint data and LOL setting update immediately, so both GCS should use the same LOL instructions and
waypoint information to prevent AV from changing course/altitude upon reestablishing transmission.
Coordination
• Handoff happens along a flight path, not at a single location. The LOL instructions must result in a handoff path
that is long enough to allow sufficient time to make the exchange, and it must be within range of both GCS.
• Handoff path beginning and ending points can be identified by flight time and/or AV position.
• Mission plan must include alternative course(s) of action if exchange does not happen between planned flight
times and/or AV positions.
• Either GCS may resume control of the AV but both GCS must not try to do this at the same time. Control can be
exchanged back and forth any number of times.
• If a GCS inadvertently transmits Autoland, the AV will Autoland, even if it is currently being controlled by another
GCS.
Planning for LOL: Go to Rally
• A NAV Waypoint could be used to assist with maneuvering AV into position for beginning of handoff run. When
transmitter is switched off, AV will enter LOL and fly to E Waypoint at altitude set for that waypoint, then continue
to L. AV will Autoland upon reaching L if control is not regained.
• GCS crews monitor exchange of control by observing "En Route Rally" message from AV and red 0% link bar
strength (with clock symbol).
Planning for LOL: Finish Flight
• In NAV mode with the transmitter on or off, the AV will continue to fly the NAV Waypoint loop (A, B, C, D, A, ...)
until the loop time expires. The AV must be in NAV mode before switching off the transmitter or the AV will go
directly to E then land at L.
• GCS crews monitor exchange of control by observing 0% link bar strength (clock symbol) only. The AV does not
relay a message indicating that it will continue to fly the NAV loop until the loop time expires.
HANDOFF PROCEDURE
1. Both GCS crews plan and coordinate handoff mission, then deploy to their planned locations.
2. Sending GCS (A): set up and launch AV following normal procedures set LOL to “GO TO RALLY” or “FINISH
FLIGHT”.
3. Receiving GCS (B): Perform following sub-steps prior to AV reaching handoff point.
a. Set up the GCS following normal procedures but do not switch on the transmitter.
b. De-select the Autoland command by entering the desired flight mode (MAN, HOME, LOIT, NAV,
ALT).
c. Program mission data (this can be accomplished by download mission data from AV or manually
programming data). Set Home Point as Appropriate, set LOL to “GO TO RALLY” or “FINISH
FLIGHT”.
d. FRP> AV is operating in locked link, lock the GCS to the AV. (See WP 0007 00)
.
4. When GCS (A) is ready to hand off, GCS (A) turns transmitter off.
0030 00-2
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0030 00
HANDOFF PROCEDURE - CONTINUED
5. Receiving GCS (B): Monitor video display for downlink signal from AV, until AV reaches handover point.
a. Observe LOL (En route Rally Message and/or red 0% link status bars) indicating loss of link (cause
by GCS A turning off transmitter).
b. Turn ON transmitter and observe restoration of link (link bar in place of clock symbol).
c. Re-enter desired flight mode (MAN, HOME, LOIT, NAV, ALT) to begin controlling AV (and observe
en route rally message disappears).
6. GCS (A): Verify successful handoff by observing En Route Rally message extinguishes and/or link strength
(link bar in place of clock symbol) is restored and AV responds to GCS B control input.
7. Both GCS crews: follow agreed-upon alternative course of action if exchange is not completed before AV
reaches handoff path ending time and/or position.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0030 00-3/4 blank

TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0031 00
NSN 1550-01-538-9256 EIC: 60C
AIRBORNE OPERATIONS (LRIP AND FRP)
INITIAL SETUP:
ALICE pack (2) Operator (2)
GCS
RSTA contents
AV
AIRBORNE OPERATIONS
The RQ-11B SUAS and containers were specifically designed to be able to fit inside a standard rucksack, and can be
carried inside the rucksack during airborne/parachutist operations, much like a radio or other mission equipment. In or-
der to protect and prepare the RQ-11B SUAS for airborne operations, the individual components should be packed in
such a way that they do not come loose inside the containers upon landing, and the containers should be placed in the
rucksack against the frame or in a way that will protect them during impact. The GCS/RVT controller screens and lap-
top (if used) should be padded and given extra protection using foam or bubble wrap.
The SUAS will be carried by a 2-man team. All GCS components will be padded and packed then placed into the GCS
soft pack. The GCS soft pack, AV battery, GCS rechargeable batteries, and RQ-11B soft pack contents, Figure 1, will
be rigged inside one jumper’s All Purpose Lightweight Individual Carrying Equipment (ALICE) pack or Parachute Drop
Bag (PDB). The second GCS soft pack, AV battery, GCS rechargeable batteries, and the RSTA kit contents Figure 2
will be rigged inside the other jumper’s ALICE pack or PDB.
Packing GCS Soft Pack Contents
1. Place uplink antenna and GCS mast inside mast bag.
2. Collapse controller hood flat and place a piece of felt on the hand controller window before placing the hood
on top of the hand controller. Wrap controller cord around controller and hood. Encase the hand controller
with felt and tape with a quick release.
3. Encase all components of the GCS with felt, cellulose wadding, or other suitable material to avoid metal-to-
metal contact. Tape all components with a quick release prior to placing them into the soft packs.
4. Place the hand controllers in the soft packs. Slide the hub unit in front of the hand controller, slide the RF unit
into the soft pack, and orient the RF unit perpendicular to hand controller and hub unit and align items at one
end.
NOTE
The soft packs should stand upright without assistance.
5. Slide the packed mast bag to the bottom of the soft pack.
6. Individually coil and tape the RF cable and the ethernet cable. Stack cables together and place in them in the
soft packs.
0031 00-1
0031 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
1. RF Unit 5. GCS Soft Pack

2. RF and Ethernet Cables 6. Antenna Mast, Mast Bag and Uplink Antenna
3. Hub Unit 7. Controller Hood
4. AV Soft Pack (Contents Packed) 8. Hand Controller
• AV Soft Pack 9. GCS Rechargeable Batteries
• Left Wing 10. AV Battery
• Stabilator
• Center Wing
• Right Wing
• IR Payload
• Field Repair Kit
• Fuselage
• Tailboom
• EO Payload
Figure 1. Jumper 1 GCS and AV Soft Pack Contents.
0031 00-2
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0031 00
Packing RSTA Kit Contents

1. Encase the RSTA laptop with any available packing material and tape in place with a quick release. Place
the RSTA laptop in the inside pouch of the ALICE pack facing the frame.
2. Roll open end and clip buckles of the soft pack. This will seal the bag from the outside environment. Place the
soft pack inside the ALICE pack standing upright and against the frame. Place the second GCS Soft Pack,
rechargeable batteries, and RSTA kit contents into one ALICE/PDB container. Place user unit’s packing list
of individual equipment inside the rucksack. Rig the ALICE pack or PDB IAW FM 3-21.220 (Parachuting
Techniques and Training) and FM 3-05.211 (Special Forces MFF Operations).
1. RF Unit
2. RF and Ethernet Cables
3. Hub Unit
4. RSTA Kit – Contents to be Rigged in ALICE Pack or PDB
5. Soft Pack
6. Antenna Mast, Mast Bag and Uplink Antenna
7. Controller Hood
8. Hand Controller
9. GCS/RVT Rechargeable Batteries
10. AV Battery
Figure 2. Jumper 2 RVT and RSTA Contents.
0031 00-3
0031 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
AV Contents
1. Place flying surfaces into the AV Soft Pack.
CAUTION
Ensure the propeller is aligned properly when sliding fuselage into the soft pack. If propeller is
not aligned, it could be damaged or broken before the airdrop.
2. Slide fuselage, tail first, into the AV Soft Pack. Place EO payload in remaining space next to fuselage, with
top of camera facing fuselage and back side flush with fuselage front bulkhead. Place the log book on top of
the AV Soft Pack.
NOTE
Not all AVs include an IR Payload.
3. Place the IR payload and FRK in the slots provided. Close the top and bottom of the AV Soft Pack.
4. Seal the case by pulling the bottom straps upward and snapping the straps on the side of the case. Place the
AV Soft Pack inside the approved container so it stands upright against the frame. Place the AV battery, GCS
rechargeable batteries, and GCS Soft Pack inside the ALICE pack or PDB.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0031 00-4
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0032 00
NSN 1550-01-538-9256 EIC: 60C
LOADING THE GPS CRYPTO-KEY (LRIP AND FRP)
INITIAL SETUP:
NA
LOADING THE CRYPTO-KEY

Keying devices compatible with the RQ-11B are the KYK-13, CYZ- 10 and KOI-18. The directions below refer to the
KYK-13.
NOTE
Do not Ship fuselage with keyed GPS.
For detailed instructions regarding loading the crypto key, refer to the following documents:
KYK-13: TM 11-5810-292-13&P
KOI-18: TM 9-1425-429-12, TM 9-1425-2586-10
CYZ-10: TM 11-5820-890-10-7
1. Power up GCS/RVT and move to GPS Info Screen. ( LRIP> WP 0006 00, Figure 15 < or FRP> WP 0007 00,
. . .
Figure 20 <)
.
2. Power up AV. Do not attach nose to fuselage.

3. Ensure that keying device is loaded with correct crypto–key.
The RQ-11B’s integrated MPE-S GB-GRAM GPS receiver is the same GPS receiver in the DAGR
handheld navigation devices. Therefore, the crypto-key is the same one used for the DAGR.
4. Ensure KYK-13 keying switch is in “OFF” position.
5. Connect metal connector on RQ-11B KYK adapter cable (Figure 1) to top of KYK-13 device. Connector is
spring loaded. Significant amount of force is required before twisting connector into position.
6. Connect plastic connector on RQ-11B KYK adapter cable to connector located on the front of fuselage.
Figure 1. KYK Adapter Cable.

7. Switch KYK-13 keying switch to “ON” position.
8. Red light on KYK-13 keying device continuously flashes.
0032 00-1
0032 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
LOADING THE CRYPTO-KEY - CONTINUED

9. Observe the GPS info screen for Crypto-Key Status. “Key Loaded”/”Key Correct for Today” indicates load
complete. ( LRIP> WP 0006 00, Table 5 < or FRP> WP 0007 00, Table 7 <)
. . . .
10. If crypto load is successful, switch KYK-13 keying switch to “OFF” position and remove RQ-11B KYK adapter
cable from airframe.
NOTE
It will take up to 12 minutes to download Almanac data from satellite to SAASM (GPS message
will read “Keyed-waiting for SV data).
11. If crypto load is unsuccessful, verify all connections and retry above procedure.

See LRIP> WP 0006 00 < or FRP> WP 0007 00 <.
. . . .
EXAMPLE OF COMSEC REQUEST FORM
1. ** DATE OF REQUEST: 3 October 2007

2. ** UNIT/SECTION: Example: 3/82 ABN
3. ** GRADE & NAME: SGT John Smith
4. ** SECURITY CLEARANCE: Secret
5. PURPOSE OF REQUEST: loading crypto key for Raven UAV
6. ** DATE COSMEC IS NEEDED/PICK UP: 5 October 2007
7. HOW LONG KEY MATERIAL WILL BE NEEDED: 1 year
8. ** EXPECTED RETURN DATE OF MATERIAL: 31 October 2008
9. TYPE OF EQUIPMENT TO BE USED: KYK-13/KOI-18/CZY-10
10. SHORT TITLE (S) IF KNOWN: USKAT 102040; USKAT 103040; AKAT-A1105
[REMARKS]
Red Key - AKAT-A1105
Black Key Electronic:
Black key algorithm update parameter (BKAUPD) - Short title USKAD 103040.
Black Group Unique Variable (GUV) - Short title USKAD 102040 Note if Punched key is
required:
If you need 8-level punch tape keys change the “D” to “T” (USKAT 102040 and USKAT 103040)
-------------------------------------------------
NOTE:
(same as PLGR and DAGR)
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0032 00-2
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0033 00
NSN 1550-01-538-9256 EIC: 60C
GPS DEGRADATION OR FAILURE (LRIP AND FRP)
INITIAL SETUP:
GPS DEGRADATION OR FAILURE

The RQ-11B SUAS navigates using a SAASM GPS engine and WGS84 datum. When keyed it is less susceptible to
jamming than commercial GPS engines and will not be affected by selective availability errors.
There are several ways the GPS can fail or degrade, including:
• Jammed signal.
• Damaged GPS unit, antenna, or connectors.
• Compromised GPS infrastructure.
GPS failure can result in:
• Complete loss of GPS function.
• Intermittent GPS function.
• Degraded location accuracy.
When the AV loses its GPS function, the GPS coordinates in the Hand Controller displays will begin to blink, indicating
a loss of GPS function. This data includes coordinates, time/date, GPS fix, range and bearing.
Preflight GPS Degradation/Loss
CAUTION
Conducting a mission without GPS or with degraded GPS data is a high-risk operation and
should be planned carefully before attempting. Mission importance will dictate if a mission
should be flown without GPS as it may result in the loss of AV.
In the event that the AV is unable to acquire satellites upon starting the system, it is still possible to fly a mission. This
is possible because RQ-11B is equipped with both a magnetic compass and a pressure altimeter. Both MAN and ALT
modes will function normally. GPS-based data will flash, indicating data not available.
Land navigation techniques can be used to navigate between known landmarks without using GPS. Pulling the nose up
momentarily to pick a feature on the horizon can help situational awareness. The semi-directional nature of the receiv-
ing antenna can allow a crude estimate of bearing from the GCS to the AV. The Vehicle Operator can fly a return-bearing
using the compass to return home.
GPS Fails During Flight
MAN and ALT modes will continue to function normally upon loss of GPS. A blinking GPS coordinate on the Hand Con-
troller screen indicates loss of GPS function. The last known position will continue to be displayed, but the blinking indi-
cates that the data is not being updated. Without functioning GPS, it is necessary to rely on land navigation techniques.
HOME, LOIT, and NAV modes rely on GPS guidance and will not function normally upon loss of GPS.
• If GPS fails in NAV or HOME mode, the AV is programmed to maintain its present altitude and fly at zero turn rate
while it waits for GPS guidance. The AV flight path will respond to joystick input in this circumstance.
• If GPS fails in LOIT mode or in NAV mode when an Orbit Waypoint is set as the active waypoint, the AV is
programmed to maintain its present altitude and continue the left turn at a constant turn rate. The AV flight path
will not respond to joystick input in this circumstance.
0033 00-1
0033 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
GPS DEGRADATION OR FAILURE - CONTINUED
It is recommended that the VO switch to ALT mode and navigate using land navigation techniques if GPS loss is pro-
longed. If GPS function returns, the VO may resume operation in HOME, LOIT, or NAV mode.
GPS FAILURE WITH LOL

The AV must have functioning uplink for manual control and/or GPS for self navigation. The AV can be guided in MAN
or ALT mode without GPS, provided that the uplink is still functioning. If the uplink is not functioning, the AV can navi-
gate autonomously using GPS guidance in LOL mode. If the AV has neither uplink nor GPS, it will enter Autoland.
GPS Fails Before LOL
When GPS fails, a 30-second timer begins to count down. If the AV enters LOL mode any time after 30 continuous sec-
onds without GPS, the AV will Autoland. The AV will continue to operate without GPS if the duration of uplink dropouts
remain shorter than 3 seconds.
GPS Fails After LOL
When uplink is interrupted, a 3-second timer begins to count down. If uplink does not return within 3 seconds, the AV
will enter LOL mode. While operating in LOL mode, if the GPS fails for longer than 30 continuous seconds, the AV will
enter Autoland. The AV will continue to operate in LOL mode if the duration of GPS dropouts remain shorter than 30
seconds. These procedures are outlined in Table 1.
Table 1. GPS Failure.
Flight Display AV Action Vehicle Operator Required Action

Mode
MAN, ALT. Blinking GPS N/A. Fly back azimuth of bearing (return to GCS/RVT)
Data. or continue mission.
HOME, Blinking GPS Fly Straight Change to MAN or ALT. Fly back azimuth return to
NAV. Data. recovery site or continue mission.
LOIT, NAV Blinking GPS Steady left turn. Change to MAN or ALT. Fly back azimuth return to
@ Orbit pt. Data. recovery site or continue mission.
LOL. Blinking GPS Flies straight, holds altitude Note AV location and recover downed AV.
Data. for 30 seconds, then
Autolands.
At System Blinking Data Reports raw, uncorrected 1. Reboot AV
Start-up. (no GPS lock). pressure data (altitude may 2. Replace fuselage
be off). 3. If necessary, replace GPS battery or fly
mission without GPS (or abort mission)
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0033 00-2
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0034 00
NSN 1550-01-538-9256 EIC: 60C
SIMULATOR (LRIP AND FRP)
INITIAL SETUP:
Equipment Condition
RQ-11B SUAS Assembled (WP 0010 00)
OVERVIEW
The SUAS simulator is a device used to develop skills and maintain proficiency with the RQ-11B System. The simula-
tor interfaces with GCS hardware and displays simulated imagery on the hand controller. This software mimics all func-
tions and flight modes of the AV in order to create a realistic flight environment, but is not designed as a mission plan-
ning/mission rehearsal tool. This system is paired with the RSTA laptop and associated software which allows mission
scenarios, malfunctions and troubleshooting techniques to be exercised. These functions are explained in this section.
Hardware Components and Software Required
Figure 1. Simulator Hardware.
To operate the SUAS Simulator the following components are required:

1. RSTA Laptop
2. Simulator Interface Dongle
3. GCS Battery
4. GCS Hand Controller
5. GCS Hub
6. GCS RF Cable
0034 00-1
0034 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
OVERVIEW – CONTINUED
Optional Components
• FlightGear World Scenery DVDs: These DVDs can be used to install scenery in order to fly anywhere in the
world.
• GCS ethernet cable. The simulator may be used with FalconView RPUAV tool.
General Layout
Flight Parameters are displayed on the left side of the Simulator screen at all times. This information includes AV loca-
tion or MGRS , lat./long, range, bearing, altitude, and current flight mode, among other flight parameters. See Figure 2
and Table 1 for more information on the Flight Parameters and functions of the Simulator Status panel.
The Simulator main screens (Preflight, Status, Location, Environment) are selected by selecting one of four buttons
located at the bottom of the Simulator screen at all times. The currently-selected screen button is shaded yellow. For
more information regarding the four main screens, see Figure 2 through Figure 5 and Table 1 through Table 4.
Figure 2. Flight Information.
0034 00-2
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0034 00
Table 1. Flight Information Features.
No. Feature Description

1 Flight Parameters MGRS or LAT/LONG
Range and Bearing from HOME waypoint
Ind. Airspeed
MSL Altitude
AGL Altitude
Magnetic Heading
Flight Mode
Camera
Rally Mode
Rally Altitude
2 Simulator Status FLIGHT GEAR (FG) Comm Status: Offline or connected
GCU (GCS) Comm
3 Freeze Flight Used to pause simulator, toggle between Freeze/Unfreeze
4 Start FlightGear Starts or Stops Flight Gear
Menus
Figure 3. Menu Features.
0034 00-3
0034 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
Table 2. Menu Features.

1 File Exit Simulator.
2 Options > Location MGRS or Lat/Long
Type
2 Options > COMM Turn off ports if port is needed for other purposes or in case of communication
Active problems. Simulated AV will go into Loss-of-Link (LOL) mode if GCU COMM
is inactive.
2 Options > View Camera/User Select or Heads-Up. When launching or landing, or if the AV is
nearby, it is possible to observe the AV by selecting “Heads-up” (watching the
AV rather than using the cameras to see). Turning the cameras off with the
hand controllers also enables heads-up display, when “Camera/User Select”
is chosen.
2 Options > Aircraft Ensure proper aircraft (Raven) is selected.
Type
3 Help About: Simulator version and distribution information.
Preflight Screen
Figure 4. Preflight Screen Features.
0034 00-4
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0034 00
Table 3. Preflight Screen Features.

1 MODE Indicates which mode is selected.
2 GPS STARTUP Indicates status of GPS startup.
3 Launch Control Control functions of connect battery, preflight and launch.
4 Air Vehicle AV channel control for AV channels.
Channel
5 UL Transmitter Uplink transmitter status on/off.
6 GCU Channel GCS channel status selected via the hand controller.
7 Throttle Throttle and stick position indicators show controller positions.
8 Launch Heading Launch heading control. Wind direction must be within 30 degrees to launch.
Status Screen
Figure 5. Status Screen Features.
0034 00-5
0034 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
Table 4. Status Screen Features.

1 Loss of Description: Data fails to downlink from AV.
Downlink
Indication: Link status bar will fall to zero and display a red bar with a clock symbol. All
AV data parameters will begin to flash, indicating the data is obsolete.
2 Loss of Uplink Description: Commands from GCS fail to uplink to AV.
Indication: Link status bar will fall to zero and display a red bar with a clock symbol. AV
enters Rally mode and flies according to scenario set for rally. Controller commands
have no effect but data and video are present.
3 Loss of Video Description: Video fails to downlink, screen appears blank.
Indication: Black video display, switching cameras has no effect. (Data continues to
update)
4 Front Look Description: Front camera fails to produce video.
Fail
Indications: No video signal when front camera is selected.
5 Active Selects camera failure malfunction that corresponds with currently selected camera.
Camera (Other camera should operate normally)
6 Side Look Fail Description: Side camera fails to produce video.
Indication: No video signal when side camera is selected.
7 GPS Failure Description: GPS fails to receive data.

Indication: Position, range, and bearing information on GCS controller screen begin to
flash, indicating invalid data.
8 GPS Keyed Check to indicate GPS is keyed.
9 Motor Failure Description: Motor fails to propel AV.
Indication: Battery voltage increases. AV begins to descend and will not respond to
increased throttle or altitude commands.
10 Battery Indicates minutes left on current battery charge.
Charge
0034 00-6
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0034 00
Location Screen
Figure 6. Location Screen Features.
Table 5. Location Screen Features.
1 Pan and Zoom Pan and zoom using buttons or using mouse scroll wheel.
Buttons
2 Location Screen Display location of AV along flight path.
3 Slew Slew buttons quickly move AV in desired direction. When in NAV or HOME
mode, waypoint button appears and allows instructor/operator to slew toward
waypoint.
4 Load and Save Load and save GCS AV origin locations.
5 MGRS or Displays AV origin location coordinates in MGRS or Latitude/Longitude
Lat/Long
0034 00-7
0034 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
Environment Screen
Figure 7. Environment Screen Features.
Table 6. Environment Screen Features.

1 Visibility Simulates fog
2 Time of Day Changes brightness of environment
3 Winds Aloft Specify height in feet AGL and wind speed and direction.
4 Turbulence Level Simulates random disturbances in flight dynamics. Level defaults
to 3.
5 Tie to Winds Aloft Checking “Tie to Winds Aloft” allows corresponding “Surface
Winds” and “Winds Aloft” sliders to be dragged together, simulating
uniform wind conditions both at the surface and aloft. Surface winds
and winds aloft may be adjusted separately (leave box unchecked).
Wind velocity will vary linearly from the surface to transition height,
above which the wind will be uniform.
6 Surface Winds Specify surface wind speed and direction.
0034 00-8
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0034 00
INSTALLING
FlightGear World Scenery Installer:
Follow these steps to install or remove scenery from the laptop.
1. Open “Scenery Installer” icon on the desktop. (C:/Program Files/SUAV Simulator/Scenery Installer/Scenery
Installer.exe)
NOTE
Blue squares indicate scenery already installed.
2. Select one or more green squares to install scenery for the desired location and select “Apply”.
NOTE
Operator will be prompted to insert the appropriate “FlightGear World Scenery” disk. D drive
should be automatically prompted.
3. Click “OK”.
4. To remove scenery, select one or more blue squares of scenery desired to be removed, the box will turn red
and select “Apply”.
SETUP
SETTING UP SIMULATOR
1. Turn RSTA laptop on and log on after boot up.
2. Connect Simulator Dongle to PC’s serial and video ports.
3. Connect the Simulator Dongle Cable to the RF Port on the GCS Hub, using the GCS RF Cable.
4. Connect GCS Hand Controller to Hub Unit .
5. Attach battery to Hub Unit.
6. Enable secondary display:
a. Right-click on desktop area of the RSTA laptop.
b. Select “Properties” from popup menu.
c. Select “Settings” tab on the Display Properties menu. (Figure 8)
0034 00-9
0034 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
SETUP - CONTINUED
d. Verify “Display #2”, “Attached.”
Figure 8. Display Properties.
(1) Left click on the smaller white box #2.

(2) Click/verify that “Extend my windows on to this monitor” is checked.
e. Confirm 800 x 600 screen resolution, 32-bit color quality.
f. Click “Apply.”
7. Confirm Windows background is visible on GCS Hand Controller.
8. Click “OK” to accept setting and close the Display Properties window.
9. Optional, connect GCS ethernet cable between the RSTA laptop and the laptop port on Hub.
Figure 9. Simulator Hardware Setup.
RUNNING THE SIMULATOR
0034 00-10
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0034 00
SETUP - CONTINUED
1. Right-click SUAV Sim icon and select “Open”. It is normal to see a “console” window appear briefly; it
indicates that FlightGear has started running (Allow up to a 30 second delay for the simulator to launch).
2. Wait for FlightGear (scenery generator software in GCS screen) to initialize. Do not press “Start FlightGear”
unless FlightGear has been stopped. It will start on its own.
3. Select Options, Aircraft Type and verify aircraft is set to RAVEN.
NOTE
Wasp checkmark will not deactivate until AV simulator is restarted.
4. Select Location screen and select AV Initialization location by either typing in a coordinate or clicking the
“Open” icon folder and selecting a location name. (See Figure 6, Item 4).
5. Select preflight screen. (See Figure 4).
6. Press “Connect Battery” button to simulate installing AV battery.
7. Once GPS countdown is complete, click Preflight button (in center of Preflight Screen) and follow steps
presented on screen. Preflight procedure may be bypassed.
8. Select heads-up mode by turning cameras off in GCS hand controller.
9. Confirm launch into wind.
10. Confirm throttle is at 100%.
11. Press “Launch” button.
12. Fly mission.
13. Under File menu, select Exit.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0034 00-11/12 blank

TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0035 00
NSN 1550-01-538-9256 EIC: 60C
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES (LRIP AND FRP)
INITIAL SETUP:
NA
GENERAL INFORMATION
Preventing AV loss or damage depends on early recognition of dangerous flight conditions or malfunctions followed
by appropriate corrective action. Operators should memorize the immediate action items of each emergency proce-
dure.
Accurate decision making depends on thorough understanding of system operation and behavior. Crew effective-
ness in an emergency requires preparation. Mission planning must include alternative courses of action available
for each phase of the proposed flight. To the extent possible, planned courses of actions for emergencies should be
made before the flight begins.
Continually monitor data to notice anomalies as soon as they develop. During flight, both operators must maintain
situational awareness and VO should always know which direction to fly the AV to clear a hazard.
MO: Should always know AV position relative to hazards and be ready to give VO headings and altitudes to fly to
safety.
IMMEDIATE ACTION ITEMS
Those steps that must be performed immediately in an emergency are underlined and in bold print. The operators
should be able to perform these steps without referencing the checklist or manual. Non-underlined steps can be ac-
complished with use of the checklist.
Recovery of downed AV procedures are listed at the end of this section.
NOTE
The urgency of certain emergencies requires immediate action and instinctive action by the
operator. The most important single consideration is safety of personnel. All procedures are
subordinate to this requirement.
These Emergency procedures assume that the LOL Setting is LAND AT RALLY and that the RALLY Waypoints and
the Rally Altitude are properly set.
If AV cannot maintain flight, command AUTOLAND prior to impact.
During emergencies, the MISSION OPERATOR (MO) is to
• Ensure the recording device is capturing AV and video data

• Maintain awareness of vehicle position, altitude and wind conditions
• Assist the Vehicle Operator with navigation
• Communicate with other units (i.e. Airspace Control Authority)
• Complete the Checklist items
0035 00-1
0035 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
LOSS OF DOWNLINK
Loss of downlink is characterized by progressive deterioration in video quality which may or may not be accom-
plished by a reduced indication on the Link Status Bar (LSB). Loss of downlink may be a temporary condition caused
by signal interference or the result of equipment malfunction. This condition may be independent of uplink condition.
WARNING
When location and/or control of air vehicle is in doubt, perform appropriate procedures to
notify Airspace Control Authority and/or manned aircraft in the vicinity. Report last known
MGRS location, heading, altitude, and flight time remaining on current battery power.
CAUTION
DO NOT try to fly back within reception range by commanding HOME. Without downlink,
there is no way to verify that the AV has received this instruction. If unable to restore downlink
promptly, the delay in causing MANUAL EN ROUTE RALLY increases uncertainty of AV
position and flight status. Perform landing under operator control when able. Automatic
Autoland by reaching Rally waypoint is not as accurate. Failure to comply may result in
damage or loss of equipment.
NOTE
Loss of downlink at ranges of 1KM is usually an indication of a malfunctioning or improperly

installed tailboom assembly. Recover the Air Vehicle and troubleshoot the tailboom.
NOTE
Do not inadvertently make inputs without functioning downlink to verify resulting action.
Operate with a RVT whenever possible to provide an independent source of downlink.
1. Check orientation of downlink antenna.

2. Command turn and climb - Perform 12 seconds turn and climb. If video or LSB returns, continue mission
as required.
3. Turn off Radio transmitter - to force Loss of Link (LOL).
4. Look for “EN ROUTE RALLY” message on Hand Controller assuming Loss of Link set at RALLY.
5. If video or down link returns, turn ON Radio transmitter, take control of AV and continue mission as required.
6. MO -
• Perform appropriate procedures to notify airspace control authority.

• Ensure AV Screener is recording
• Monitor AV Location - note position, heading and altitude
• Record MGRS coordinates if AUTOLAND message is received
0035 00-2
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0035 00
LOSS OF UPLINK
Loss of uplink is characterized by lack of AV response to GCS control inputs, accompanied by a reduced indication
on the Link Status Bar (LSB). This condition is independent of downlink condition.
WARNING
When location and/or control of air vehicle is in doubt, perform appropriate procedures to
notify Airspace Control Authority and/or manned aircraft in the vicinity. Report last known
MGRS location, heading, altitude, and flight time remaining on current battery power.
NOTE
Any delay in commanding Loss of Link increases the uncertainty of AV position and flight
status.
1. Turn off transmitter - to force Loss of Llink (LOL) RALLY mode.

2. Look for “EN ROUTE RALLY” message on Hand Controller. (Assuming Loss of Link set at RALLY.)
3. If Link Status Bar indicates link has been restored - turn ON Radio transmitter, take control of AV and
continue mission as required.
4. MO -
• Perform appropriate procedures to notify airspace control authority.
• Ensure AV Screener is recording
• Monitor AV Location - note position, heading and altitude
• Record MGRS coordinates if AUTOLAND message is received
GPS FAILURE
Loss of GPS in flight is characterized by a value less than 4+ in the GPS Fix field and flashing data in all GPS related
fields.
CAUTION
Do not command LOSS OF LINK during GPS failure.
NOTE
It is still possible to continue mission without GPS signal using ALT or MAN mode; however
this increases the risk of air vehicle loss.
1. Select ALT Mode.

2. Set CMD ALT to safe altitude.
3. Turn AV towards the GCS - use the back azimuth of last known AV bearing or terrain association to fly
towards landing site.
4. Use the GCS downlink antenna to estimate bearing to AV.
5. MO -
Ensure AV Screener is recording
Monitor AV Location - note position, heading and altitude
0035 00-3
0035 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
STRUCTURAL FAILURE
Loss of Components In Flight
1. Command Autoland.
2. Record Location.
3. Recover AV. See RECOVERY OF DOWNED AV.
EXTREME LOW AV BATTERY (<19V)

1. Switch to MAN mode and maintain altitude with throttle. (55 to 60 % power required to maintain
altitude.)
2. Select suitable landing area.
3. Autoland.
4. Record location.
5. Recover AV. See RECOVERY OF DOWNED AV.
NO HUB COM WARNING (AV IN LOSS OF LINK)

If a “NO HUB COM” warning message appears on the Hand Controller,
1. Immediately cycle power to GCS Hub:
a. Disconnect batteries from Hub. Do not “HOT-SWAP”.
b. Reconnect batteries to Hub.
NOTE: - transmitter is OFF (TX OFF)
- Hub is commanding AUTOLAND (flashing)
- AV is in Loss of Link RALLY Mode (EN ROUTE RALLY)
2. IF the “NO HUB COM” warning disappears within five (5) seconds of GCS restart - VO assume control of
AV.
a. Push Hot Key - to cancel the AUTOLAND command.
b. Select flight mode (MAN, ALT, HOME, LOIT, NAV).
c. Adjust mode settings (%Throttle / CMD ALT / REROUTE to Waypoint)
d. If MO method was Hand Controller, load last mission used.
e. Turn ON Transmitter.
f. Press Enter Button - to ABORT RALLY and accept flight mode changes.
3. If NO HUB COM warning persists - Allow AV to RALLY.
4. MO -
Ensure AV Screener is recording
Monitor AV Location - note position, heading and altitude
Record MGRS coordinate when AUTOLAND message is received
HAND CONTROLLER FAILS

1. Disconnect hand controller.
• This will force Loss of Link RALLY mode. (Assuming Loss of Link set at RALLY.)
2. Monitor AV location.
3. Replace with spare hand controller.
• If VO takes control of AV by turning on transmitter the AV will be in the same mode as it was prior to
failure.
0035 00-4
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0035 00
ALTITUDE HOLD FAILURE
CAUTION
Dash mode should be avoided. Excessive forward stick can cause AV to impact ground.
1. Enter MAN mode.
2. Fly back to recovery site or continue mission in degraded mode.
a. Maintain attitude with throttle (55 to 60% power required to maintain altitude.)
b. Assist with joystick if necessary.
3. Recover AV.
STEADY TURN DEVELOPS AT NEUTRAL STICK

2. If altitude permits, come out of Autoland enter manual mode and reacquire control of the AV.
3. If control regained, RTB.
4. If control is not regained, command Autoland
5. Recover AV.
AV OSCILLATES UP/DOWN OR RIGHT/LEFT

2. If altitude permits, come out of Autoland enter manual mode and reacquire control of the AV.
3. If control regained, RTB.
4. If control is not regained, command Autoland.
5. Recover AV.
RECOVERY OF DOWNED AV
1. Preserve Data. Record all last good AV data before disconnecting GCS/RVT power. Save flight recording
for review, perform screen capture.
2. GCS/RVT As Locator. The RQ-11B battery should not disconnect on landing. AV may continue to transmit
downlink signal. AV nose disconnects on landing so video image will be black. Black video (not snow)
indicates video transmission from AV with nose disconnected. Downlink antenna (directional) can be used
as a direction finder. AV is towards direction that produces black video, not snow. If GPS is working, AV
GPS position will be received by GCS/RVT if within range.
3. Make notes of operator’s last actions and last observation of AV video using SUAS incident form
WP 0068 00.
INTRUSION OF AIRSPACE BY LOW ALTITUDE AIRCRAFT

Low altitude aircraft may intrude on operating airspace without warning. Due to the RQ-11B’s low visual signature,
the manned aircraft may not be able to see and avoid in time to prevent collision. To minimize unnecessary risk, AV
operators should employ safe en route altitudes in areas with a high volume low altitude traffic.
0035 00-5
0035 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
If low altitude aircraft unexpectedly approach mission area:

1. Estimate intruding aircraft altitude.
2. If aircraft is at or below AV altitude, climb immediately.
3. If aircraft is above AV altitude, maintain or descend.
4. Contact airspace control authority or aircraft as applicable.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0035 00-6
TM 1-1550-695-13&P
CHAPTER 3
FIELD LEVEL MAINTENANCE
TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
FOR
SMALL UNMANNED AIRCRAFT SYSTEM
(RQ-11B)
(NSN: 1550-01-538-9256)
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0036 00
FIELD MAINTENANCE
NSN 1550-01-538-9256 EIC: 60C
INTRODUCTION TO TROUBLESHOOTING (LRIP AND FRP)
INTRODUCTION TO TROUBLESHOOTING
Use the Troubleshooting Index to locate the fault. The index points to the correct method for troubleshooting the
RQ-11B SUAS.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0036 00-1/2 blank

TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0037 00
FIELD MAINTENANCE
NSN 1550-01-538-9256 EIC: 60C
TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX (LRIP AND FRP)
Malfunction/Symptom Troubleshooting Procedure
1. Intermittent Or No GPS Signal............................................................................ ............................WP 0038 00

2. Loss Of Video On GCS ....................................................................................... ............................WP 0039 00
3. Loss Of Data Overlay On GCS........................................................................................................WP 0040 00
4. Throttle Control Malfunction............................................................................................................WP 0041 00
5. Roll Gyro, Yaw Gyro, Stabilator, Rudder or Autoland Engage Malfunction .......... ............................WP 0042 00
6. Pitot Tube System Malfunction ........................................................................... ............................WP 0043 00
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0037 00-1/2 blank

TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0038 00
FIELD MAINTENANCE
NSN 1550-01-538-9256 EIC: 60C
INTERMITTENT OR NO GPS SIGNAL
INITIAL SETUP: Equipment Condition

Personnel Required RQ-11B SUAS Assembled (WP 0010 00)
Operator (2)
TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE
INTERMITTENT OR NO GPS SIGNAL
SYMPTOM
MALFUNCTION
GPS position information flashes on Hand Controller video
screen or GPS has not successfully counted down.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
NOTE
The GPS position information flashes when the system is first activated. Once the GPS signal
has been acquired, the position information stops flashing, a 15-second countdown occurs,
and the time/date field is populated. This should take one to two minutes, but can take up to 40
minutes if almanac requires updating (i.e. backup battery has been replaced).
1. Determine if system has lost link.

2. Wait two minutes, check GPS status page for aging (counting up) reboot.
3. If indication continues and downlink is functional, ensure AV is minimum of 30 feet from GCS/RVT and
unobstructed view of sky.
4. If indication continues swap fuselage.
5. If indication continues refer to next higher level of maintenance.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0038 00-1/2 blank

TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0039 00
FIELD MAINTENANCE
NSN 1550-01-538-9256 EIC: 60C
NO VIDEO OR DEGRADED VIDEO ON GCS/RVT


Operator (2)
NO VIDEO OR DEGRADED VIDEO ON GCS/RVT
SYMPTOM
MALFUNCTION
No video on the Hand Controller screen, data overlay good.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
1. Verify no other systems are operating nearby that may cause interference. (This can be done cycling through
the channels with the transmitter turned off.)
2. If indication continues verify video function is enabled using the payload control button on hand controller.
3. If indication continues Switch camera views. Confirm GCS recognizes correct payload.
4. Verify the downlink filter on the RF Unit is in the proper configuration for the channel being used. See
WP 0057 01.
5. If indication continues check connections between Hand Controller, GCS Hub, Tailboom and RF unit.
6. Remove AV battery, clean and inspect camera connections, reinstall camera and reinstall battery.
7. If indication continues swap payload with spare to determine if fault lies within the camera.
8. If indication continues swap tailboom.
10. If indication continues swap Hand Controller.
11. If indication continues swap Hub.
CAUTION
Plugging in or unplugging a RF Unit into a Hub while the Hub is powered may result in permanent
damage to the Hub and/or RF Unit.
12. If indication continues swap RF Unit.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0039 00-1/2 blank Change 1 – 11 June 2008

TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0040 00
FIELD MAINTENANCE
NSN 1550-01-538-9256 EIC: 60C
NO DATA OVERLAY ON GCS/RVT


Operator (2)
NO DATA OVERLAY ON GCS
SYMPTOM
MALFUNCTION
No data overlay on the Hand Controller screen.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
1. Verify no other systems are operating nearby that may cause interference. (This can be done cycling through
the channels.)
2. If indication continues verify transmitter is turned on.
3. If indication continues verify GCS/RVT and AV are on the same channel.
4. Verify the downlink filter on the RF Unit is in the proper configuration for the channel being used. See
WP 0057 01.
5. If indication continues check connections between Hand Controller, GCS/RVT Hub, Tailboom and RF unit.
6. Remove AV battery, clean payload connections, reinstall camera and reinstall battery.
7. If indication continues swap tailboom.
9. If indication continues swap Hand Controller.
10. If indication continues swap Hub.
CAUTION
Plugging in or unplugging a RF Unit into a Hub while the Hub is powered may result in permanent
damage to the Hub and/or RF Unit.
11. If indication continues swap RF Unit.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0041 00
FIELD MAINTENANCE
NSN 1550-01-538-9256 EIC: 60C
THROTTLE CONTROL MALFUNCTION

Operator (2)
THROTTLE CONTROL MALFUNCTION
SYMPTOM
MALFUNCTION
Propeller/motor does not spin when throttle engaged. (All other AV functions normal)
CORRECTIVE ACTION
WARNING
A rotating propeller can cause personal injury or equipment damage. Keep all body parts clear
of the propeller and keep the propeller arc clear of obstruction when inserting the battery and at
all times when the battery is installed.
1. Verify channel transmitter on, MAN mode selected and throttle engaged.
2. Reboot AV (verify beep, propeller twitch and stabilator goes to Autoland).
3. Transmitter on, MAN mode selected and throttle engaged.
4. When throttle control is increased.
a. Verify Hand Controller indicates 100% and propeller not moving, replace fuselage.
b. If throttle switch movement does not indicate 100%, replace Hand Controller.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0041 00-1/2 blank

TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0042 00
FIELD MAINTENANCE
NSN 1550-01-538-9256 EIC: 60C
ROLL GYRO, YAW GYRO, STABILATOR, RUDDER OR AUTOLAND ENGAGE MALFUNCTION

Operator (2)
ROLL GYRO, YAW GYRO, STABILATOR, RUDDER OR AUTOLAND ENGAGE MALFUNCTION
SYMPTOM
MALFUNCTION
Stabilator and/or rudder do not move during preflight gyro check.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
WARNING
Prior to performing troubleshooting procedures, the battery must be removed. Failure to comply
may result in injury to personnel.
1. Remove battery.
2. Remove tailboom and inspect fuselage and tailboom connectors for misalignment, debris and bent or broken
pins. Check servos for freedom of movement. Check control linkages and stabilator horn.
3. Ensure stabilator clips are serviceable and no debris in stabilator horn receptacle and reattach stabilator.
4. Attach tailboom ensuring it is fully secured.
5. Install battery.
6. If problem persists replace tailboom and reboot.
7. If problem persists replace fuselage.
8. If problem persists replace hand controller.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0042 00-1/2 blank

TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0043 00
FIELD MAINTENANCE
NSN 1550-01-538-9256 EIC: 60C
PITOT SYSTEM MALFUNCTION

Operator (2)
PITOT SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
SYMPTOM
MALFUNCTION
Stabilator does not move during preflight check of the Pitot Tube.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
WARNING
Prior to performing troubleshooting procedures, the battery must be removed. Failure to comply
CAUTION
Do not clean debris from Pitot Tube while it is installed on the AV. Failure to comply could result
in equipment damage.
1. Remove Pitot Tube IAW WP 0053 00.
2. Inspect for debris, moisture or damage.
3. Replace with new Pitot Tube (recommended) or trim to no less than 1/2 inch (use Snap Screw for measuring
device) and reinstall.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0043 00-1/2 blank

TM 1-1550-695-13&P
CHAPTER 4
FIELD LEVEL
MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
FOR
(RQ-11B)
(NSN: 1550-01-538-9256)
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0044 00
FIELD MAINTENANCE
NSN 1550-01-538-9256 EIC: 60C
SERVICE UPON RECEIPT (LRIP AND FRP)

INITIAL SETUP:
References
WP 0066 00
SERVICE UPON RECEIPT OF MATERIEL

UNPACKING
1. Inspect packaging cases for damage.
2. Unpack, and inspect the equipment for damage incurred during shipment. If the equipment has been
damaged, report the damage on SF 361, Transportation Discrepancy Report.
3. Inspect for GPS fill battery date, remove pull tab as required, replace as necessary.
4. Ensure 8 Ch RF Unit is properly configured for Area Of Responsibility. See WP 0057 01 and WP 0003 00,
Table 2
5. Inventory the equipment, and compare against WP 0066 00, Table 1 to see if the shipment is complete.
Report all discrepancies in accordance with applicable service instructions (e.g., for Army instructions, see
DA PAM 750-8).
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0045 00
FIELD MAINTENANCE

NSN 1550-01-538-9256 EIC: 60C
INTRODUCTION PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES (PMCS) (LRIP AND FRP)
INTRODUCTION PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES FOR SUAS
The SUAS should be inspected frequently and prior to each flight for damage. Any repairs that are not detailed in this
section will require turn-in. Frequency of inspection is dependent upon environmental conditions, frequency of use,
and unit Standing Operating Procedures (SOP).
1. This PMCS has been provided so equipment is kept in operating condition and ready for use.
a. Warnings and Cautions. Always observe the WARNINGs and CAUTIONs appearing in the PMCS
table. WARNINGs and CAUTIONs appear before applicable procedures. Observe these WARN-
INGs and CAUTIONs to prevent serious injury to personnel or damage to equipment.
b. Explanations of Table Entries.
(1) Item No. Column. Numbers in this column are for reference. When completing DA Forms 5988
(Equipment Inspection and Maintenance Worksheet), include the table and item number for
the check/service indicating a fault. Table number and item numbers also appear in the order
in which they must be performed.
(2) Interval Column. This column shows when to perform the procedure in the procedure column.
(a) The BEFORE (B) procedures must be done before launch or use of the equipment for its
intended mission.
(b) DURING (D) procedures must be done during operation or while using the equipment for
its intended mission.
(c) AFTER (A) procedures must be done upon completion of the mission day.
(d) WEEKLY (W) procedures must be done weekly.
(e) QUARTERLY(Q) procedures must be done quarterly.
(f) ANNUALLY(AN) procedures must be done annually.
(3) Item To Be Checked/Serviced Column. This column provides the location and the item to be
checked or serviced. The item location is underlined.
(4) Procedure Column. This column gives the procedure to check or service the item listed in the
Check/Service column to know if the equipment is ready or available for its intended mission or
for operation. The procedure must be performed at the time specified in the interval column
(5) Equipment Not Ready/Available If: Column. Information in this column shows what faults will
keep equipment from being capable of performing its mission. If a check or service Procedures
shows faults listed in this column, do not operate the equipment. Follow SOP for maintaining
the equipment or reporting equipment failure.
0045 00-1
0045 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
IDENTIFY FAULT
WARNING
Prior to performing maintenance procedures, the battery must be removed. Failure to comply
NOTE
Use a charged battery when attempting to identify electrical problems.
There are three main ways to identify problems with the AV:
• Conduct a visual inspection.

• Observe incorrect response to correct input.
• Swap working parts from a working AV to identify whether or not a part is damaged.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0045 00-2
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0046 00
FIELD MAINTENANCE
NSN 1550-01-538-9256 EIC: 60C
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES (PMCS) (LRIP AND FRP)
INITIAL SETUP:
NA
Table 1. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES FOR RQ-11B SUAS AV.
ITEM INTERVAL MAN- ITEM TO BE PROCEDURE EQUIPMENT

NO. HOUR CHECKED OR NOT READY/
SERVICED AVAILABLE IF:
1 B, A AV a. Inventory AVs. Less than 1

complete AV.
2 B, A EO/IR- a. Inventory Payloads. Less than 1 EO and

Payloads. 1 IR serviceable
Payload.
b. Check for dents in skin. Unable to mount
payload or
interferes with
camera.
c. Check camera lenses and clean lens with lens Lens cracked or
camel hair brush and/or glass cloth. severely pitted.
d. Check nose/fuselage connectors for cracks Broken or missing.
and secure connection.
e. Check that electrical contacts are free of grit or Both pins recessed
dust and are not damaged. on any one
channel.
f. Check upper and lower mounting clips. Cracks or
connections not
secure.
3 B, A Left/Right a. Check for dents, tears, cracks, and delamina- Unable to repair
and Cen- tion in skin. with FRK.
ter Wings.
b. Check for buckling in wing spar caps (rein- Damage to wing
forcing structure in wing that appears as gray spar caps prevents
shadow along length of center wing and wing AV from flying.
tips). Visually check for damage to wing spar
caps.
c. Check wing cup (molded holes in center wing) Loose or missing.
where wing pins are inserted.
d. Check O-Rings on left and right wing pin Damaged or
for damage (these hold left and right wings missing.
securely to the center wing).
0046 00-1
0046 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
Table 1. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES FOR RQ-11B SUAS AV. - Continued

e. Check that wing pins (that hold wing tip to Broken or missing.
center wing) are not damaged.
f. Check snap screw on the center wing for Damaged or
damage. missing.
g. Check that leading edge of wing has main- >50% of leading
tained its shape. edge up to 1/4”
deep.
h. Check that wing centering pins are intact. Missing.
4 B, A, Q Fuselage. a. Check for dents, tears, cracks, and delamina- Unable to repair
tion in skin. with FRK.
b. Check snap screw. Broken, missing, or
stripped.
c. Check that electrical contacts are free of grit or Bent, broken,
dust. missing.
d. Check that antenna is intact. Less than 6” or
missing.
e. Check that landing pad is secure and not Detached or
damaged. missing.
f. Check bulkhead and wing mount for fractures. Unable to mount
battery or wing
properly.
g. Check the pitot tube alignment, length, and Bent, missing, < 1/2
washer. inch.
h. Check Fuselage Screws to ensure they are Screws missing or
present and secure. unsecure.
5 B, A Propeller. a. Check propeller for cracks, nicks, and stress Broken, fractured,
fractures. or missing.
b. Check that propeller is secure. Ensure the Broken, missing.
spinner cap and retention nut are secure.
c. Check motor shaft is not bent. Bent.
d. Check Propeller Spinner and Nut. Broken, missing or
threads stripped.
e. Check motor temperature indicator. Indicator is black.
6 B, A Tailboom. a. Check for dents, tears, cracks, and delamina- Unable to repair
tion in skin. with FRK.
b. Check that tailboom fastens securely to Unable to mount
fuselage. tailboom.
c. Check that electrical contacts are free of grit or Broken or
dust. damaged.
0046 00-2
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0046 00
Table 1. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES FOR RQ-11B SUAS AV. - Continued

d. Check Antenna connector ensure connector Connector

detent is functional. damaged. Detent
not spring loaded.
e. Check that stabilizer horn pivot housing is Screws stripped,
firmly seated in end of tailboom. missing.
f. Check that stabilizer pivot pin is centered in Bent or missing.
housing and housing is secured.
g. Check both servo arms and linkages for Damaged.
damage or separation.
h. Check stabilator horn with ball for damage and Fractured, milky
play. white discoloration.
7 B, A Stabilator. a. Check for dents, tears, cracks, and delamina- Unable to repair
tion in skin. with FRK or >50%
of leading or trailing
edge.
b. Check stabilizer clip for damage. Check for Broken, stripped,
stripped screws and elongated clips. missing or spread.
8 B, A AV Soft a. Check for tears in fabric and crushed foam Torn, crushed,
Pack. insert. frayed or broken.
b. Check straps for torn or frayed fabric and Broken.
mounting security.
c. Check clips for damage and proper function. Broken.
9 Q GPS a. Replace GPS battery. Corroded, expired

Battery. shelf life.
Table 2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES FOR GCS/RVT.

1 B, A GCS/RVT. a. Inventory GCS/RVT. Less than

1 complete
GCS/RVT.
2 B, A Uplink a. Check antenna whip for breaks. Broken.

Antenna.
b. Check connector for damage and debris. Broken.
3 B, A RF Unit a. Check RF unit antenna for damage to case Broken.

Assembly. and stripped or missing screws.
0046 00-3
0046 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
Table 2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES FOR GCS/RVT. - Continued

b. Check mast mounting bracket for mounting Broken.

security and missing or stripped screws.
c. Check uplink antenna RF mount for damage Broken or missing.
and debris.
d. Check downlink antenna connector for Broken.
security, damage and debris.
4 B, A Hub a. Check hub case for damage such as cracks, Broken.

Assembly. dents, and stripped or missing screws.
b. Check power cables for mounting security and Both broken or
damage such as cracks, abrasions, bent or missing.
missing pins.
c. Check controller port for damage, debris, and Broken or missing.
mounting security.
d. Check Ethernet port (Laptop) for damage, Broken or missing.
debris, and mounting security.
e. Check video out port adapter for damage, Broken or missing.
debris, and mounting security.
f. Check RCA port for damage, debris, and Broken or missing.
mounting security.
g. Check RF unit port for damage, debris, and Broken or missing.
mounting security.
5 B, A Hand a. Check controller case for damage such as Broken.

Controller. cracks, dents or missing screws.
b. Check video screen for cracks and abrasions. Broken or cracked.
c. Check throttle control for mounting security Broken,
and freedom of movement. non-functional
or missing.
d. Check Menu Select button for mounting Broken,
security and freedom of movement. non-functional
or missing.
e. Check enter button for mounting security and Broken,
tactile feedback. non-functional
or missing.
f. Check joystick controller for mounting security, Broken,
freedom of movement, tears in rubber boot. non-functional
or missing.
g. Check Hot Key button for mounting security Broken,
and tactile feedback. non-functional
or missing.
0046 00-4
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0046 00
Table 2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES FOR GCS/RVT. - Continued

h. Check payload control button for mounting Broken,

security and tactile feedback. non-functional
or missing.
i. Check screen capture button for mounting Broken,
security and tactile feedback. non-functional
or missing.
j. Check controller cable for mounting security, Broken,
damage to strain relief, breaks and abrasions, non-functional
bent or missing pins, damage or debris, and or missing.
fit.
6 B, A Controller a. Check hood for tears in fabric or seams. Cannot be repaired.

Hood.
b. Check strips for torn or frayed fabric and Broken.
mounting security.
c. Check clips for damage and proper function. Broken.
d. Check for proper fit over controller. Broken.
e. Check preflight checklist placard for mounting Torn, missing or
and security legible. illegible.
7 B, A Ethernet a. Check antenna cable for breaks, abrasions, Broken or missing.

and RF damage to, broken or missing connector, bent
cables. or broken pins.
b. Check for breaks, abrasions, damage to Broken or missing.
connector, bent or broken pins.
8 B, A GCS/RVT a. Check for tears. Cannot be repaired.

Soft Pack.
b. Check straps for torn or frayed fabric and Broken or missing.
mounting security.
c. Check clips for damage and proper function. Broken or missing.
9 B, A GCS-RVT a. Check mast for damage to frame and elastic Broken.

Mast and cord.
Bag.
b. Check RF unit for mounting ball detent. Broken.
c. Check bag for tears. Tear cannot be
repaired.
d. Check drawstring for serviceability. Missing or
Unserviceable.
0046 00-5
0046 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
Table 3. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE INITIAL SPARES PACKAGE.

1 B, A GCS/RVT PMCS of the PP-8498/U battery charger is covered Broken or fails to

Battery in Operator and Service Manual BTD-960002 charge battery.
Charger. and not addressed in this document. Less than 1
serviceable battery
charger.
2 B, A Storage a. Check case for damage to latches, hinges, Broken.

Case. and frame.
b. Check Seals. If the sealing O-Ring is dis- Damaged or
lodged from the groove, manually press the missing.
O-Ring back into the seating groove. If finger
pressure is insufficient to fully seat the O-Ring,
use a soft blunt object, like a mixing stick to
assist in fully seating the O-Ring.
3 B, A AC/DC a. Inventory Battery Chargers. Less than 1 of each

and Uni- Battery Charger.
versal
Battery
Chargers.
b. Check AC power cable (AC charger) for Broken or missing.
breaks, abrasions, bent or broken pins, dirt
and debris.
c. Check DC power cable for breaks, abrasions, Broken or missing.
bent or broken pins, dirt and debris.
d. Check Universal Battery charger for function- LEDs inoperative.
ing LEDs.
e. Ensure Universal Battery charger has all cable Missing cables or
and adapters. adapters.
4 B, A Spare a. Check to ensure all components are present Damaged or

Flying and serviceable. missing.
Surfaces
Kit.
5 B, A Nato a. Check NATO connector for breaks, abrasions, Broken or missing.

Slave bent or broken pins, missing screws, dirt and
Cable. debris.
6 B, A Small a. Check case for damage to latches, hinges, Broken.

Spares Kit and frame.
and Field
Repair Kit.
b. Check to ensure all components are present Damaged or
and serviceable. missing.
0046 00-6
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0046 00
Table 3. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE INITIAL SPARES PACKAGE. - Continued

7 B, A, D GCS/RVT a. Check for cracks scratches or damage. Cracked/dam-

and AV aged/broken.
Recharge-
able
Batteries.
b. Check AV Battery and AV Battery Fuse. Missing or Fuse
unserviceable.
c. Check charging indication. Battery will not
charge.
d. Charge GCS/RVT batteries annually. Battery will not
charge.
8 B, A Case, a. Check case for damage to latches and hinges. Broken.

Battery
AV.
Table 4. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES FOR RSTA KIT CF-18 Laptop.

1 B Cables. Check for breaks or tears in all cables or connec- Cables missing
tors. or broken.
Connectors
missing or
unserviceable.
2 B Connec- Check connectors for bent pins and damaged Unable to mount
tors. covers. with interface.
3 B Stylus. Clean stylus. Stylus missing.
4 B Laptop a. Clean screen and body and check for damage. Body damaged or
Computer screen cracked.
b. Check for loose covers and attaching screws. Screws missing.
5 D Battery. Check for battery capacity and charging. Battery missing

or can’t maintain
charge.
6 A Laptop Check for presence and closure of rubber weather Seals missing.
Body. covers.
7 Q Hard Defragment hard drive. Drive does not

Drive. function correctly.
0046 00-7
0046 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
Table 4. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES FOR RSTA KIT CF-18 Laptop. - Continued

8 B, A Storage a. Clean case and check for damage to latches Storage case can
Case. and hinges. no longer protect
RSTA kit.
b. Check seals. If the sealing O-Ring is dislodged Damaged or
from the groove, manually press the O-Ring missing.
back into the seating groove. If finger pressure
is insufficient to fully seat the O-Ring, use a
soft blunt object, like a mixing stick to assist in
fully seating the O-Ring.
c. Check foam cushioning for serviceability. Missing, torn or
unable to protect
contents.
d. Check handles or serviceability. Missing or broken.
MANDATORY REPLACEMENT PARTS
Table 1. Mandatory Replacement Parts List.
ITEM PART NSN NOMENCLATURE QTY

NO. NUMBER/
CAGEC
1 RA546903SQS9 Battery, 3.6V GPS Fil 3
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0046 00-8
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0047 00
FIELD MAINTENANCE
NSN 1550-01-538-9256 EIC: 60C
RQ-11B MAINTENANCE
INITIAL SETUP:
NA
RQ-11B MAINTENANCE
RQ-11B Maintenance Levels
The logistics support system includes two echelons of maintenance: Field (organizational) and Sustainment (depot).
The maintenance guidelines and instructions in this section are for field level maintenance of the RQ-11B system, and
do not require specialized tools.
If the repair is not at the field level, the item should be turned in to sustainment level for repair.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0047 00-1/2 blank

TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0048 00
FIELD MAINTENANCE
NSN 1550-01-538-9256 EIC: 60C
AV SKIN AND WING LEADING EDGE REPAIR (LRIP AND FRP)
INITIAL SETUP:
Materials/Parts
Tape, Gaffers WP 0063 00, Figure 7, Item 11
WARNING
AV SKIN AND WING LEADING EDGE REPAIR

Tape can be used to repair small holes, dents, and cracks in the AV skin.
• Use minimal amount of repair material (tape) to avoid shifting AV’s center of gravity.
REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT
REPAIRING SMALL HOLES, DENTS AND CRACKS IN SKIN

• Place piece of tape just large enough to cover damaged area with slight overlap; do not use more than necessary.
• When repairing dents along leading edge of wing, use tape and take care to maintain shape of airfoil.
REPAIRING DELAMINATED SKIN

• Place piece of tape just large enough to cover damaged area with slight overlap; do not use more than necessary.
• When repairing dents along leading edge of wing, use tape and take care to maintain shape of airfoil.
REPAIR BENT WING OR STRUCTURAL COMPONENT

• Place mending sticks across bent joint and attach with tape to form reinforcing splint.
UN-REPAIRABLE WING OR STRUCTURAL COMPONENT

• Replace with new part.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0048 00-1/2 blank

TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0049 00
FIELD MAINTENANCE
NSN 1550-01-538-9256 EIC: 60C
SNAP SCREWS REPLACEMENT
INITIAL SETUP:
Tools and Special Tools Materials/Parts
Field Repair Kit (WP 0063 00, Figure 2, Item 10) Snap Screw and Wrench WP 0063 00, Figure 7, Item
7 (1)
WARNING
SNAP SCREWS REPLACEMENT

The snap screws fasten the center wing to the pylon. They are located in the center wing at the leading edge and in the
fuselage on the pylon at the trailing edge. Upon impact, these screws can partially or entirely shear off. Figure 1, Item
1 shows the snap screw in the pylon.
Spare snap screws (with attached hex wrench) are provided in the FRK. Follow these steps to replace damaged snap
screws.
1. Unscrew and remove broken snap screw.
2. Replace snap screw with one of spares provided.
3. Check for snug fit with center wing and adjust snap screws as required.
Figure 1. Snap Screw.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0049 00-1/2 blank

TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0050 00
FIELD MAINTENANCE
NSN 1550-01-538-9256 EIC: 60C
STABILATOR (STAB) CLIP REPLACEMENT
INITIAL SETUP:
Field Repair Kit (WP 0063 00, Figure 2, Item 10) Stab Clip WP 0063 00, Figure 7, Item 2 (1)
Multi-tip Screwdriver (WP 0063 00, Figure 7, Item 9)
WARNING
STAB CLIP REPLACEMENT

The stab clip is a commonly replaced item. Spare stab clips with attached screws are included in the FRK. Refer to
Figure 1 and follow these steps to replace stab clips.
1. Unscrew and remove damaged stab clip using multi-tip screwdriver provided.
CAUTION
Do not over-tighten the screws into the AV or it may strip the stabilator.
2. Attach replacement stab clip using multi-tip screwdriver.
Figure 1. Replacing the Stab Clip.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0050 00-1/2 blank

TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0051 00
FIELD MAINTENANCE
NSN 1550-01-538-9256 EIC: 60C
PROPELLER REPLACEMENT
INITIAL SETUP:
Field Repair Kit (WP 0063 00, Figure 2, Item 10) Propeller WP 0063 00, Figure 7, Item 10 (1)
Propeller Replacement
WARNING
Disconnect the battery from the AV before attempting any maintenance on the propeller. Failure
to comply may result in injury to personnel.
Follow these steps to replace a damaged propeller.
1. Grasp broken propeller with one hand and loosen spinner nut by turning it counter-clockwise using wrench
provided with snap screws.
2. Remove spinner nut, spinner and old propeller.
3. Identify side of new propeller with paint and/or writing on it. Paint/writing can be found along edges near
center of propeller. Refer toFigure 1, Item 1.
CAUTION
It is very important that the propeller be installed with the paint facing the motor. Refer to Figure
1, Item 1. Failure to comply may result in loss of AV.
4. Install propeller with paint/writing facing motor or front of AV Figure 1, Item 1. The color in center of propeller
should not be visible after this step. If paint is visible, propeller is backward and should be reversed.
0051 00-1
0051 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT – CONTINUED
CAUTION
Excessive force could damage propeller hub.

5. Reinstall spinner, reattach and tighten spinner nut using wrench provided with snap screws. Do not use
excessive force when tightening nut.
Figure 1. Replacing the Propeller.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0051 00-2
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0052 00
FIELD MAINTENANCE
NSN 1550-01-538-9256 EIC: 60C
REPLACE THE GPS BATTERY
INITIAL SETUP:
Tools and Special Tools Materials/Parts (cont.)
Field Repair Kit (WP 0063 00, Figure 2, Item 10)
Multi-tip Screwdriver (WP 0063 00, Figure 7, Item 9) Tape, Blue, Painters (or acceptable substitute)
Materials/Parts WP 0067 00, Table 1. Expendable and Durable
Fuselage WP 0063 00, Figure 2, Item 5 (1) Items List, Item 1 (1)
Tape, Gaffers WP 0063 00, Figure 7, Item 11 (1) Battery 3.6V GPS fill WP 0063 00, Figure 7, Item (1)
WARNING
SERVICE
REPLACING THE GPS BATTERY
NOTE
If GPS battery is removed or discharged, GPS grid location will be 15TXG11905394 until a valid
fix is obtained.
Follow these steps to replace the GPS battery.
1. Remove AV battery from AV.
2. Remove 4 avionics cover screws and cover Figure 1, Item 1.
Figure 1. Avionics Cover and Screws.
0052 00-1
0052 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
SERVICE – CONTINUED
3. Remove low residue tape Figure 2, Item 2 and remove GPS battery Figure 2, Item 1.
4. Insert new battery into battery holder and write date on battery. Tape new battery in so it will not eject on hard
landing. Do not replace battery unless identical replacement is available. Battery is 3.6 V Lithium Thionyl
Chloride battery, size AA. (Do not use a standard AA battery.)
Figure 2. Taping in the GPS Battery.

5. Replace Avionics Cover using 4 screws removed in step 2.
6. Apply AV battery and wait up to 40 minutes for GPS to acquire on “cold start.” Allow system to go through
countdown until GPS is functioning.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0052 00-2
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0053 00
FIELD MAINTENANCE
NSN 1550-01-538-9256 EIC: 60C
PITOT TUBE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT
INITIAL SETUP:
Field Repair Kit (WP 0063 00, Figure 2, Item 10) Pitot Tube WP 0063 00, Figure 7, Item 3 (1)
Utility Knife (WP 0063 00, Figure 7, Item 8) Pitot Flat Washer WP 0063 00, Figure 7, Item 4
Pliers, Needle Nosed (WP 0063 00, Figure 7, Item 18)
WARNING
PITOT TUBE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT

The pitot tube shown in Figure 1, must project straight out from the center pylon and the shaft must be at least 1/2 inch
long. The leading edge of the pitot tube shaft must be even and cut perpendicular to the length of the shaft. Follow these
steps to repair/replace the pitot tube.
REPAIR PITOT TUBE
To repair an uneven pitot tube shaft:
1. Use utility knife to cut even, perpendicular opening for shaft.
2. Do not trim shaft to less than 1/2 inch.
3. Use snap screw as measurement of pitot tube (snap screws are 1/2 inch long).
REPLACE PITOT TUBE
1. Unscrew and remove damaged pitot tube from center pylon using needle nosed pliers.
2. Replace pitot tube Figure 1, Item 2, with spare from FRK. Ensure neoprene washer Figure 1, Item 1, is
installed. Finger tighten only.
0053 00-1
0053 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT – CONTINUED
Figure 1. Pitot Tube.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0053 00-2
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0054 00
FIELD MAINTENANCE
NSN 1550-01-538-9256 EIC: 60C
AV BATTERY FUSE REPLACEMENT
INITIAL SETUP:
Field Repair Kit (WP 0063 00, Figure 2, Item 10) Fuse, 20 A AV Bat RA54308 (1)
(WP 0063 00, Figure 7, Item 13)
CAUTION
When performing this procedure do not allow any metal objects to come in contact with the
battery terminals or fuse contacts. This will cause the battery to short and render it inoperable.
REMOVAL
Fuse Removal
1. Orient battery with fuse up as shown in Figure 1.
2. Insert flat tip of multi-tip screwdriver approx. .25” deep into fuse housing detent (Figure 1, Item 3). Do not
allow screwdriver to touch battery terminals (Figure 1, Item 2), or fuse contacts.
3. Carefully pry 20A fuse upward (Figure 1, Item 1). Apply pressure to back of fuse body to ensure even removal
of component. Do not damage fuse contacts located inside battery.
Figure 1. Fuse Removal.
0054 00-1
0054 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
INSTALLATION
Fuse Installation
1. Visually inspect fuse receptacle and determine location of contacts. Confirm fuse contacts are not damaged
or deformed.
2. Position fuse with prongs perpendicular to battery and install component. Do not allow fuse to be inserted at
angle to battery.
3. Verify fuse is fully seated in housing.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0054 00-2
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0055 00
FIELD MAINTENANCE
NSN 1550-01-538-9256 EIC: 60C
MAGNETIC COMPASS CALIBRATION
INITIAL SETUP:
Lensatic Compass Operator (2)
Materials/Parts Equipment Condition
RQ-11B SUAS WP 0063 00, Figure 1, Item 2 (1) AV Assembled (WP 0010 00)
ADJUSTMENT
MAGNETIC COMPASS CALIBRATION

Occasionally the onboard compass will need to be calibrated to display accurate heading of the aircraft. Perform the
procedure using a completely assembled aircraft and GCS in an open area away from large metal objects.
The VO and MO follow the procedures indicated below to accomplish this task.
1. VO access "MAG CAL" submenu on the hand controller.
2. MO hold aircraft level throughout the calibration process.
3. In the “MAG CAL” screen the VO will toggle down with the MENU SELECT button and press “ENTER” and
signal MO to initiate clockwise rotation of AV. This will start the calibration.
4. On VO’s signal, MO rotates aircraft horizontally (around yaw axis) through 2 full revolutions.
5. Rotate slowly at rate of about 90 degrees every 3 seconds.
6. Make motion as smooth as possible and keep aircraft completely level.
7. While MO is rotating aircraft, highlight "STOP CAL with save."
8. When MO completes 2 full rotations, VO presses "ENTER" button to stop calibration and save data.
9. Recheck aircraft magnetic compass heading with a hand-held compass. (±10°)
10. Repeat procedures 1 through 9 should system not calibrate. Repeat as necessary.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0055 00-1/2 blank

TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0056 00
FIELD MAINTENANCE
NSN 1550-01-538-9256 EIC: 60C
LEFT AND RIGHT WING O-RING REPLACEMENT
INITIAL SETUP:
Field Repair Kit (WP 0063 00, Figure 2, Item 10) O-Ring, Wing RA54882 (1)
Utility Knife (WP 0063 00, Figure 7, Item 8) (WP 0063 00, Figure 7, Item 16)
REMOVAL
These instructions provide procedures to replace the O-Ring on the left or right wing.
Wing Removal
Remove left or right wing from wing assembly.
O-Ring Removal
1. Wipe wing tip mating surface, alignment pin, and spar connecting pin with clean cloth.
2. Use Utility Knife to cut damaged O-Ring off of groove on spar connecting pin. Remove O-Ring. Do not score
or scratch surface of spar connecting pin.
3. Visually inspect O-Ring retaining groove on spar connecting pin. Remove any debris from groove and wipe
with clean cloth.
INSTALLATION
O-Ring Installation
1. Position replacement O-Ring at bottom beveled edge of spar connecting pin as shown in Figure 1, Item 1.
Figure 1. O-Ring Positioned For Installation.

2. Roll opposite side of O-Ring over top of pin edge and slide into retaining groove.
0056 00-1
0056 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
INSTALLATION – CONTINUED
3. Visually inspect seated O-Ring. If not aligned with spar connecting pin or if twisted within groove repeat steps
1 through 3 above with new O-Ring.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0056 00-2
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0057 00
FIELD MAINTENANCE
NSN 1550-01-538-9256 EIC: 60C
RUDDER LINKAGE, STABILATOR LINKAGE, AND STABILATOR HORN REPLACEMENT
INITIAL SETUP:
Tools and Special Tools Materials/Parts (cont.)
Multi-tip Screwdriver (WP 0063 00, Figure 7, Item 9) Stabilator Linkage RA54881 (1 )
Pliers, Needle Nosed (WP 0063 00, Figure 7, Item 18) (WP 0063 00, Figure 6, Item 9)
Materials/Parts Rudder Linkage RA54880 (1 )
Stab Horn with Ball RA54369 (1 ) (WP 0063 00, Figure 6, Item 10)
(WP 0063 00, Figure 7, Item 12)
Pivot Pin RA54840 (1 )
(WP 0063 00, Figure 7, Item 14)
WARNING
DISASSEMBLY
These instructions provide a guide to replace the Stab Horn with Ball, Stabilator Linkage, and Rudder Linkage on the
Tailboom.
AV Disassembly
1. Remove battery from AV.
2. Disconnect tailboom from fuselage.
3. Disconnect stabilator from tailboom.

Rudder Linkage Removal
1. Insert multi-tip screwdriver in clevis of rudder linkage assembly at locations shown in Figure 1, Item 1. Twist
screwdriver one half turn to open clevis.
2. Slide clevis steel pins out from rudder horn Figure 2, Item 2, and top servo horn Figure 2, Item 1. Remove
rudder linkage. See Figure 2, Item 3.
Figure 1. Rudder Linkage.
0057 00-1
0057 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
DISASSEMBLY – CONTINUED
Figure 2. Top Servo Horn, Rudder Horn and Rudder Linkage.

INSTALLATION
Rudder Linkage Installation
1. Verify new rudder linkage is the same length as the old rudder linkage, adjust as necessary.
2. Using multi-tip screwdriver open clevis at both ends of replacement rudder linkage.
3. Insert steel pin of clevis at one end of rudder linkage through mounting hole in rudder horn.
4. Insert steel pin of clevis at opposite end of rudder linkage through outer most mounting hole in top servo horn.
5. Secure clevis at both ends of rudder linkage to rudder and top servo horns by pressing open end of clevis
onto steel pins.
REMOVAL
Stabilator Linkage Removal
1. Insert multi-tip screwdriver in clevis of stabilator linkage at location shown in Figure 3, Item 1. Twist screw-
driver one half turn to open clevis. Slide clevis steel pin out from bottom servo horn. Unsnap ball link cup
Figure 3, Item 2 from stabilator horn.
Figure 3. Stabilator Linkage.
0057 00-2
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0057 00
REMOVAL – CONTINUED
2. Remove stabilator linkage. See Figure 4, Item 1.
Figure 4. Stabilator Linkage Removal.

INSTALLATION
Stabilator Linkage Installation
1. Verify new stabilator linkage is the same length as the old stabilator linkage, adjust as necessary.
2. Using multi-tip screwdriver open clevis at end of replacement stabilator linkage.
3. Insert steel pin of clevis at end of stabilator linkage through outer most mounting hole in bottom servo horn.
4. Secure clevis at end of stabilator linkage to bottom servo horn by pressing open end of clevis onto steel pin.
5. Snap stabiliator ball link cup onto stabilizer horn.
6. Proceed to replacement of stabilator horn if required. Proceed to preflight gyro check if required.
REMOVAL
0057 00-3
0057 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
REMOVAL – CONTINUED
Stabilator Horn Removal

1. Unsnap ball link cup (Figure 5, Item 1) of stabilator linkage from stab horn ball Figure 5, Item 2
Figure 5. Pivot Pin and Stab Horn with Ball.

2. Use needle nosed pliers to remove pivot pin Figure 5, Item 4 from stabilator mount at end of tailboom.
3. Remove stab horn. See Figure 5, Item 3.
INSTALLATION
Stabilator Horn Installation
1. Position stab horn in stabilator mount and align mounting holes.
2. Install replacement pivot pin and ensure pin is centered.
3. Snap stabilator linkage ball link cup onto stab horn.
4. Attach stabilator to horn and ensure it is secured to the pivot pin.
5. Proceed to Preflight Gyro Check.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0057 00-4
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0057 01
FIELD MAINTENANCE
NSN 1550-01-538-9256 EIC: 60C
BYPASS/CONNECTION OF THE 8 CHANNEL RF UNIT DOWNLINK FILTER
INITIAL SETUP:
Tools and Special Tools Equipment Condition
Multi-tip Screwdriver (WP 0063 00, Figure 7, Item 9) Ensure the GCS is powered down and the RF Unit is
Field Repair Kit (WP 0063 00, Figure 2, Item 10) not connected to the Hub Unit. (WP 0016 00)
Materials/Parts
8 Ch RF Unit (1 ) (WP 0063 00)

Connecting The Filter For Use With Channels 5 through 8.
1. Loosen the four screws holding the downlink filter cover in place using the screwdriver (WP 0063 00, Figure
7, Item 9) supplied in the FRK (WP 0063 00, Figure 2, Item 10) (See Figure 1). The screws are captive to the
filter cover.
Figure 1. Captive Screw Removal.

2. Remove the cover off the filter. It may be necessary to gently shift and tilt the cover during removal to ensure
an internal flange inside the cover clears the filter components.
0057 01-1 Change 1 – 11 June 2008

0057 01 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
3. Remove the U-shaped bypass cable (see Figure 2, Item 1) connection from the feed through fittings by
grasping the U-shaped end and pulling upward.
Figure 2. Remove U-Shaped Bypass Cable.

4. Locate the rigid cables on each end of the filter (see Figure 2, Item 2).
5. Grasp each rigid cable at the square brass connector and unplug them from the filter.
Change 1 0057 01-2

TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0057 01

6. Swap the cable to the opposite end of the filter and plug it in (the shorter cable should now be on the side next
to the mast mount). See Figure 3.
Figure 3. Rigid Cable Installation.

7. Rotate each of the cables and insert the round connector ends into the feed through fittings and press firmly
into place.
8. Place the U-shaped bypass cable between the feed through fittings and the filter (see Figure 4).
Figure 4. U-Shaped By-Pass Cable Storage.
0057 01-3 Change 1

0057 01 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
9. Inspect and ensure the two rigid filter cable connections are securely connected.
10. Place the filter cover over the filter assembly on the back of the RF Unit with the “cut out” on the cover towards
the outside edge of the RF Unit . It may be necessary to gently shift or tilt the filter cover to ensure the internal
flanges clear the filter components. Ensure gasket is present and in place. If missing or seal can not be
obtained, replace RF Unit.
11. Reassemble the RF Unit by tightening each of the four hold down screws using the screwdriver (WP 0063 00,
Figure 7, Item 9) from the FRK (WP 0063 00, Figure 2, Item 10).
12. Test the RF Unit by performing a standard system operational pre-flight check, (see WP 0012 00) using one
of channels 5-8.
Bypassing The Filter To Use Channels 1 through 4.
1. Loosen the four screws holding the downlink filter cover in place using the screwdriver (WP 0063 00, Figure
7, Item 9) supplied in the FRK (WP 0063 00, Figure 2, Item 10), (see Figure 1). The screws are captive to the
filter cover.
2. Lift the cover off the filter. It may be necessary to gently shift and tilt the cover during removal to ensure an
internal flange inside the cover clears the filter components.
3. Disconnect the two rigid cable ends from the feed through connections by grasping the round brass cable
end and pulling away from the connectors (see Figure 5). Gently rotate rigid cables up and away.
Figure 5. Rigid Cable Removal.
4. Disconnect both cables from the filter.
5. Swap the rigid cable to the opposite end of the filter and plug it in. The longer cable should be stowed in the
side of the filter next to the mast mount. The U-shaped bypass cable is tethered to the filter.
Change 1 0057 01-4

TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0057 01
6. Grasp the U-shaped bypass cable and align the connector ends with the feed through connectors on the RF
Unit. Push the U-shaped bypass cable into place and ensure that it is firmly seated (see Figure 6).
Figure 6. U-Shaped Cable Installed.

7. Inspect and ensure U-shaped bypass filter cable connections are securely connected.
8. Place the filter cover over the filter assembly on the back of the RF Unit with the “cut out” on the cover towards
the outside edge of the RF Unit . It may be necessary to gently shift or tilt the filter cover to ensure the internal
flanges clear the filter components. Ensure gasket is present and in place. If missing or seal can not be
obtained, replace RF Unit.
9. Reassemble the RF Unit by tightening each of the four hold down screws using the screwdriver (WP 0063 00,
Figure 7, Item 9) from the FRK (WP 0063 00, Figure 2, Item 10).
10. Test the RF Unit by performing a standard system operational pre-flight check, (see WP 0012 00) using one
of channels 1-4.
System Operation:. Once the filter configuration has been set, channels 1-4 are available when the filter is by-
passed, 5-8 are available when the filter is connected in-line. System operation has not been affected by this change.
END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0058 00
FIELD MAINTENANCE
NSN 1550-01-538-9256 EIC: 60C
INITIAL SETUP:
NA

PACK SYSTEM
Pack GCS/RVT. The RQ-11B GCS/RVT contents are shown in Figure 1.
1. Soft Pack
2. RF Unit
3. Hub Unit
4. Uplink Antenna
5. Ethernet Cable
6. RF Cable
7. Mast Bag
8. GCS/RVT Mast
9. Controller Hood
10. Hand Controller
Figure 1. GCS/RVT Contents.
0058 00-1
0058 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
PREPARATION FOR STORAGE OR SHIPMENT – CONTINUED
1. Place Uplink Antenna and GCS/RVT Mast inside Mast Bag as depicted in Figure 2.
Figure 2. GCS/RVT Antenna Mast Package.
2. Collapse controller hood flat and place on top of hand controller. Wrap controller cord around controller and
hood.
3. Place Hand Controller in Soft Pack as shown in Figure 3.
4. Slide Hub Unit in front of Hand Controller.
5. Slide RF Unit into Soft Pack. Orient RF Unit appx. perpendicular to Hand Controller and Hub Unit and align
items at one end.
6. The Soft Pack should stand upright with no assistance.
Figure 3. Hand Controller, Hub Unit, and RF Unit, Packed.
7. Next slide packed Mast Bag to bottom of Soft Pack.
8. Individually coil RF Cable, Ethernet Cable and place cables together in the soft pack.
9. Seal the bag and clip buckles. This will seal the bag from the outside environment.
0058 00-2
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0058 00
Pack AV
NOTE
The system only has two IR payloads.
10. Figure 4 shows the components of an AV.
1. Center Wing
2. Stabilator
3. Right Wing
4. AV Soft Pack
5. EO Payload
6. Tailboom
7. Fuselage
8. Field Repair Kit (FRK)
9. IR Payload
10. Left Wing
Figure 4. AV Components.
0058 00-3
0058 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
NOTE
Insure all components are clean and dry before storing.
11. Place flying surfaces into AV Soft Pack as shown in Figure 5. Each slot is custom fit for each part.
1. Stabilator
2. Left Wing
3. Right Wing
4. Center Wing
5. Fuselage
6. Tailboom
Figure 5. AV Packed.
CAUTION
Ensure the propeller is aligned properly when sliding fuselage into the Soft Pack. If propeller is
not aligned, it could be damaged or broken when putting the fuselage into the bag.
12. Slide fuselage tail-first into Soft Pack, see Figure 5, Item 5.
0058 00-4
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0058 00
13. Place Payload in remaining space next to fuselage, with top of camera facing fuselage and back side flush
with fuselage front bulkhead. See Figure 6. Put log book on top of Soft Pack.
Figure 6. AV and Payload Packed.

14. Close top of Soft Pack.
15. Place additional Payload in slot provided in bottom of pack as shown in Figure 7.
16. Place FRK in slot provided as shown in Figure 7.
Figure 7. IR Payload and FRK Packed.

17. To seal case, pull bottom straps upward and snap to straps on side of case.
Figure 8. AV Soft Pack Sealed.
0058 00-5
0058 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
Pack GCS/RVT and AVs Into Storage Case

Each RQ-11B system contains three AVs and two GCS/RVTs. Each AV, GCS/RVT is contained within its own Soft
Pack.
WARNING
Two person lift requirement. When the Soft Packs containing the three AVs, GCS/RVTs, EO
and IR payloads and Field Repair Kit are packed into the shipping container as described in the
following steps, the shipping case weighs 64 pounds. Two persons are required for lifting and/or
carrying this packed shipping case. Failure to comply can result in injury to personnel.
18. Place each AV bag into shipping case as shown in Figure 9 .
Figure 9. AVs Packed.
0058 00-6
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0058 00
19. Place GCS/RVT bags on top of AV bags as shown in Figure 10.
Figure 10. GCS/RVT Packed.

Pack Initial Spares Package
20. Place five RQ-11B AV batteries into case as shown in Figure 11.
Figure 11. AV Batteries Packed.
0058 00-7
0058 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
21. Insert red safety cap into battery connector terminal or cover with gaffers tape as shown in Figure 12, Item 1.
Figure 12. GCS/RVT Rechargeable Battery.
0058 00-8
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0058 00
WARNING
Four person lift requirement. When all Initial Spares Package contents are packed into the large
shipping case, it weighs 121.5 pounds. Four persons are required for lifting and/or carrying
this packed shipping case. Weight must be distributed as evenly as possible between the four
personnel. Failure to comply can result in injury to personnel.
22. Figure 13 shows all items contained in the Initial Spares Package. All items shown are packed into the large
shipping case.
1. Packing Instructions 7. Operator’s Manual (1)

2. Inventory List 8. AV Battery Case (2)
3. Shipping Case (1) 9. DC Battery Charger (1)
4. Spare Flying Surfaces Kit (2) 10. AC Battery Charger (1)
5. GCS/RVT Batteries (10) 11. Small Spare Parts Case (1)
6. NATO Slave Cable (1) 12. GCS/RVT Battery Charger (1)
Figure 13. Initial Spares Package.
0058 00-9
0058 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
23. Place battery chargers, NATO Slave Cable, two battery cases and two spare flying surface cases into
shipping case first, as shown in Figure 14. Note orientation of all items.
Figure 14. Bottom Layer Packed.

24. Place small spare parts case, and six GCS/RVT rechargeable batteries into case, as shown in Figure 15.
Note orientation and location of items, and that GCS/RVT battery charger and spare flying surfaces cases
are still visible.
Figure 15. Second Layer Packed.
0058 00-10
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0058 00
25. Place AC battery charger, DC battery charger, and remaining four GCS/RVT rechargeable batteries in case,
as shown in Figure 16.
Figure 16. Top Layer Packed.

26. Place Operator’s Manual into the case.
Small Spare Parts
27. WP 0063 00, Figure 6 shows the contents of the Small Spare Parts Kit:
28. Close lid and snap latches before placing Small Spare Parts Case into Shipping Case.
Figure 17. Small Spare Parts Case Packed.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0058 00-11/12 blank

TM 1-1550-695-13&P
CHAPTER 5
SUPPORTING INFORMATION
FOR
(RQ-11B)
(NSN: 1550-01-538-9256)
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0059 00
NSN 1550-01-538-9256 EIC: 60C
REFERENCES (LRIP AND FRP)
SCOPE
This work package lists all Field Manuals, Technical manuals and miscellaneous publications referenced in this man-
ual.
REFERENCE LIST
FMI-3-04.155 Army Unmanned Aircraft System Operations

FM 3-05.211 Special Forces MFF Operations
FM 3-21.220 Parachuting Techniques and Training
FM 4-25.11 First Aid
DA PAM 750-8 The Army Maintenance Management System (TAMMS) Users Manual
AR 95-23 Unmanned Aircraft Systems Flight Regulations
AR 700-138 Army Logistics Readiness and Sustainability
TC 1-611 SUAS Aircrew Training Manual (ATM)
TM 750-244-1-5 Procedures for Destruction of Air Vehicle and
Associated Equipment to Prevent Enemy Use
0059 00-1/2 blank

TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0060 00
NSN 1550-01-538-9256 EIC: 60C
INTRODUCTION TO MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART (MAC) (LRIP AND FRP)
INTRODUCTION
The Army Maintenance System MAC
This introduction provides a general explanation of all maintenance and repair functions authorized at the two mainte-
nance levels under the Two-Level Maintenance System concept.
The MAC (immediately following the introduction) designates overall authority and responsibility for the performance
of maintenance functions on the identified end item or component. The application of the maintenance functions to the
end item or component shall be consistent with the capacities and capabilities of the designated maintenance levels,
which are shown on the MAC in column (4) as:
• Field - includes two subcolumns, unit operator/crew (C) and unit maintenance (O) and Direct Support (F) main-
tenance.
• Sustainment - includes two subcolumns, general support (H) and Depot (D).
The tools and test equipment requirements (immediately following the MAC) list the tools and test equipment (both spe-
cial tools and common tool sets) required for each maintenance function as referenced from the MAC.
The remarks (immediately following the tools and test equipment requirements) contain supplemental instructions and
explanatory notes for a particular maintenance function.
Maintenance Functions
Maintenance functions are limited to and defined as follows:
1. Inspect. To determine the serviceability of an item by comparing its physical, mechanical, and/or electrical char-
acteristics with established standards through examination (e.g., by sight, sound, or feel). This includes sched-
uled inspection and gagings and evaluation of cannon tubes.
2. Test. To verify serviceability by measuring the mechanical, pneumatic, hydraulic, or electrical characteristics of
an item and comparing those characteristics with prescribed standards on a scheduled basis, i.e., load testing of
lift devices and hydrostatic testing of pressure hoses.
3. Service. Operations required periodically to keep an item in proper operating condition; e.g., to clean (includes
decontaminate, when required), to preserve, to drain, to paint, or to replenish fuel, lubricants, chemical fluids, or
gases. This includes scheduled exercising and purging of recoil mechanisms.
4. Adjust. To maintain or regulate, within prescribed limits, by bringing into proper position, or by setting the operat-
ing characteristics to specified parameters.
5. Align. To adjust specified variable elements of an item to bring about optimum or desired performance.
6. Calibrate. To determine and cause corrections to be made or to be adjusted on instruments of test, measuring,
and diagnostic equipment used in precision measurement. Consists of comparisons of two instruments, one of
which is a certified standard of known accuracy, to detect and adjust any discrepancy in the accuracy of the in-
strument being compared.
7. Remove/Install. To remove and install the same item when required to perform service or other maintenance
functions. Install may be the act of emplacing, seating, or fixing into position a spare, repair part, or module (com-
ponent or assembly) in a manner to allow the proper functioning of an equipment or system.
8. Replace. To remove an unserviceable item and install a serviceable counterpart in its place. "Replace" is autho-
rized by the MAC and assigned maintenance level is shown as the third position code of the Source, Maintenance
and Recoverability (SMR) code.
9. Repair. The application of maintenance services, including fault location/troubleshooting, removal/installation,
disassembly/assembly procedures, and maintenance actions to identify troubles and restore serviceability to an
item by correcting specific damage, fault, malfunction, or failure in a part, subassembly, module (component or
assembly), end item, or system.
0060 00-1
0060 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
INTRODUCTION – CONTINUED
NOTE
The following definitions are applicable to the "repair" maintenance function:

Services. Inspect, test, service, adjust, align, calibrate, and/or replace.
Fault location/troubleshooting. The process of investigating and detecting the cause of equip-
ment malfunctioning; the act of isolating a fault within a system or Unit Under Test (UUT).
Disassembly/assembly. The step-by-step breakdown (taking apart) of a spare/functional group
coded item to the level of its least component, that is assigned an SMR code for the level of
maintenance under consideration (i.e., identified as maintenance significant).
Actions. Welding, grinding, riveting, straightening, facing, machining, and/or resurfacing.
10. Overhaul. That maintenance effort (service/action) prescribed to restore an item to a completely serviceable/op-
erational condition as required by maintenance standards in appropriate technical publications. Overhaul is nor-
mally the highest degree of maintenance performed by the Army. Overhaul does not normally return an item to
like new condition.
11. Rebuild. Consists of those services/actions necessary for the restoration of unserviceable equipment to a like
new condition in accordance with original manufacturing standards. Rebuild is the highest degree of materiel
maintenance applied to Army equipment. The rebuild operation includes the act of returning to zero those age
measurements (e.g., hours/miles) considered in classifying Army equipment/components.
Explanation of Columns in the MAC
Column (1) Group Number. Column (1) lists FGC numbers, the purpose of which is to identify maintenance significant
components, assemblies, subassemblies, and modules with the Next Higher Assembly (NHA).
Column (2) Component/Assembly. Column (2) contains the item names of components, assemblies, subassemblies,
and modules for which maintenance is authorized.
Column (3) Maintenance Function. Column (3) lists the functions to be performed on the item listed in column (2). (For
a detailed explanation of these functions refer to "Maintenance Functions" outlined above.)
Column (4) Maintenance Level. Column (4) specifies each level of maintenance authorized to perform each function
listed in column (3), by indicating work time required (expressed as manhours in whole hours or decimals) in the ap-
propriate subcolumn. This work time figure represents the active time required to perform that maintenance function
at the indicated level of maintenance. If the number or complexity of the tasks within the listed maintenance function
varies at different maintenance levels, appropriate work time figures are to be shown for each level. The work time fig-
ure represents the average time required to restore an item (assembly, subassembly, component, module, end item, or
system) to a serviceable condition under typical field operating conditions. This time includes preparation time (includ-
ing any necessary disassembly/assembly time), troubleshooting/fault location time, and quality assurance time in ad-
dition to the time required to perform the specific tasks identified for the maintenance functions authorized in the MAC.
The symbol designations for the various maintenance levels are as follows:
Field:
• C Operator or crew maintenance

• O Unit maintenance
• F Direct Support maintenance
Sustainment:
• H General support maintenance

• D Depot maintenance
0060 00-2
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0060 00
INTRODUCTION – CONTINUED
NOTE
The "L" maintenance level is not included in column (4) of the MAC. Functions to this level
of maintenance are identified by a work time figure in the "H" column of column (4), and an
associated reference code is used in the REMARKS column (6). This code is keyed to the
remarks and the SRA complete repair application is explained there.
Column (5) Tools and Equipment Reference Code. Column (5) specifies, by code, those common tool sets (not indi-
vidual tools), common Test, Measurement and Diagnostic Equipment (TMDE), and special tools, special TMDE and
special support equipment required to perform the designated function. Codes are keyed to the entries in the tools and
test equipment table.
Column (6) Remarks Code. When applicable, this column contains a letter code, in alphabetical order, which is keyed
to the remarks table entries.
Explanation of Sub Columns in the Tool List (WP 0061 00, Table 2)
Column (1) Tool or Test Equipment Reference Code. The tool or test equipment reference code correlates with a code
used in column (5) of the MAC.
Column (2) Maintenance Level. The lowest level of maintenance authorized to use the tool or test equipment.
Column (3) Nomenclature. Name or identification of the tool or test equipment.
Column (4) National Stock Number (NSN). The NSN of the tool or test equipment.
Column (5) Tool Number. The manufacturer’s part number, model number, or type number.
Explanation of Columns in the Reference List (WP 0061 00, Table 3)
Column (1) Remarks Code. The code recorded in column (6) of the MAC.
Column (2) Remarks. This column lists information pertinent to the maintenance function being performed as indicated
in the MAC.
0060 00-3/4 blank

TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0061 00
NSN 1550-01-538-9256 EIC: 60C
MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART (MAC) (LRIP AND FRP)
Table 1. MAC for RQ-11B SUAS.

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
MAINTENANCE LEVEL
FIELD SUSTAINMENT
DIRECT GENERAL TOOLS AND
GROUP COMPONENT/ MAINTENANCE UNIT SUPPORT SUPPORT DEPOT EQUIPMENT REMARKS
NUMBER ASSEMBLY FUNCTION C O F H D REF CODE CODE
0101 System, RQ-11B

SUAS
0102 Air Vehicle
Center Wing and INSPECT .1 A
Right/Left Wings
REPAIR .1 1 B
REPLACE .1 C
O-Ring INSPECT .1 A
REPLACE .1 K
Tailboom Assembly INSPECT .1 A
REPAIR .1 1 B
REPLACE .1 C
Stabilator Linkage INSPECT .1 A
REPLACE .1 J
Rudder Linkage INSPECT .1 A
REPLACE .1 J
Stab Horn with Ball INSPECT .1 A
REPLACE .1 J
Pivot Pin INSPECT .1 A
REPLACE .1 J
Stabilator Assembly INSPECT .1 A
REPAIR .1 1 B
REPLACE .1 C
Stab Clip and Screws INSPECT .1 A
REPLACE .1 L
Fuselage INSPECT .1 A
REPAIR .1 1 B
REPLACE .1 C
AV Battery INSPECT .1 A
REPLACE .1 M
AV Battery Fuse, 20A INSPECT .1 A
REPLACE .1 1 N
Magnetic Compass CALIB .1 H
Calibration
Propeller/ Propeller INSPECT .1 A
Spinner and Nut
REPLACE .1 1 D
GPS Battery INSPECT .1 A
REPLACE .1 1 E
Pitot Tube INSPECT .1 A
0061 00-1 Change 1 – 11 June 2008

0061 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
Table 1. MAC for RQ-11B SUAS. – Continued
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

MAINTENANCE LEVEL
FIELD SUSTAINMENT
REPAIR .1 1 F
REPLACE .1 1 F
Pitot Flat Washer INSPECT .1 A
REPLACE .1 1 F
AV Soft Pack INSPECT .1 A
REPLACE .1 C
EO Payload FWD- INSPECT .1 A
Side
REPLACE .1 C
IR Payload Side INSPECT .1 A
REPLACE .1 C
0103 GCS/RVT Assembly
GCS/RVT Soft Pack INSPECT .1 A
REPLACE .1 C
RF Unit Assembly INSPECT .1 A
REPLACE .1 C
8 Ch RF Unit Filter REMOVE .3 1
Hub Assembly INSPECT .1 A
REPLACE .1 C
Uplink Antenna INSPECT .1 A
REPLACE .1 C
Ethernet Cable INSPECT .1 A
REPLACE .1 C
RF Cable INSPECT .1 A
REPLACE .1 C
Mast Bag INSPECT .1 A
REPLACE .1 C
GCS-RVT Mast INSPECT .1 A
REPLACE .1 C
Controller Hood INSPECT .1 A
REPLACE .1 C
Hand Controller INSPECT .1 A
RQ-11B
REPLACE .1 C
0104 Initial Spares Pack-
age
GCS-RVT Bat Chg INSPECT .1 A
REPLACE .1 C
Flying Surfaces Kit INSPECT .1 A
REPAIR .1 1 B
REPLACE .1 C
NATO Slave Cable INSPECT .1 A
REPLACE .1 C
AV Bat Chg AC INSPECT .1 A
REPLACE .1 C
AV Bat Chg DC INSPECT .1 A
Change 1 0061 00-2

TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0061 00
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

MAINTENANCE LEVEL
FIELD SUSTAINMENT
REPLACE .1 C
Universal Bat INSPECT .1 A
Charger
REPLACE .1 C
Small Spars Kit INSPECT .1 A
REPLACE .1 C
GCS-RVT INSPECT .1 A
Rechargeable
Batteries
REPLACE .1 C
AV BAT Recharge- INSPECT .1 A
able
REPLACE .1 C
RF Cable 50 FT INSPECT .1 A
REPLACE .1 C
Case, Battery AV INSPECT .1 A
REPLACE .1 C
0105 Spare Flying Sur-
faces Kit
Case, Spar Fly INSPECT .1 A
Surfac
REPLACE .1 C
Stabilator INSPECT .1 A
REPAIR .1 1 B
REPLACE .1 C
Left/Right and INSPECT .1 A
Center Wing
REPAIR .1 1 B
REPLACE .1 C
Tailboom INSPECT .1 A
REPAIR .1 1 B
REPLACE .1 C
0106 Small Spares Kit
Case, Sm Spare INSPECT .1 A
Parts
REPLACE .1 C
Simulator Dongle INSPECT .1 A
Cabl
REPLACE .1 C
KYK Adapter Cable INSPECT .1 A
REPLACE .1 C
Snap Screw and INSPECT .1 A
Wrench
REPLACE .1 C
Propeller INSPECT .1 A
REPLACE .1 C
Stab Clip and Screws INSPECT .1 A
REPLACE .1 C
0061 00-3 Change 1

0061 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

MAINTENANCE LEVEL
FIELD SUSTAINMENT
Spinner INSPECT .1 A
REPLACE .1 C
Spinner Nut INSPECT .1 A
REPLACE .1 C
Stabilator Linkage INSPECT .1 A
REPLACE .1 C
Rudder Linkage INSPECT .1 A
REPLACE .1 C
01070 Field Repair Kit
FRK Utility Bag INSPECT .1 A
REPLACE .1 C
Stab Clip INSPECT .1 A
REPLACE .1 C
Pitot Tube INSPECT .1 A
REPLACE .1 C
Pitot Flat Washer INSPECT .1 A
REPLACE .1 C
Mending Sticks INSPECT .1 A
REPLACE .1 C
Camel Hair Brush INSPECT .1 A
REPLACE .1 C
Snap Screw and INSPECT .1 A
Wrench
REPLACE .1 C
Utility Knife INSPECT .1 A
REPLACE .1 C
Screwdriver, Multi INSPECT .1 A
Tip
REPLACE .1 C
Propeller INSPECT .1 A
REPLACE .1 C
Tape, Black Gaffers INSPECT .1 A
REPLACE .1 C
Stab Horn with Ball INSPECT .1 A
REPLACE .1 C
Fuse, 20A AV BAT INSPECT .1 A
REPLACE .1 C
Pivot Pin, Horizontal INSPECT .1 A
REPLACE .1 C
Bag, Plastic INSPECT .1 A
REPLACE .1 C
O-Ring Wing Tip INSPECT .1 A
REPLACE .1 C
Screw, Fuselage INSPECT .1 A
REPLACE .1 C
Pliers, Needle Nosed INSPECT .1 A
Change 1 0061 00-4

TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0061 00
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

MAINTENANCE LEVEL
FIELD SUSTAINMENT
REPLACE .1 C
Battery, 3.6V GPS INSPECT .1 A
Fill
REPLACE .1 C
Table 2. Tool List.
TOOLS OR
TEST EQUIP MAINTENANCE NATIONAL TOOL
REF CODE LEVEL NOMENCLATURE STOCK NUMBER NUMBER
1 O Field Repair Kit RBTOOL
Table 3. Reference List.
REMARK CODE REMARKS
A PROCEDURE IN WP 0046 00
B PROCEDURE IN WP 0048 00
C PROCEDURE IN WP 0063 00
D PROCEDURE IN WP 0051 00
E PROCEDURE IN WP 0052 00. REQUIRES 3.6V LITHIUM BATTERY.
F PROCEDURE IN WP 0053 00
G PROCEDURE IN WP 0049 00
H PROCEDURE IN WP 0055 00
I PROCEDURE IN WP 0061 00
J PROCEDURE IN WP 0057 00
K PROCEDURE IN WP 0056 00
L PROCEDURE IN WP 0050 00
M PROCEDURE IN WP 0010 00
N PROCEDURE IN WP 0054 00
O PROCEDURE IN WP 0057 01

TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0062 00
NSN 1550-01-538-9256 EIC: 60C
INTRODUCTION TO REPAIR PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOLS LIST (RPSTL) (LRIP AND FRP)
INTRODUCTION
SCOPE
This RPSTL lists and authorizes spares and repair parts; special tools; special test, measurement, and diagnostic
equipment (TMDE); and other special support equipment required for performance of Operator and Unit Level Mainte-
nance of the RQ-11B SUAS. It authorizes the requisitioning, issue, and disposition of spares, repair parts, and special
tools as indicated by the source, maintenance, and recoverability (SMR) codes.
GENERAL
In addition to the Introduction work package, this RPSTL is divided into the following work packages.
1. Repair Parts List Work Packages. Work packages containing lists of spares and repair parts authorized by this
RPSTL for use in the performance of maintenance. These work packages also include parts which must be
removed for replacement of the authorized parts. Parts lists are composed of functional groups in ascending
alphanumeric sequence, with the parts in each group listed in ascending figure and item number sequence.
Sending units, brackets, filters, and bolts are listed with the component they mount on. Bulk materials are listed
by item name in FIG. BULK at the end of the work packages. Repair parts kits are listed separately in their own
functional group and work package. Repair parts for reparable special tools are also listed in a separate work
package. Items listed are shown on the associated illustrations.
2. Special Tools List Work Packages. Work packages containing lists of special tools, special TMDE, and special
support equipment authorized by this RPSTL (as indicated by Basis of Issue (BOI) information in the DESCRIP-
TION AND USABLE ON CODE (UOC) column). Tools that are components of common tool sets and/or Class VII
are not listed.
3. Cross-Reference Indexes Work Packages. There are two cross reference indexes work packages in this RPSTL:
the National Stock Number (NSN) Index work package and the Part Number (P/N) Index work package. The Na-
tional Stock Number Index work package refers you to the figure and item number. The Part Number Index work
package refers you to the figure and item number.
EXPLANATION OF COLUMNS IN THE REPAIR PARTS LIST AND SPECIAL TOOLS LIST WORK PACKAGES
ITEM NO. (Column (1)). Indicates the number used to identify items called out in the illustration.
SMR CODE (Column (2)). The SMR code containing supply/requisitioning information, maintenance level authoriza-
tion criteria, and disposition instruction, as shown in the following breakout:
Source Code Maintenance Code Recoverability Code

XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX
1st two positions: How to 3rd position: who can 4th position: Who can do 5th position: Who
get an item. install, replace, or use the complete repair* on the determines disposition
item. item action on unserviceable
items.
*Complete Repair: Maintenance capacity, capability, and authority to perform all corrective maintenance tasks of the
"Repair" function in a use/user environment in order to restore serviceability to a failed item.
Source Code. The source code tells you how you get an item needed for maintenance, repair, or overhaul of an end
item/equipment. Explanations of source codes follow:
0062 00-1
0062 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
INTRODUCTION – Continued
Source Code Application/Explanation

PA
NOTE
PB
Items coded PC are subject to
PC deterioration.
PD
Stock items; use the applicable NSN to requisition/re-
PE quest items with these source codes. They are autho-
PF rized to the level indicated by the code entered in the 3rd
position of the SMR code.
PG
KD Items with these codes are not to be requested/req-
uisitioned individually. They are part of a kit which is
KF
authorized to the maintenance level indicated in the 3rd
KB position of the SMR code. The complete kit must be
requisitioned and applied.
MO-Made at unit/AVUM level Items with these codes are not to be requisitioned/re-
quested individually. They must be made from bulk
MF-Made at DS/AVIM level
material which is identified by the P/N in the DESCRIP-
MH-Made at GS level TION AND USABLE ON CODE (UOC) column and
ML-Made at SRA listed in the bulk material group work package of the RP-
STL. If the item is authorized to you by the 3rd position
MD-Made at depot code of the SMR code, but the source code indicates it is
made at higher level, order the item from the higher level
of maintenance.
AO-Assembled by unit/AVUM level Items with these codes are not to be requested/req-
uisitioned individually. The parts that make up the
AF-Assembled by DS/AVIM level
assembled item must be requisitioned or fabricated
AH-Assembled by GS level and assembled at the level of maintenance indicated
AL-Assembled by SRA by the source code. If the 3rd position of the SMR code
authorizes you to replace the item, but the source code
AD-Assembled by depot indicates the item is assembled at a higher level, order
the item from the higher level of maintenance.
XA Do not requisition an "XA" coded item. Order the next
higher assembly. (Refer to NOTE below.)
XB If an item is not available from salvage, order it using
the Commercial and Government Entity Code (CAGEC)
and P/N.
XC Installation drawings, diagrams, instruction sheets, field
service drawings; identified by manufacturer’s P/N.
XD Item is not stocked. Order an XD-coded item through
normal supply channels using the CAGEC and P/N
given, if no NSN is available.
0062 00-2
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0062 00
Source Code Application/Explanation
NOTE
Cannibalization or controlled exchange, when authorized, may be used as a source of supply
for items with the above source codes except for those items source coded "XA" or those AV
support items restricted by requirements of AR 750-1.
Maintenance Code. Maintenance codes tell you the level(s) of maintenance authorized to use and repair support
items. The maintenance codes are entered in the third and fourth positions of the SMR code as follows:
Third Position. The maintenance code entered in the third position tells you the lowest maintenance level authorized to
remove, replace, and use an item. The maintenance code entered in the third position will indicate authorization to the
following levels of maintenance:
Maintenance Code Application/Explanation

C- Crew or operator maintenance done within unit/AVUM
maintenance.
O- Unit level/AVUM maintenance can remove, replace, and
use the item.
F- Direct support/AVIM maintenance can remove, replace,
and use the item.
H- General support maintenance can remove, replace, and
use the item.
L- Specialized repair activity can remove, replace, and use
the item.
D- Depot can remove, replace, and use the item.
Fourth Position. The maintenance code entered in the fourth position tells you whether or not the item is to be repaired
and identifies the lowest maintenance level with the capability to do complete repair (perform all authorized repair func-
tions).
NOTE
Some limited repair may be done on the item at a lower level of maintenance, if authorized by
the Maintenance Allocation Chart (MAC) and SMR codes.

O- Unit/AVUM is the lowest level that can do complete
repair of the item.
F- Direct support/AVIM is the lowest level that can do
complete repair of the item.
H- General support is the lowest level that can do complete
repair of the item.
L- Specialized repair activity (enter specialized repair
activity designator) is the lowest level that can do
complete repair of the item.
0062 00-3
0062 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P

D- Depot is the lowest level that can do complete repair of
the item.
Z- Nonreparable. No repair is authorized.
B- No repair is authorized. No parts or special tools are
authorized for maintenance of "B" coded item. However,
the item may be reconditioned by adjusting, lubricating,
etc., at the user level.
Recoverability Code. Recoverability codes are assigned to items to indicate the disposition action on unserviceable
items. The recoverability code is shown in the fifth position of the SMR code as follows:
Recoverability Code Application/Explanation

Z- Nonreparable item. When unserviceable, condemn and
dispose of the item at the level of maintenance shown in
the third position of the SMR code.
O- Reparable item. When uneconomically reparable,
condemn and dispose of the item at the unit level.
F- Reparable item. When uneconomically reparable,
condemn and dispose of the item at the direct support
level.
H- Reparable item. When uneconomically reparable,
condemn and dispose of the item at the general support
level.
D- Reparable item. When beyond lower level repair
capability, return to depot. Condemnation and disposal
of item are not authorized below depot level.
L- Reparable item. Condemnation and disposal not
authorized below Specialized Repair Activity (SRA).
A- Item requires special handling or condemnation
procedures because of specific reasons (such as
precious metal content, high dollar value, critical
material, or hazardous material). Refer to appropriate
manuals/directives for specific instructions.
NSN (Column (3)). The NSN for the item is listed in this column.
CAGEC (Column (4)). The Commercial and Government Entity Code (CAGEC) is a five-digit code which is used to
identify the manufacturer, distributor, or Government agency/activity that supplies the item.
PART NUMBER (Column (5)). Indicates the primary number used by the manufacturer (individual, company, firm, cor-
poration, or Government activity), which controls the design and characteristics of the item by means of its engineering
drawings, specifications, standards, and inspection requirements to identify an item or range of items.
0062 00-4
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0062 00
NOTE
When you use an NSN to requisition an item, the item you receive may have a different P/N from
the number listed.
DESCRIPTION AND USABLE ON CODE (UOC) (Column (6)). This column includes the following information:
1. The federal item name, and when required, a minimum description to identify the item.
2. P/Ns of bulk materials are referenced in this column in the line entry to be manufactured or fabricated.
3. Hardness Critical Item (HCI). A support item that provides the equipment with special protection from electromag-
netic pulse (EMP) damage during a nuclear attack.
4. The statement END OF FIGURE appears just below the last item description in column (6) for a given figure in
both the repair parts list and special tools list work packages.
QUANTITY (QTY) (Column (7)). The QTY (quantity per figure) column indicates the quantity of the item used in the
breakout shown on the illustration/figure, which is prepared for a functional group, subfunctional group, or an assem-
bly. A "V" appearing in this column instead of a quantity indicates that the quantity is variable and quantity may change
from application to application.
EXPLANATION OF CROSS-REFERENCE INDEXES WORK PACKAGES FORMAT AND COLUMNS
1. National Stock Number (NSN) Index Work Package.
STOCK NUMBER Column. This column lists the NSN in National item identification
number (NIIN) sequence. The NIIN consists of the last nine digits of the NSN.
NSN
(e.g., 5385- 01-574-1476)
NIIN
When using this column to locate an item, ignore the first four digits of the NSN. However, the complete NSN should
be used when ordering items by stock number.
FIG. Column. This column lists the number of the figure where the item is identified/located.
The figures are in numerical order in the repair parts list and special tools list work packages.
ITEM Column. The item number identifies the item associated with the figure listed in the adjacent FIG.
column. This item is also identified by the NSN listed on the same line.
2. Part Number (P/N) Index Work Package. P/Ns in this index are listed in ascending alphanumeric sequence
(vertical arrangement of letter and number combinations which places the first letter or digit of each group in
order A through Z, followed by the numbers 0 through 9 and each following letter or digit in like order).
PART NUMBER Column. Indicates the P/N assigned to the item.
FIG. Column. This column lists the number of the figure where the item is
identified/located in the repair parts list and special tools list work packages.
ITEM Column. The item number is the number assigned to the item as it appears in the figure referenced in
the adjacent figure number column.
3. Reference Designator Index Work Package. Reference designators in this index are listed
in ascending alphanumeric sequence (vertical arrangement of letter and number
combination which places the first letter or digit of each group in order "A" through
"Z," followed by the numbers "0" through "9" and each following letter or digit in like order).
REFERENCE DESIGNATOR Column. Indicates the reference designator assigned to the item.
FIG. Column. This column lists the number of the figure where the item
is identified/located in the repair parts list or special tools list work package.
ITEM Column. The item number is the number assigned to the item as it appears in the figure referenced in
the adjacent figure number column.
0062 00-5
0062 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
HOW TO LOCATE REPAIR PARTS

1. When NSNs or P/Ns Are Not Known.
First. Using the table of contents, determine the assembly group to which the
item belongs. This is necessary since figures are prepared for assembly
groups and subassembly groups, and lists are divided into the same groups.
Second. Find the figure covering the functional group or the subfunctional group to which the item belongs.
Third. Identify the item on the figure and note the number(s).
Fourth. Look in the repair parts list work packages for the figure and item numbers. The NSNs and part
numbers are on the same line as the associated item numbers.
2. When NSN Is Known.
First. If you have the NSN, look in the STOCK NUMBER column of the NSN index work package.
The NSN is arranged in NIIN sequence. Note the figure and item number next to the NSN.
Second. Turn to the figure and locate the item number. Verify that the item is the one you are looking for.
3. When P/N Is Known.
First. If you have the P/N and not the NSN, look in the PART NUMBER
column of the P/N index work package. Identify the figure and item number.
Second. Look up the item on the figure in the applicable repair parts list work package.
0062 00-6
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0063 00
NSN 1550-01-538-9256 EIC: 60C
REPAIR PARTS LIST (LRIP AND FRP)

0063 00-1 Change 1 – 11 June 2008

0063 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
Figure 1. System, RQ-11B, Army, SUAS.
Change 1 0063 00-2

TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0063 00
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)

ITEM SMR PART DESCRIPTION AND USABLE ON
NO. CODE NSN CAGEC NUMBER CODE(UOC) QTY
GROUP 0101
SYSTEM, RQ-11B, ARMY, SUAS
FIGURE 1. SYSTEM, RQ-11B, ARMY, SUAS
ADDDD 1550-01-538-9256 3SQS9 RA54429007 FRP> System, RQ-11B, Army, SUAS ........................ 1
.
ADDDD 1550-01-538-9256 3SQS9 RA54429004 LRIP> System, RQ-11B, Army, SUAS ....................... 1
.
1 PAODD 3SQS9 RA57000 . Case, Storage ............................................................ 2

2 AODDD 3SQS9 RA54600 . Air Vehicle (see Fig 2) ................................................ 3
3 PAODD 3SQS9 RA51030 . IR Payload Side ......................................................... 2
4 AODDD 3SQS9 RA56100 . GCS-RVT Assembly (See Fig 3) ................................ 2
5 AODDD 3SQS9 RA51009005 . FRP> Initial Spares Pkg (See Fig 4) ......................... 1
.
AODDD 3SQS9 RA54440005 . LRIP> Initial Spares Pkg (Not Shown) ..................... 1
.
END OF FIGURE
0063 00-3 Change 1

0063 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
Figure 2. Air Vehicle.
Change 1 0063 00-4

TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0063 00
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)

GROUP 0102
AIR VEHICLE
FIGURE 2. AIR VEHICLE
AODDD 3SQS9 RA54600 Air Vehicle NHA Fig 1 ................................................... 1

1 PAOOZ 3SQS9 RA54682 . Right Wing ................................................................. 1
PAOZZ 3SQS9 RA54882 . . O-Ring, Wingtip ....................................................... 1
2 PAODZ 3SQS9 RA54684AX . Tailboom .................................................................... 1
PAOZZ 3SQS9 RA54881 . . Stabilator Linkage .................................................... 1
PAOZZ 3SQS9 RA54880 . . Rudder Linkage ....................................................... 1
PAOZZ 3SQS9 RA51410 . . Stab Horn with Ball ................................................... 1
PAOZZ 3SQS9 RA54840 . . Pivot Pin, Horizontal ................................................. 1
3 PAOOZ 3SQS9 RA54683 . Stabilator ................................................................... 1
PAOZZ 3SQS9 RA54746 . . Stab Clip and Screws ............................................... 1
4 PAOOZ 3SQS9 RA54681 . Left Wing .................................................................... 1
PAOZZ 3SQS9 RA54882 . . O-Ring, Wingtip ....................................................... 1
5 PAODD 3SQS9 RA53650 . RQ-11B Fuselage ...................................................... 1
PAOZZ 3SQS9 RA54066 . . Propeller .................................................................. 1
PAOZZ 3SQS9 RA54265 . . Spinner .................................................................... 1
PAOZZ 3SQS9 RA54659 . . Spinner Nut .............................................................. 1
PAOZZ 3SQS9 RA55377 . . Pitot Tube ................................................................ 1
PAOZZ 3SQS9 RA55379 . . Pitot Flat Washer ...................................................... 1
PAOZZ 3SQS9 RA54747 . . Snap Screw and Wrench .......................................... 1
PAOZZ 3SQS9 RA54690 . . Battery 3.6V GPS ..................................................... 1
6 PAOOZ 3SQS9 RA54680 . Center Wing ............................................................... 1
PAOZZ 3SQS9 RA54747 . . Snap Screw and Wrench .......................................... 1
7 PAOOZ 3SQS9 RA51004 . AV Soft Pack .............................................................. 1
8 PAODD 3SQS9 RA51479 . FRP> EO Payload Fwd-Side ................................... 1
.
9 PAODD 3SQS9 RA51008 . LRIP> EO Payload Fwd-Side ................................. 1

.
10 AODDD 3SQS9 RA54844 . LRIP> Field Repair Kit (see Figure 7) ...................... 1
.
AODDD 3SQS9 RA54844-002 . FRP> Field Repair Kit (see Figure 7) ........................ 1
.
11 PAOZZ 3SQS9 RA54892 . Flight Log (Not Shown) ............................................... 1
END OF FIGURE
0063 00-5 Change 1

0063 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
Figure 3. GCS-RVT Assembly.
Change 1 0063 00-6

TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0063 00
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)

GROUP 0103
GCS-RVT
FIGURE 3. GCS-RVT ASSEMBLY
AODDD 3SQS9 RA56100 GCS-RVT Assembly NHA Fig 1 ................................... 2

1 PAOOZ 3SQS9 RA56357 . GCS-RVT Soft Pack ................................................... 1
2 PAODD 3SQS9 RA56103 . RF Unit Assembly1 , 2 ................................................ 1
3 PAODD 3SQS9 RA56102 . Hub Assembly ............................................................ 1
4 PAOZZ 3SQS9 RA56223 . Uplink Antenna .......................................................... 1
5 PAOZZ 3SQS9 RA56285 . Ethernet Cable ........................................................... 1
6 PAOZZ 3SQS9 RA56138006 . RF Cable .................................................................... 1
7 PAOZZ 3SQS9 RA56363 . Mast Bag .................................................................... 1
8 PAOZZ 3SQS9 RA56104 . GCS-RVT Mast .......................................................... 1
9 PAOZZ 3SQS9 RA56239 . Controller Hood .......................................................... 1
10 PAODD 3SQS9 RA56101 . Controller RQ-11B ..................................................... 1
END OF FIGURE
1 Replacement P/N RA50440 Nomenclature 8 Ch RF Unit.

2 Controller (RA56101) and Hub Assembly (RA56102) shall be replaced when upgrading RF Unit (RA 56103) to 8 Ch RF Unit (RA50440).
0063 00-7 Change 1

0063 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
Figure 4. Initial Spares Package.
Change 1 0063 00-8

TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0063 00
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)

GROUP 0104
INITIAL SPARES PACKAGE
FIGURE 4. INITIAL SPARES PACKAGE
AODDD 3SQS9 RA51009-005 FRP> Initial Spares Pkg NHA Fig 1 ............................ 1
.
AODDD 3SQS9 RA54440-005 LRIP> Initial Spares Pkg NHA Fig 1 ........................... 1
.
1 PAODZ 3SQS9 RA51011 . LRIP> GCS-RVT Bat Chg ....................................... 1

.
2 AOODD 3SQS9 RA09000029 . Flying Surfaces Kit (see Fig 5) .................................... 2

3 PAOZZ 3SQS9 RA51137 . LRIP> NATO Slave Cable ........................................ 1
.
4 PAODZ 3SQS9 RA54972 . LRIP> AV Bat Chg AC ............................................. 1

.
5 PAODZ 3SQS9 RA54150001 . LRIP> AV Bat Chg DC ............................................. 1

.
6 AOODD 3SQS9 RA09000028 . Small Spares Kit (See Fig 6) ....................................... 1

7 PAODA 3SQS9 RA51010 . GCS-RVT Bat BB-2557 .............................................. 10
8 PAOZA 3SQS9 RA54677 . Bat, AV Rechargeable/Cap ....................................... 10
9 PAOOZ 3SQS9 RA54480 . Case, Bat AV .............................................................. 2
10 PAOOZ 3SQS9 RA56138050 . FRP> RF cable 50 ft ................................................. 1
.
PAOZZ 3SQS9 RA56814 . 15 AMP Fuse (not shown) .......................................... 1

PAOZZ 3SQS9 RA56417 . 12 VDC Power Adapter (not shown) ........................... 1
PAOZZ 3SQS9 RA56419 . Alligator Adapter (not shown) ..................................... 1
11 PAODZ 3SQS9 RA56500 . FRP> Universal Bat Charger ................................... 2
.
12 PAOOZ 3SQS9 RA54920 . . AC Cable (not shown) .............................................. 1

13 PAOOZ 3SQS9 RA56860 . . DC Cable (not shown) .............................................. 1
14 PAOOZ 3SQS9 RA54859 . . NATO Adapter (not shown) ...................................... 1
15 PAOOZ 3SQS9 RA56590 . . GCS, BAT Adapter (not shown) ................................ 2
END OF FIGURE
0063 00-9 Change 1

0063 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
Figure 5. Flying Surfaces Kit.
Change 1 0063 00-10

TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0063 00
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)

GROUP 0105
FLYING SURFACES KIT
FIGURE 5. FLYING SURFACES KIT
AOODD 3SQS9 RA09000029 Flying Surfaces Kit NHA Fig 4 ...................................... 1

1 PAOOZ 3SQS9 RA51130 . Case, Fly Surface ...................................................... 1
2 PAOOZ 3SQS9 RA54683 . Stabilator ................................................................... 1
3 PAOOZ 3SQS9 RA54682 . Right Wing ................................................................. 1
4 PAOOZ 3SQS9 RA54680 . Center Wing ............................................................... 1
5 PAOOZ 3SQS9 RA54681 . Left Wing .................................................................... 1
6 PAOOZ 3SQS9 RA54684AX . Tailboom .................................................................... 1
END OF FIGURE
0063 00-11 Change 1

0063 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
Figure 6. Small Spare Parts Kit.
Change 1 0063 00-12

TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0063 00
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)

GROUP 0106
SMALL SPARE PARTS KIT
FIGURE 6. SMALL SPARE PARTS KIT
AOODD 3SQS9 RA09000028 Small Spare Parts Kit NHA Fig 4 .................................. 1
1 PAOOZ 3SQS9 RA54854 . Case, Sm Spare Parts ................................................ 1
2 PAODZ 3SQS9 RA51018 . Simulator, Dongle Cab ............................................... 1
3 PAOZZ 3SQS9 RA54432 . KYK Adapter Cable .................................................... 1
4 PAOZZ 3SQS9 RA54747 . Snap Screw and Wrench ............................................ 21
5 PAOZZ 3SQS9 RA54066 . Propeller .................................................................... 20
6 PAOZZ 3SQS9 RA54746 . Stab Clip and Screws ................................................. 21
7 PAOZZ 3SQS9 RA54265 . Spinner ...................................................................... 1
8 PAOZZ 3SQS9 RA54659 . Spinner Nut ................................................................ 1
9 PAOZZ 3SQS9 RA54881 . Stabilator Linkage ...................................................... 1
10 PAOZZ 3SQS9 RA54880 . Rudder Linkage ......................................................... 1
END OF FIGURE
0063 00-13 Change 1

0063 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
Figure 7. Field Repair Kit.
Change 1 0063 00-14

TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0063 00
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)

GROUP 0107
FIELD REPAIR KIT
FIGURE 7. FIELD REPAIR KIT
AOOZZ 3SQS9 RA54844-002 FRP> Field Repair Kit NHA Fig 2 ............................... 3
.
1 PAOZZ 3SQS9 RA54495 . FRK Utility bag ........................................................... 1

2 PAOZZ 3SQS9 RA54746 . Stab Clip And Screws ................................................. 4
3 PAOZZ 3SQS9 RA55377 . Pitot Tube ................................................................... 2
4 PAOZZ 3SQS9 RA55379 . Pitot Flat Washer ........................................................ 2
5 PAOZZ 3SQS9 RA55425 . Mending Stick ............................................................ 5
6 PAOZZ 3SQS9 RA54846 . Camel Hair Brush ....................................................... 1
7 PAOZZ 3SQS9 RA54747 . Snap Screw and Wrench ............................................ 4
8 PAOZZ 3SQS9 RA55427 . Utility Knife ................................................................. 1
9 PAOZZ 3SQS9 RA57470 . Screwdriver Multi Tip .................................................. 1
10 PAOZZ 3SQS9 RA54066 . Propeller .................................................................... 2
11 PAOZZ 3SQS9 RA51306 . Tape, Gaffers ............................................................. 1
12 PAOZZ 3SQS9 RA51410 . Stab Horn with Ball ..................................................... 1
13 PAOZZ 3SQS9 RA54308 . Fuse, 20 A, AV Bat ..................................................... 1
14 PAOZZ 3SQS9 RA54840 . Pivot Pin, Horizontal ................................................... 2
15 PAOZZ 3SQS9 RA55526 . Bag, Plastic ................................................................ 2
16 PAOZZ 3SQS9 RA54882 . O-Ring, wingtip .......................................................... 2
17 PAOZZ 3SQS9 RA55388 . Screw, Fuselage ........................................................ 4
18 PAOZZ 3SQS9 RA57471 . Pliers, Needle Nosed ................................................. 1
19 PAOZZ 3SQS9 RA54690 . Battery, 3.6V GPS fil ................................................... 1
END OF FIGURE
0063 00-15/16 blank Change 1

TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0064 00
NSN 1550-01-538-9256 EIC: 60C
NATIONAL STOCK NUMBER INDEX (LRIP AND FRP)
STOCK NUMBER FIG. ITEM

1550-01-538-9256 1 1
0064 00-1/2 blank

TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0065 00
(RQ-11B)
NSN 1550-01-538-9256 EIC: 60C
PART NUMBER INDEX (LRIP AND FRP)

PART NUMBER FIG. ITEM PART NUMBER FIG. ITEM
RA09000028 4 6 RA54746 7 2
RA09000029 4 2 RA54747 6 4
RA51004 2 7 RA54747 7 7
RA51008 2 9 RA54840 7 14
RA51010 4 7 RA54844 2 10
RA51011 4 1 RA54846 7 6
RA51018 6 2 RA54854 6 1
RA51030 1 3 RA54859 4 14
RA51130 5 1 RA54880 6 10
RA51137 4 3 RA54881 6 9
RA51306 7 11 RA54882 7 16
RA51410 7 12 RA54892 2 11
RA51479 2 8 RA54920 4 12
RA53650 2 5 RA54972 4 4
RA54265 6 7 RA55377 7 3
RA54066 6 5 RA55379 7 4
RA54066 7 10 RA55388 7 17
RA54150001 4 5 RA55425 7 5
RA54308 7 13 RA55427 7 8
RA54432 6 3 RA55526 7 15
RA54440005 1 5 RA56100 1 4
RA54480 4 9 RA56101 3 10
RA54495 7 1 RA56102 3 3
RA54600 1 2 RA56103 3 2
RA54659 6 8 RA56104 3 8
RA54677 4 8 RA56138006 3 6
RA54680 2 6 RA56138050 4 10
RA54680 5 4 RA56223 3 4
RA54681 2 4 RA56239 3 9
RA54681 5 5 RA56285 3 5
RA54682 2 1 RA56357 3 1
RA54682 5 3 RA56363 3 7
RA54683 2 3 RA56500 4 11
RA54683 5 2 RA56590 4 15
RA54684AX 2 2 RA56860 4 13
RA54684AX 5 6 RA57000 1 1
RA54690 7 19 RA57470 7 9
RA54746 6 6 RA57471 7 18

TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0066 00
NSN 1550-01-538-9256 EIC: 60C
COMPONENTS OF END ITEM (COEI) AND BASIC ISSUE ITEMS (BII) LISTS (LRIP AND FRP)
COMPONENTS OF END ITEM (COEI) AND BASIC ISSUE ITEMS (BII) LISTS INTRODUCTION
Scope
This work package lists COEI and BII for the Small Unmanned Aerial Vehicle to help you inventory items for safe and
efficient operation of the equipment.
General
The COEI and BII information is divided into the following lists:
• Components of End Item (COEI). This list is for information purposes only and is not authority to requisition
replacements. These items are part of the RQ-11B. As part of the end item, these items must be with the end
item whenever it is issued or transferred between property accounts. Items of COEI are removed and separately
packaged for transportation or shipment only when necessary. Illustrations are furnished to help you find and
identify the items.
• Basic Issue Items (BII). These essential items are required to place the RQ-11B in operation, operate it, and to
do emergency repairs. Although shipped separately, BII must be with the RQ-11B during operation and when
it is transferred between property accounts. Listing these items is your authority to request/requisition them for
replacement based on authorization of the end item by the TOE/MTOE. Illustrations are furnished to help you
find and identify the items.
Explanation of Columns in the COEI List and BII List
Column (1) ILLUS Number. Gives you the number of the item illustrated.
Column (2) National Stock Number (NSN). Identifies the stock number of the item to be used for requisitioning pur-
poses.
Column (3) Description, CAGEC, and Part Number. Identifies the Federal item name (in all capital letters) followed by a
minimum description when needed. The stowage location of COEI and BII is also included in this column. The last line
below the description is the CAGEC (Commercial and Government Entity Code) (in parentheses) and the part number.
Column (4) Usable On Code. When applicable, gives you a code if the item you need is not the same for different
models of equipment. (Add the following only as applicable. Replace Xs with appropriate codes and model numbers.)
These codes are identified below:
CODE USED ON
XXX Model XXX
XXX Model XXXX
XXX Model XXXXX
Column (5) Unit of Issue (U/I). Indicates the physical measurement or count of the item as issued per the National Stock
Number shown in column (2).
Column (6) Qty Rqr. Indicates the quantity required.
0066 00-1 Change 1 – 11 June 2008

0066 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
Figure 1. RQ-11B SUAS.
Change 1 0066 00-2

TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0066 00
Table 1. Components Of End Item List.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

ILLUS NATIONAL DESCRIPTION CAGEC USABLE
NUMBER STOCK NUMBER AND PART NUMBER ON CODE U/I QTY RQR
1 STORAGE CASE EA 2
(3SQ39) RA57000
2 AIR VEHICLE EA 3
(3SQ39) RA54600
3 EO PAYLOAD FWD-SIDE EA 3
(3SQ39) RA51008
4 IR PAYLOAD SIDE EA 2
(3SQ39) RA51030
5 GCS-RVT ASSEMBLY EA 2
(3SQ39) RA56100
6 INITIAL SPARES PKG EA 1
(3SQ39) RA54440005
7 FIELD REPAIR KIT (SEE FIG 7) EA 3
(3SQ39) RA54844
0066 00-3 Change 1

0066 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
Figure 2. RQ-11B SUAS.
Change 1 0066 00-4

TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0066 00
Table 2. Basic Issue Items List.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

ILLUS NATIONAL DESCRIPTION CAGEC USABLE
NUMBER STOCK NUMBER AND PART NUMBER ON CODE U/I QTY RQR
RSTA KIT RQ-11B EA 1

RA09000031
1 CASE, RSTA EA 1
RA090000019
2 LRIP> Laptop, CF18
. LRIP EA 1
RA09000001
2 LRIP/FRP> Laptop, CF19
. LRIP/FRP EA 1
RA09000032
3 LRIP> Cable, CF18 Power AC
. LRIP EA 1
RA09000002
3 LRIP/FRP> Cable, CF19 Power AC
. LRIP/FRP EA 1
RA09000033
4 CABLE, POWER DC EA 1
RA09000006
5 DVD EXTERNAL EA 1
RA09000021
6 CABLE, POWER AC EA 1
RA09000030
7 CABLE, POWER USB EA 2
RA09000025
8 CABLE, USB EA 2
RA09000024
9 HARD DRIVE EXTERNAL 80GB EA 1
RA09000020
10 WORLD SCENERY DISK (SET OF 3) EA 1
RA57426
11 TM 1-1550-695-13&P EA 1

TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0067 00
NSN 1550-01-538-9256 EIC: 60C
EXPENDABLE AND DURABLE ITEMS LIST INTRODUCTION (LRIP AND FRP)
EXPENDABLE AND DURABLE ITEMS LIST INTRODUCTION

Scope
This work package lists expendable and durable items that you will need to operate and maintain the RQ-11B. This
list is for information only and is not authority to requisition the listed items. These items are authorized to you by CTA
50-970, Expendable/Durable Items (Except Medical, Class V, Repair Parts, and Heraldic Items), CTA 50-909, Field
and Garrison Furnishings and Equipment or CTA 8-100, Army Medical Department Expendable/Durable Items.
Explanation of Columns in the Expendable/Durable Items List
Column (1) Item No. This number is assigned to the entry in the list and is referenced in the narrative instructions to
identify the item (e.g., Use brake fluid (WP 0098, item 5)).
Column (2) Level. This column identifies the lowest level of maintenance that requires the listed item (include as appli-
cable: C = Operator/Crew, O = Unit/AVUM, F = Direct Support/AVIM, H = General Support, D = Depot).
Column (3) National Stock Number (NSN). This is the NSN assigned to the item which you can use to requisition it.
Column (4) Item Name, Description, Part Number/(CAGEC). This column provides the other information you need to
identify the item. The last line below the description is the part number and the Commercial and Government Entity
Code (CAGEC) (in parentheses).
Column (5) U/I. Unit of Issue (U/I) code shows the physical measurement or count of an item, such as gallon, dozen,
gross, etc.
Table 1. Expendable and Durable Items List.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

ITEM NATIONAL ITEM NAME, DESCRIPTION,
NUMBER LEVEL STOCK NUMBER CAGE, PART NUMBER U/I
1 O Tape, Painters, Blue (Acceptable Substitute) () 1

MMM 2090-14
0067 00-1/2 blank

TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0068 00
NSN 1550-01-538-9256 EIC: 60C
(REPRODUCIBLE) SUAS INCIDENT REPORT (LRIP AND FRP)
LOST OR DESTROYED AV REPORT

This Report will be completed whenever there is an incident that involves the loss of a SUAS, damage that renders the
SUAS Non-Repairable or an injury if incurred as a result of SUAS Operations. Necessary safeguard procedures and
classification markings will apply in the event that this report format becomes classified when completed.
1. Air Vehicle Information
a. Fuselage S/N _____________________
b. Payload Type: EO ____ F/L IR ____ S/L IR ____
c. GCS # _____________________ AV Battery # _____________________
2. Owning Unit/UIC _____________________
3. Date of loss: ______________________(DD/MO/YR) Time: ______________________ (Local/Zulu)
4. Site/location (at time of onset of incident):
a. GCU/GCS Grid: ______________________ Ground Elevation (MSL):
______________________
b. AV Grid: ______________________ AV Altitude (AGL): ______________________
5. Flight Log information:
a. Vehicle Operator (Name/Rank): ______________________
(1) Date/Location of Certification: ______________________
b. Mission Operator (Name/Rank): ______________________
(1) Date/Location of Certification: ______________________
c. Channel: ______________________ GPS Keyed: ____ Y ____ N
d. Launch Time:______________________
e. Land/Incident Time: ______________________
f. Duration of Flight: ______________________
g. Weather: ______________________
h. Temperature: ______________________
i. Wind Speed: ______________________
j. Wind Direction: ______________________
k. Lighting: Night ____ Dawn ____ Day ____ Dusk ____
6. Other Factors:
a. Moonlight/illumination: ______________________
b. Precipitation: ______________________
c. Clouds: ______________________
d. (Other): ______________________
7. Circumstances:
a. Origin/launch site: ______________________
b. Mission: ______________________
0068 00-1
0068 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
c. Mission Data File Name: ___________________ (Attach following information; Waypoints &
Altitudes, Rally Point & Altitude, LOL Setting)
d. Launch Problem: ______________________ Landing Problem: ______________________
e. Problem during flight: ______________________
f. Flight mode at time of loss: M____ A ____ H ____ L ____ N ____
g. Commanded altitude or throttle setting: ______________________
h. Last known AV altitude above ground: ______________________ Feet
i. Last known AV heading: ______________________ Degrees magnetic
j. Last known AV location: ______________________
k. Rally point location and altitude: Waypoint E ________ ________Waypoint L ________ ________
Home ________ ________
l. Loss of Link indications:
(1) Did en route rally message appear on Hand Controller? Y ____ N ____
(2) Did autoland appear on Hand Controller? Y ____ N ____
(3) Autoland location: ______________________
m. GPS startup problems: ______________________
n. Previous problems/maintenance issue that may have contributed: _____________________
o. Flight recorded? Y / N Location of file ______________________
8. Summary of mishap and dam-
age:_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
9. Actions taken upon/after loss (search pattern used, number
of searchers, duration of search, use of AV to assist, etc.):
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
10. Damage
a. AV: ______________________
b. DoD property damage: ____________________________________________
c. Private property damage: __________________________________________
11. Personnel information and injuries (if any).
a. Injured Personnel (Name, Rank Unit Type Injury):
__________________________________________________________________
b. Injured Personnel (Name, Rank Unit Type Injury):
__________________________________________________________________
c. Date and location of Pilot/Mission Controller completion of certified training:
____________________________________________
d. Witnesses: (Name, Rank, and role (i.e., RVT Data Capture, UAS Team Leader, etc.))
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
0068 00-2
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0068 00
e. Other personnel: (Name, Rank, and role (i.e., search))

___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
Received/Reviewed Printed Name & Initials Date

Company Commander
Raven Master Trainer
Safety Accident Investigator
Report of Survey Officer
0068 00-3/4 blank

TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0069 00
NSN 1550-01-538-9256 EIC: 60C
(REPRODUCIBLE) SUAS MISSION REQUEST FORM (LRIP AND FRP)
SUAS MISSION REQUEST FORM

Requestor Information
Unit: ________________________________
POC: ________________________________
Phone: ________________________________
Email: ________________________________
Contact Frequency: ________________________________
Mission Purpose: ____________________________________________
Requested Name of Airspace Control Measure: ________________________________
Launch Site (Grid) ___________ Recovery Site (Grid) ____________
Launch Site Altitude (MSL) _____ Recovery Site Altitude (MSL) ______
SUAS Channel ___________
Type of Measure (Shape) Mark an "X" next to type requested:
ROZ (Circle) Grid coordinate of center point ______ Radius _____ (Nm/miles/Km)
¨
Route (Corridor) Enter two coordinates & width for each segment. Identify (Nm/m/km)
¨
1. __________ w: ____ 5. __________ w: ____ 9. __________ w: ____
2. __________ w: ____ 6. __________ w: ____ 10. __________ w: ____
3. __________ w: ____ 7. __________ w: ____ 11. __________ w: ____
4. __________ w: ____ 8. __________ w: ____ 12. __________ w: ____
Box (Can have more than 4 points.) Enter a coordinate for each corner of the shape:
¨
1. 5. 9.
2. 6. 10.
3. 7. 11.
4. 8. 12.
Flight Altitude in AGL Minimum: __________ Maximum: __________

DTG of Mission: Start (Launch) __________ Stop (Recovery) __________
NOTE: ZULU TIME ONLY! Zulu = Local +/- ____ Hours.
DTG Request Submitted to Battalion S-3: ________________
0069 00-1
0069 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
OFFICE USE
Battalion S-3: Reviewed by __________________________________
Sent to ADAM/BAE (POC and DTG) ___________________
Comments:
ADAM/BAE: Received By __________________________________
Approved/Disapproved (Circle One) By __________________________
Sent to HHQ for inclusion in ACO (POC and DTG) __________________
Comments:
IMMEDIATE MISSION REQUEST FORMAT:

Line 1: Unit Identification (call sign and frequency)
Line 2: Launch and recovery site
Line 3: Restricted Operating Area (ROA) location (includes GPS coordinates and operating altitude
Line 4: Ingress route azimuth and distance
Line 5: Egress route azimuth and distance
Line 6: Times and durations of mission
Line 7: SUAS operating channel
0069 00-2
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0070 00
NSN 1550-01-538-9256 EIC: 60C
(REPRODUCIBLE) FLIGHT LOG (LRIP AND FRP)
FLIGHT LOG
Vehicle Operator (VO): Location:

Mission Operator (MO): Mission:
Unit: AV#: GCS#: RVT#: AV Battery: Pri Rech
Channel: 1 2 3 4 GPS Keyed: Y N Comments/Damage
Assessment:
Date: Launch Time:
Weather: Land Time:
Temp: Duration:
Windspeed: Wind Dir:
Lighting: Night Dawn Day Dusk
Camera: Color S-IR F-IR
Assessment:
Date: Launch Time:
Weather: Land Time:
Temp: Duration:
Assessment:
Date: Launch Time:
Weather: Land Time:
Temp: Duration:
0070 00-1/2 blank

TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0071 00
NSN 1550-01-538-9256 EIC: 60C
RECONNAISSANCE, SURVEILLANCE, AND TARGET ACQUISITION (RSTA) KIT (LRIP AND FRP)
RECONNAISSANCE, SURVEILLANCE, AND TARGET ACQUISITION (RSTA) KIT

Overview
The Reconnaissance, Surveillance, and Target Acquisition (RSTA) kit is intended to facilitate mission planning, moni-
toring of mission progress, and observing, recording, and processing of video and still images derived from the Small
Unmanned Aircraft System (SUAS). The RSTA kit is fielded to units on the same basis as the SUAS. The RSTA kit is
employed by the SUAS operator as an optional element of their normal mission.
Figure 1. RSTA Components.
0071 00-1
0071 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
The primary component of the kit is a ruggedized laptop. The RSTA Computer can be in a stand-alone mode to plan
and review missions, or it can connect with the GCS in operational mode or with the simulator. When in stand-alone
mode, no external hardware is needed. When used with the GCS, the Ethernet cable (provided with the GCS) is used
to connect the GCS Mission Operator Port and the Ethernet port of the computer. Additional RSTA components include
a USB CD-RW/DVD-ROM drive, an 80 GB external hard drive, cables and adaptors.
Components
The components of the RSTA kit are shown in Figure 1. The components are carried in a hard-sided, molded case that
may be locked with user provided locks for security, The components are organized and secured within foam compart-
ments.
1. Storage Hard Case
2. RSTA laptop
3. AC Adapter and Cord
4. LIND Power Cable
5. CD-RW/DVD-ROM Drive
6. AC External Power Supply Cable
7. High Speed USB Cable (2 ea)
8. USB Power Sharing Cable (2 ea)
9. External Hard Drive
10. World Scenery Disks (Set of 3)
NOTE
• The USB Power Sharing Cables and AC cables are not required when connecting to a
laptop with USB 2.0 ports.
• For USB 1.0 operations, the operator will be required to use both USB and USB Power
Sharing Cables or USB Cable and AC External Power Supply Cable depending on the
number of available parts.
• The CD/DVD and Hard Drive Power Cables are interchangeable.
ASSEMBLY STARTUP AND LOGIN PROCEDURES
0071 00-2
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0071 00
1. Remove the laptop from the storage case.
1. 16V DC Power Jack

2. USB Port
3. USB Port
4. Modem Port (Disabled)
5. LAN/Ethernet Port
Figure 2. Laptop Connections.

2. Connect the computer Power Jack to a power source (military battery with the LIND cable or commercial
power using the AC adaptor. Refer toFigure 3.
Figure 3. Power Cable Options.

3. Slide the power switch to the right and hold it for approximately one second until the power indicator turns on
before releasing it.
4. If GCS is required, connect the GCS Ethernet cableWP 0063 00, Figure 3, Item 5 between the laptop LAN
Port (Figure 2) and the Mission Operator Port on the GCS Hub Unit (WP 0010 00, Figure 12 ).
5. Depress CTRL-ALT-DEL buttons simultaneously to log in.
0071 00-3
0071 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
NOTE
The password supplied during training consists of at least 10 alphanumeric and special char-
acters. At the minimum the password shall contain 2 upper case letters, 2 lower case letters,
2 numbers and 2 special characters. Password is set to expire in 90 days from the date set. If
operator fails to successfully login after 15 attempts, the laptop will lock. The laptop will remain
locked for 5 minutes. After the 5 minute lockout period, the operator will be allowed to re-attempt
logon.
6. Read and acknowledge the security banner, then Enter the User Name and Password.
7. If the virus definition warning appears, click on “CLOSE” and contact your unit’s information assurance
personnel to obtain updated virus definitions.
8. If external Hard Drive (HD) is required, plug High Speed USB Cable into the device, and connect to one of
the USB ports in Figure 2. (external or additional USB Power cable is not required).
9. If CD/DVD is required, plug High Speed USB Cable into the device, and connect to one of the USB ports in
Figure 2. External Power is not required, however USB/EXT power switch on the back of the device must be
set to USB when not connected to AC power.
NOTE
When an Ethernet cable is connected to a Hub that is powered on, and the connection is
ENABLED the icon will appear as in Figure 4.
Figure 4. LAN Connection.

10. If the Hub is powered off, the Ethernet cable is disconnected, or the computer is not configured properly, the
LAN icon will appear as disconnected Figure 5, Sheet 1, and the following dialogue box Figure 5 , Sheet 2,
will pop up when attempting to connect to the GCU.
Figure 5. LAN Icon Disconnected (Sheet 1 of 2).
Figure 5. LAN Icon Disconnected (Sheet 2 of 2).
0071 00-4
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0071 00
HARDWARE CONFIGURATION
The Laptop IP address is set prior to delivery. However, if the hardware configuration must be reset, follow the steps
below for setting the IP address
1. Open the “Start” menu icon, located at the bottom left corner of laptop screen.
2. Select the “Control Panel” icon.
3. Select the “Network Connections” icon.
4. Right Click the “Local Area Connection” icon and select “Properties”.
5. Scroll down and highlight the “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)” item and select “Properties”.
6. Select the “Use the following IP address:” radio button.
7. Type the following in IP address: 192.168.1.2 (see Figure 6, Item 1).
8. Type the following in Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0 (see Figure 6, Item 2) and click “OK” (default gateway,
Preferred and Alternate DNS Server fields are blank).
Figure 6. IP Properties.
0071 00-5
0071 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
HARDWARE CONFIGURATION – Continued
9. Click “OK” on the Local Area Connection Properties window.

10. On the Network Connection Folder window, ensure the Local Area Connection is “Connected” (see Figure 7,
Item 1).
Figure 7. Local Area Network Connected.
0071 00-6
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0071 00
HARDWARE CONFIGURATION – Continued
11. If the connection is “Disabled” (see Figure 8, Item 1) right click and select “Enable”. See Figure 8, Item 2. The
Hub must be powered on, and the Ethernet Cable must be connected.
Figure 8. Connection Disabled.

Hardware Shutdown
1. Close all windows.
2. Simultaneously press CNTL+ALT+DEL.
3. Click “Shutdown”.
4. Unplug any external devices.
5. Re-Pack in case.
SOFTWARE
0071 00-7
0071 00 TM 1-1550-695-13&P
CAUTION
Software will not be added, deleted or upgraded by the user. The laptop is provided for flight
control so any changes may affect safe operation.
The software loaded on the laptop is identified by the icons on the desktop view of Windows™. The below list provides
a brief description of each application.
1. My Computer – My Computer shows you the contents of your hard disk drive and external devices (CD-RW/DVD-
ROM). You can also search for and open files and folders, and gain access to options in Control Panel to modify
your computer’s settings.
NOTE
2. AV Screener – Provides the capability to view video and associated Air Vehicle data, record video and data, cap-
ture still images and data from the video, and replay the recorded video and data.
3. AV Screener Live – Provides AV Screener view and record capability within small re-sizable window.
NOTE
If hard drive is not connected, a small “?” symbol will appear on the icon.
4. USB Hard Drive – Provides a shortcut to the external USB Hard Drive.
5. IETM (IADS) – Provides a means of viewing the RQ-11B Interactive Electronic Technical Manual.
6. SUAV Simulator – Provides a simulation capability for SUAV operations. The simulator provides the operator a
means of learning (or re-familiarization) the button use and to refine skills associated with flying in various terrain
and weather conditions and states of system degradation.
7. FalconView – Provides a tactical mapping capability that has been modified for SUAS operations, via the RPUAV
tool. The RPUAV tool allows the operator to monitor the SUAS mission, adjust waypoints, perform Mission Oper-
ator Functions, view images captured from the AV and manage data on the GCS hub.
8. Scenery Installer – Provides a means of installing FlightGear world scenery for use with the SUAV Simulator.
9. Shortcut to RPUAV Logs – Provides a shortcut to the C:\RPUAV_Logs folder. This folder is the default target lo-
cation for .ntf, .jpg and .mpg files from the hub, RPUAV tool and AVScreener.
NOTE
A one-hour mission recording can take approximately 3GB of the Hard Drive. Remember to
regularly delete or transfer files from this folder.
10. Roxio Easy CD&DVD Creator – Provides a capability of creating CDs and DVDs.
0071 00-8
TM 1-1550-695-13&P 0071 00
NOTE
Items in the Recycle Bin remain there until you decide to permanently delete them from your
computer. These items still take up hard disk space.
When it fills up, Windows automatically cleans out enough space in the Recycle Bin to accom-
modate the most recently deleted files and folders.
If you’re running low on hard disk space, always remember to empty the Recycle Bin. You can
also restrict the size of the Recycle Bin to limit the amount of hard disk space it takes up.
11. Recycle Bin – The Recycle Bin provides a safety net when deleting files or folders. When you delete any of these
items from your hard disk, Windows places it in the Recycle Bin and the Recycle Bin icon changes from empty to
full. Items deleted from a floppy disk or network drives are permanently deleted and are not sent to the Recycle
Bin. Files in the Recycle bin can be restored back to their original location.
NOTE
The RSTA laptop is not to be connected to a LAN.
12. Internet Explorer – With Internet Explorer, you can view the web page associated with the GCS or RVT hub
(http://192.168.1.1/).
The primary software tools intended for the use with the SUAS are: FalconView with the RPUAV add on tool, AV
Screener, AV Screener Live, and the SUAV Simulator. The setup and operation of these software tools are discussed
in FRP> WP 0015 00 <, FRP> WP 0024 00 < and WP 0034 00.
. . . .
The primary software tools intended for the use with the SUAS are: FalconView with the RPUAV add on tool, AV
Screener, AV Screener Live, and the SUAV Simulator. The setup and operation of these software tools are discussed
in LRIP> WP 0014 00 <, LRIP> WP 0023 00 < and WP 0034 00.
. . . .
0071 00-9/10 blank

Small Unmanned Aircraft System (Suas) RQ-11B NSN 1550-01-538-9256 (EIC: 60C)

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Small Unmanned Aircraft System (Suas) RQ-11B NSN 1550-01-538-9256 (EIC: 60C)

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

TM 1-1550-695-13&P

OPERATOR AND FIELD MAINTENANCE MANUAL

SMALL UNMANNED AIRCRAFT SYSTEM (SUAS)

HEADQUARTERS, DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY

OPERATOR AND FIELD MAINTENANCE MANUAL

SMALL UNMANNED AIRCRAFT SYSTEM (SUAS)

CURRENT AS OF 28 March 2008

TM 1-1550-695-13&P, 28 March 2008, is updated as follows:

6. Add the following new work packages.

WARNING SUMMARY (LRIP AND FRP)

WARNING SUMMARY – Continued

WARNING SUMMARY – Continued

Channel selection must be coordinated in advance to avoid interference between systems.

WARNING SUMMARY – Continued

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES/WORK PACKAGES

INSERT LATEST UPDATED PAGES/WORK PACKAGES. DESTROY SUPERSEDED DATA.

Original .. 0 ... 28 Mar 2008 Change .. 1 ... 11 Jun 2008

Page / WP *Change Page / WP *Change Page / WP *Change Page / WP *Change

* Zero in this column indicates an original page or work package

A/B blank Change - 1

OPERATOR AND FIELD MAINTENANCE MANUAL

SMALL UNMANNED AIRCRAFT SYSTEM (SUAS)

REPORTING ERRORS AND RECOMMENDING IMPROVEMENTS

CURRENT AS OF 28 March 2008

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

CHAPTER 1 – GENERAL INFORMATION, EQUIPMENT

Equipment Description And Data FRP> ................................................................... ..........................0003 00

Theory Of Operation (LRIP and FRP)..................................................................................................0004 00

CHAPTER 2 – OPERATOR INSTRUCTIONS

Displays FRP> ...................................................................................................................................0007 00

Warning Displays LRIP> ....................................................................................................................0008 00

Warning Displays FRP> .....................................................................................................................0009 00

System Assembly (LRIP and FRP)......................................................................................................0010 00

Preflight Procedures FRP> ...................................................................................... ..........................0012 00

Launch (LRIP and FRP)............................................................................................ ..........................0013 00

Landing, Recovery and Inspection FRP> ...........................................................................................0015 00

System Disassembly (LRIP and FRP).................................................................................................0016 00

Battery Charging Procedure FRP> .....................................................................................................0019 00

FalconView and the RPUAV Tool LRIP> .............................................................................................0020 00

FalconView and the RPUAV Tool FRP> ..............................................................................................0021 00

Mission Image Processing (LRIP and FRP).........................................................................................0022 00

AVScreener FRP> ..............................................................................................................................0024 00

Range and Bearing Tool......................................................................................................................0025 00

CHAPTER 3 – FIELD LEVEL TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES

TABLE OF CONTENTS – Continued

Intermittent Or No GPS Signal.............................................................................................................0038 00

CHAPTER 4 – FIELD LEVEL MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS

CHAPTER 5 – SUPPORTING INFORMATION

iii/iv blank Change 1

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

LRIP AND FRP INDICATORS

WORK PACKAGE TITLES

1. LRIP> : LRIP only

2. FRP> : FRP only

USE OF SHALL, SHOULD, AND MAY

WARNINGS, CAUTIONS AND NOTES

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL – Continued

A procedure, practice, or condition, etc. that is essential to emphasize.

SMALL UNMANNED AIRCRAFT SYSTEM (RQ-11B)

GENERAL INFORMATION (LRIP AND FRP)

• Remote reconnaissance and surveillance and target acquisition (RSTA).

LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS/ACRONYMS – CONTINUED

LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS/ACRONYMS – CONTINUED

Page / WP Change Page / WP Change Page / WP Change Page / WP Change